PLAN HISTORY

DATE REV NO. DESCRIPTION OWN CHKD APPD

00.1100 &.
-
-
SUBMITTED TO OWNER FOR APPROVAL.
ISSUED FOR WORKING.
Y.K.HA
1/ /
07.07.13

08.00.24
&.
-
-
-
-
APPROVED BY OWNER WITH COMMENTS.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCT ION.
ISSUED AS FINISHIED PLAN(H.NO.2317)
Y.K.HA
/
I.S.LEE ~ K.W.KIM
K.W.KIM

08.09.14 - - ISSUED AS FIN/SHIED PLAN(H.NO.2318) I.S.LEE ~ K.W.KIM

08.10.27 - - ISSUED AS FINISHIED PLANIH.NO.2319) . I.S.LEE ~ K.W.KIM

STAMP AREA • ·'£~·l!t.~

® ~~ ~Jf'a 1
FINISHED PLAN ® ,..lE 10j >41 1 ..
AI'ilXIl!~ (?JAil
1
1
. .GAS IOIOSSOS 7I>t1"'~'" (71)41) I
~ ~H!l~" (1 il},!;,) 1
2 3 1 8 AI~~f,I W~) I
AI'iI iBHJ?) ..
IMO 9354935 gl~~~~~~
1
I

A(V)-6 S! B R
THIS DRAWING OR DOCUMENT IS THE PROPERTY OF DAEWOO SHIPBUILDING &MARINE ~ 711 8
ENGINEERING CO., LTD. AND MUST NOT BE PARTIALLY OR WHOLLY COPIED OR USED FOR 0 FOR WORKING
ANY OTHER PURPOSE WITHOUT PR IOR MlITTEN PERM ISS ION OF DSME.
(1" I!'! ~ 71~J:1~~ C!'fH!OII~(~)21 "t!°~i AlB 5~~'rI Simlol '!JHoI21'i: 113J:folJi l1t~ ~XI~)
rsr FOR CONST.
o FOR REVISION
IMO NO. 2317:9350599, 2318:9350604, 2319:9354935, 2320:9370549 M:( )A3:( )
PROJ NO. PROJECT
2317/18/19/20 MARAN GAS 83,800 M3 LPG CARRIER
TITLE
APPD BY KWKIM / ?J ~ ~

CHKD BY
Y.K.HA I (if § :;>
V/D OF
PERSONNEL ELEVATOR ;:
OWN BY
:
( TEL: 4 3 I 6)

HYUNDAI ELEV.CO .. LTD

DEPT SHEET 1 I 2 ~
ACCOMMODATION
I~ DESIGN TEAM
DATE
2006.11.06
SCALE
NONE
DWG NO.
DV561 A001
REM' !1
~
E - 1014 .!!B!!I DAEWOO SHIPBUILDING &
MARINE ENGINEERING r.n 1m
 CREW ELEVATOR
FOR HULL NO. 2317/18/19/20
DAEWOO SHIPBUILDING & MARINE ENGINEERING CO., LTD.

(FAB. NO. : E 7191)

HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO., LTD

 CREW ELEVATOR

FOR HULL NO. 2317/18/19/20

DAEWOO SHIPBUILDING & MARINE ENGINEERING CO., LTD.

(FAB. NO. : E 7191)

 HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO., LTD

CONTENTS FOR HULL NO. 2317/18/19/20

PAGE
Ⅰ . TECHNICAL DATA
1) SPECIFICATION AND DATA ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- A)-1
2) CALCULATIONS
· CALCULATION OF THE STRENGTH (GUIDE RAILS) ----------------------------------------------- B)-1 ~ B)-5
· CALCULATION OF THE STRENGTH (CAR FRAME) ------------------------------------------------ C)-1 ~ C)-8
· CALCULATION OF THE STRENGTH (WIRE ROPE) ----------------------------------------------------------- D)-1

Ⅱ . LAYOUT PLAN
DWG. NO DESCRIPTION
HD-719101~3 LAYOUT PLAN --------------------------------------------------------------- E)-1 ~ E)-3

Ⅲ . LAYOUT MANUAL & ASS’Y DRAWING

1) ELECTRIC PART

L-206-5A003 CONTROL PANEL ASSY --------------------------------------------------------- F)-1

L-286-5B002 CAGE JUNCTION BOX ------------------------------------------------------------ F)-2
L-280-1C001 OPB. ASS’Y -------------------------------------------------------------------------- F)-3
L-262-0C001 HALL INDICATOR BUTTON ----------------------------------------------------- F)-4
L-241-1B001 ARRANGEMENT FOR FLS, ASS’Y -------------------------------------------- F)-5
L-242-2A002 LANDING CONTROL DEVICE ASS’Y ----------------------------------------- F)-6

L-240-1A003 BRANCH JUNCTION BOX -------------------------------------------------------- F)-7

---------- AUTOTELEPHONE -----------------------F)-8
---------- AUTOTELEPHONE -------------------F)-9
---------- ALARM BOX -----------------------F)-10

2) MECHNAICAL PART

L-321-0M001 CAR ASSEMBLY -------------------------------------------------------------------- G)-1

L-375-1F031 LANDING DOOR ASS’Y (A-0 & A-60 SWING ASS’Y) -------------------- G)-2
L-375-1F011 INTERLOCK ASS’Y ---------------------------------------------------------------- G)-3

L-131-4M001 TWO SIDE OPEN CAR DOOR OPERATOR(2SSO) ------- G)-4

 L-121-0M001 CAR FRAME WITH SAFETY DEVICE ----------------------------------------- G)-5
L-121-0M002 SLACK ROPE SWITCH ------------------------------------------------------------ G)-6
L-126-1B001 GUIDE SHOE ------------------------------------------------------------------------ G)-7
L-181-1M001 CWT ASSEMBLY -------------------------------------------------------------------- G)-8
L-115-0M001 GOVERNOR & GOVERNOR TENSION SHEAVE -------------------------- G)-9
L-101-1K006 TRACTION MACHINE ----------------------------------------------------------- G)-10
L-103-1M006 MACHINE FOUNDATION ------------------------------------------------------- G)-11
L-183-1M001 BUFFER (CAR AND CWT) ----------------------------------------------------- G)-12
L-182-1M001 GUIDE RAIL FOR ELEVATOR ------------------------------------------------ G)-13
L-115-1M003 ROLLING & PITCHING SWITCH ASS’Y ------------------------------------ G)-14
L-128-1M005 T-CABLE GUIDE ASS’Y --------------------------------------------------------- G)-15

Ⅳ. ELEVTRIC DIAGRAM
FIELD-1 ~ 4 WIRING DIAGRM ---------------------------------------------------------- H)-1 ~ H)-4
COL.01~10 WIRING DIAGRM (13SHEETS) ---------------------------------------- H)-5~H)-16
COL.90 ~ 91 WIRING DIAGRM (2 SHEETS) --------------------------------------- H)-17~H)-18

Ⅴ . MISCELLANEOUS
L-295-A-28 NAME PLATE ------------------------------------------------------------------------- I)-1
L-295-OA-010 NAME PLATE ------------------------------------------------------------------------- I)-2
L-295-OA-016 NAME PLATE ------------------------------------------------------------------------- I)-3
L-295-OA-025 NAME PLATE ------------------------------------------------------------------------- I)-4
L-295-1B001 NAME PLATE ------------------------------------------------------------------------- I)-5
---------- TEST AND CERTIFICATES
·A-0 & A-60 SINGLE LEAF HINGED DOOR ----------------------- J)-1~J)-7
·TEST CERTIFICATE FOR WIRE ROPE (φ 12) --------------------------- J)-8
·TEST CERTIFICATE FOR WIRE ROPE (φ 9.5) -------------------------- J)-9
---------- TABLE FOR LUBRICATING OIL & GREASE -------------------------------- K)-1
---------- SPARE PARTS LIST -------------------------------------------------------- L)-1~L)-6
---------- SCOPE OF SUPPLY LIST ------------------------------------------------ M)-1~M)-3
I . TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE

1) SPECIFICATION AND DATA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A)-l

2) CALCULATIONS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B)-l - D)-l

 P A-1

SPECIFICATION AND DATA

HULL NO. : 2317/18/19/20

TYPE OF ELEVATOR CREW ELEVATOR

CAPACITY 360KG (4 PERSONS)
SPEED 60 M/MIN
DRIVE VVVF
TYPE OF CONTROL 2 BC (SELECTIVE COLLECTIVE CONTROL SYSTEM)
TRAVELLING HEIGHT 17900
CAR INTERNAL SIZE 950(W) X 1000(D) X 2100(H)
NO. OF SERVICE 6 STOPS ( E/R 1ST. DK,, UPPER DK., A, B, C, D DK. )
HOME LANDING NO.5-DECK
CLEARANCE OF DOOR 800(W) X 2000(H)
DOOR OPERATION 2 SPEED SIDE OPEN DOOR (2SSO)
LANDING DOOR ONE LEAF SWING DOOR WITH A-0 & A-60 INSULATION
(WITH VISION GLASS)
TRACTION MACHINE TM400
DIA. OF MAIN SHEAVE Φ 570
MAIN ROPE Φ 12 X 4 (1:1 ROPING)
TRACTION MACHNE 44
IP GRADE
CONTROL PANEL 23
CAR RAIL 18K RAIL
CWT RAIL 13K RAIL
MOTOR CAPACITY 5.5 KW
MAIN 3 PH 440V 60 HZ
POWER SUPPLY
LIGHT 1 PH 220V 60 HZ
CAR WALL STAINLESS STEEL ETCHING (SE-
409)
CAR DOOR STAINLESS STEEL ETCHING (SE-

PAINTING COLOR 409)

CAR CEILING STAINLESS STEEL HAIRLINE
LANDING DOOR MUSELL NO. 2.5 Y 9/2

ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT MUNSELL NO. 7.5 BG 7/2

FLOORING LUCKSTRONG (TYPE : RS-90028)
RULES AND REGULATIONS H2317/18/20: DNV, H2319:ABS
GOVENOR TRIP SPEED (DNV) CAR: 84M/MIN (MAX) CWT: 88M/MIN (MAX)
GOVENOR TRIP SPEED (ABS) CAR: 85.3M/MIN (MAX) CWT: 85.3M/MIN (MAX)
-.-- ..-
-I
I I_I..!
.. 1-.
~

-1-•
-.--
• -1-.
•

,Ui m,

• hi

SE-406 SE-409 SE-438 SE-439 SE-527

 HULL NO. : H2317/18/19/20

CALCULATION OF THE STRENGTH OF GUIDE RAIL

* CAR GUIDE RAIL : 18K

* CWT. GUIDE RAIL : 13K
* TOTAL WEIGHT OF CAR : 750 kg
* CAPACITY (RATED LOAD) : 360 kg
* TOTAL WORKING WEIGHT(CAR: 1110 kg - - - - - [ W1 ]
* CWT WEIGHT : 930 kg - - - - - [ W2 ]
DISTANCE FROM SHIP'S METACENTER TO GRAVITY CENTER OF :
1) CAR IN TOP
TRANSVERSEYC :
VERTICAL ZC : ABT. 23.7 m
LONGI. XC :
2) CWT IN TOP
TRANSVERSE YW :
VERTICAL ZW : ABT. 22.9 m
LONGI. XW :

2. MODE OF OPERATION

PASSENGER LIFTS, THEIR ASSOCIATED MACHINERY AND STRUCTURE ARE TO BE

DESIGNED TO OPERATE AT SEA WITH RESPECT TO THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS :

a) ROLLING : ± 10 ° , WITH 10 SECOND PERIOD.(LR,DNV,ABS,BV,GL,NK,KR)

b) PITCHING : ± 5 ° , WITH 7 SECOND PERIOD.(DNV,ABS,BV,GL,NK,KR)
PITCHING : ± 7.5 ° , WITH 7 SECOND PERIOD.(LR)

IN ADDITION TO THE OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS THE LIFTS. ASSOCIATED MACHINE

AND STRUCTURE ARE TO BE DESIGNED TO WITHSTAND THE FORCES RESULTING FR
CONSIDERATION OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS WHEN IN ITS STOWED CONDITION

a) ROLL : ± 30 ° , WITH 10 SECOND PERIOD.

b) PITCH : ± 10 ° , WITH 7 SECOND PERIOD.
c) HEAVE : AMPLITUDE 0.0125 L WITH 10 SECOND PERIOD.
WHERE, "L" IS THE RULE LENGTH OF THE SHIP.

2)-1
 HULL NO. H2317/18/19/20

3. CALCULATION OF CAR GUIDE RAIL (CAR) * GUIDE RAIL : 18K

l = 150 cm

1) ROLLING ±: 30 ° , WITH 10 SECOND PERIOD.

W1 1 2π θ
Fx = {sinθ + × ( ) 2 × × π × Zc}
2 g T 180

W1 1 2 π 2 30
Fx = {sin 30° + ×( ) × × π ×23.7}
2 9 .8 10 180
= 554.9 kg

MAX. BENDING MOMENT (Mb max)

l 150
Mb max = × Fx = × 554.9 = 20810.4 kg ⋅ cm
4 4

STRESS (σ )

Mb max 20810.4
σ = = = 700.7 kg / cm2 < 1840 kg / cm2 OK!
Zx 29.7

MAX. DEFLECTION ( δ max )

3
FX × l 3 554.9 × 150
δ max= = = 1.0 mm ≤ 3mm OK!
48EI x 48× 2.1×106 × 179

2)-2
 HULL NO. H2317/18/19/20

b) PITCHING :± 10 ° , WITH 10 SECOND PERIO

W1 1 2π θ
Fy = {sinθ + × ( )2 × × π × ZC }
4 g T 180

W1 1 2π
Fy = {sin 10°+ × ( ) 2 × 10 × π ×23.7 }
4 9 .8 7 180
= 142.6 kg

MAX. BENDING MOMENT (Mb max)

l 150
Mb max = × Fy = × 142.6 = 5345.8 kg × cm
4 4

STRESS (σ )

Mb max 5345.8
σ = = = 279.9 kg / cm2 < 1840 kg / cm2 OK!
Zy 19.1

MAX. DEFLECTION δ( max )

Fy × l 3 142.6 × 150
3
δ max= = = 0.4 mm ≤ 3mm OK!
48 EI y 48 × 2 .1 × 10 6 × 108

* ALLOWABLE STRESS OF GUIDE RAIL

σ a = F × σ

WHERE, σ a = ALLOWABLE STRESS, IN kg / cm2

F = STRESS FACTOR, 0.8
σ = FAILURE STRESS, IN kg / cm2
σ = 1.0 σ y
σ y = YIELD STRESS, 2300 kg / cm2

∴σ a = 0.8 × 2300 = 1840 kg / cm2

2)-3
 HULL NO. H2317/18/19/20

4. CALCULATION OF CWT. GUIDE RAIL (CWT.) * GUIDE RAIL : 13K

l = 150 cm

1) ROLLING ±: 30 ° , WITH 10 SECOND PERIOD.

W2 1 2π 2 θ
Fx = {sinθ + ×( ) × × π × Z w}
2 g T 180

{sin 30° + 1 × ( 2π ) 2 ×
W 30
= 2
× π × 22.9 }
2 9.8 10 180

= 457.1 kg

MAX. BENDING MOMENT (Mb max)

l 150
Mb max = × Fx = × 457.1 = 17141 kg ⋅ cm
4 4

STRESS (σ )

Mb max 17141.5
σ = = = 1198.7 kg / cm < 1840 kg / cm
2 2
OK!
Zx 14.3

MAX. DEFLECTION δ( max )

FX × l 3
3
457.1 × 150
δ max= = = 2.6 mm ≤ 3mm OK!
48EI x 48 × 2.1 × 106 × 59.5

2)-4
 σ ±
± °° +
+ 9
9 .. ° 8
8 ×× = (( 10
10 ×
× )) ×
× 180
180 °° = kg
kg ×
× = π / ×
×
cm
cm < } ≤ kg kg × cm / cm

HULL NO. H 2317/18/19/20

2) PITCHING ± : 10 ° , WITH 10 SECOND PERIO

W2 1 2π 2 θ
Fy = {sinθ + ×( ) × × π × Z w}
4 g T 180

{sin 10° + 1 × ( 2π ) 2 × 10
W
= 2
× π × 22.9 }
4 9 .8 7 180
= 116.8 kg

MAX. BENDING MOMENT (Mb max)

l
Mb max = × F y = 150 × 116.8 = 4378.9 kg ⋅ cm
4 4

STRESS (σ )

Mb 4378.9
σ = max
= = 387.5 kg / cm2 < 1840 kg / cm2 OK!
Z y 11.3

MAX. DEFLECTIONδ(max )

Fy × l 3 116.8 × 150
3
δ max= = = 0.8 mm ≤ 3mm OK!
48 EI y 48 × 2 .1 × 10 6 × 50.4

2)-5
 ,
[I] [-1 I

CAR FRANE STRENGTH CALCULATION

1. RANGE OF USE

Dia.gra.r'l showing the ra.nge use) see below

G = K + Q + T + M(kg)

= Ca.r + loa.oI + tra. velling ca.ble + cOr'lpensa. tion cha.in

or belt,

2000
®
1900
1800 ""'"
1700
1600
I""" r---
1500
1400
1300
"'" ~
~®
1200 I
I
950 1050 1150 1250 C
1000 1100 1200 1300

Disto.nce between guides

Strength of the co.r fro.Me is co.lculo. ted in points A - B

--L _
 [£] [-21

2. MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE STRESS IN CAR FRAMES:

Tension I co~pression I bending or any co~bination of these.
op E 173 MPa
Shear 'Tp = 140 MPa
Material used in the car fra~e: ASTM-A36 CA283-D) A~erican
standard.

3. MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE DEFLECTION IN CAR FRAMES:

For bea~es 1/960 of its span.

For cantilever bea~s 1/480 of its length.

4. CAR FRAME - UPPER BEAMS

In order to si~plify the syste~ the total suspended load is supposed
to situate in the ~iddle of the bea~.

G
4.1 Bending stress
I
M
=z
(J'

Bending ~o~ent
where
is 1 I

C
I
2
M=
9,81 ·G . C
4
I- -I
Section Modulus

Z = 449,9 10 3 ~~3

4.2 Deflection

3
9,81 ·G . C
d - where
48· E· I

!
1_
 [£] [-3 I

Modulus of elasticity

E 210000 flPo

Modulus of inertia

4
I 1662· 10 4 1'11'1

Results of upper beal'l calculation see below

A- B = Calculated pOints

G Maxil'lul'I suspended load.

C Distance between guides (span)

G = Bending stress during stalic loading.

CYi = Ben din 9 s t res s duri ngin e r t i a loa din 9 i s 2 .. G.

()p = Perl'lissible bending stress.

d = Deflection

Perl'lissible deflection

UPPER BEAM
POINT G kg C 1'11'1 MPa MPa MPa d 1'11'1 C/960 1'11'1

A 2000 1050 26,5 53 173 0,13 1.1

B 1300 1300 21.4 42,8 173 0,17 1.35

lL _
 [£] C-4\

5. CAR FRAME - VERTICAL BEAMS

The most unfavourable situation for the vertical beams will occur
during normal functioning (stiff corners) with the nominal load
Q distributed one-half of the area of the platform adjacent to
the site.

5.1 Bending stress

G
B
M where
I
I
0 0
Z
The maximum bending moment

E: ~+Q G Q
---
B·e E: 2 4 2 4
M
4 c:>
~
Horizontal force c:>
M
[

B= 9.81 Q
C 1
.-.-
II

4 e OJ
Q G-Q
where e is the distance
between the x-axis of
c/4
the upper and lower beams. B
...
o o I

2= 15,0 iO 3 mm 3

5.2 The vertical beams will also gUide the vertical forces. In the
situation shown paragraph 5.1 the left beam carries 75% of
the rated load Q plus half of the weight of the other suspened load
(cage. frame. compensation etc),

The stress due to the pull force is

F
CJpv= S where

I
l:
,
[I] [-5 I

Pull force

F= 9,81 ( ~ + t
Area of one vertical bea~

S = 1341 ~~2

4.3 The co~bined stress will be

(f 0i + eJPv
Results of side bea~ calculation see below

A - B Calculated points
s

G Haxi~u~ suspended load.

Q s Haxi~u~ rated load: Q~ax.

C Distance between guides (span)

~ s Bending stress during static loading.

o;yS Pull stress during static loading.

~ Co~bine stress during static loading.

~ Co~bine stress during inertia loading s 2 .~.

0; Per~issible co~bine stress.

VERTICAL BEAH
POINT G kg C ~~ Qkg ~HPa 0; HPa y ~HPa ~HPa 0;HPa
A 2000 1050 1000 42,9 9.1 52 104 173

B 1300 1300 1000 53.1 6.1 59,2 118.4 173

 [£] [-6 I

6. CAR FRAHE - LO~ER BEAH

The most unfavourable situation for the lower beams will occur
during a buffer stop.

NG/2 NG/2
~~ t ~
+ +
6. I Bending stress
i I; +
+
+

M I b f N· G b I
where
0-= [
Z I- -I
Bending moment is
N·G
!
~ t t ~
NG/2 NG/2

9,81 oN .(j
HI 4
oC

Ml
9,81 oN .(j C-b
o Co _ b
_ o-
H2 2 C C

H3 H2 1f-::- ~ NEGATIVE NONENT

M2:;a= I I I I I I I

b • 80
~ NEGATIVE NONENT

N • 2. FORCE FACTOR CAUSED

M3~==~~?~ti=c:rr:I,=rIJ:1
t--- ~
BY CAR BUFFER ENGAGEHENT.

M
Section modulus

Z =176 010 3 mm 3

l~_ _
 ,
[£] [-7 I

Resul ts of lower beo.M co.lculo. tion see below

A - B = Co.lculo. ted points

G = Mo.xiMuM suspended loo.d,

C = Disto.nce between guides (spo.n)

(f = Bending stress during the buffer engo.geMent,

CJ; =Bending stress during inertio. loo.ding is 2 * (f ,

(\'p
V = PerMissible bending stress,

LD'WER BEAM
POINT G kg C MM CJ; MPo. <J; MPo.
A 2000 1050 55,0 173
B 1300 1300 67.4 173

Deflection vo.lue of the lower beo.Ms o.re considero.bly sMo.ller (sto. tic
loo.ding) co.Mpo.red to vo.lues of upper beo.Ms, In upper beo.M the loo.d
is situo. ted in the Middle spo.n I but in lower beo.Ms loo.d situo. tes 0. t
the ends of the beo.M,

J... _
,-----------------------------------,
[I] c-81
70

UPPER BEAM
~'
~~
6 Ma. teria.l : SS41
Area. = 1781 I"'H"l2
0
MOMent of inertia. = 8731296 1"11"1 4
co
........ Section Modulus = 97014.4 1"11"13
12

'/

70

200
VERTICAL BEAM

If)
K6 C'.J
r--...
Ma. terio.l : SS41
If) 4,5 Area. = 1341 1"11"1 2
'--- MOMent of inertia. = 3264921"11"1 4
Section Modulus = 7502.11 1"11"1 3

70 70

~ LI~

o
ex:>
........ 4,5
LO'w'ER BEA M
(Y)
cx5 Ma. teria. l : SS41
r--

~ Areo. = 3202 MM 2
MOMent of inertia. = 17147030 1"11"1 4
2 6 Section Modulus = 176409 MM 3
 PROJECT NAME: H 2317/18/19/20

CALCULATION OF THE STRENGTH OF WIRE ROPE

1. POSITION OF MACHINE ROOM

• ON TOP OF HOISTWAY
• AT SIDE OF THE HOISTWAY (TOP)
• AT SIDE OF THE HOISTWAY (LOWER PART)
• IN BOTTOM

2.GENERAL SPEC.
1) TYPE OF WIRE ROPE :8*S(19)
2) DIA. OF WIRE ROPE (d) : 012
3) TENSILE STRENGTH OF WIRE ROPE : 135 kg/mm
4) BREAKING FORCE OF WIRE ROPE W : 5990 kg/wirerope

:~
5) NUMBER OF WIRE ROPE (n)
6) WEIGHT OF CAGE (Q) :, 750 ,kg

OK
7) CAPACITY (L) :' 360 kg
8) WEIGHT OF CWT. (K) :I 930 kg

> 12 -----
9) TRAVELING HEIGHT 18.4 m
9) WEIGHT OF WIRE ROPE (q) 36.4 kg

3. SAFETY FACTOR (S.F) OF WIRE ROPE

F x n
S .F = - - - - - - - =20.9
Q + L + q

* REFERENCE
REQUIRED SAFETY FACTOR FOR WIRE ROPES
* ABS RULE: ABT. 8.6 (FOR SPEED 61 m/min)
* DNV RULE: 12
* LR RULE: 12
* GREEK: 8.6 (FOR SPEED 60 m/min)

2)-1
 CALCULATION OF SHEAVE FRICTION & SPECIFIC PRESSURE
OF THE ROPE IN THE GROOVE

PROJECT : <DW-H2317/18/19/20>

<CONDITION>

Capacity (Q) = 360 kg Traction Sheave Dia. (D) = 57 cm

Car Weight (F) = 750 kg Angle of Contact Wrap (α) = 150 o
Counter Weight (G) = 930 kg Measure of Arc (α ) = 2.61799 rad
Carrying Rope Weight (S) = 35.4 kg Angle of Undercut (β) = 106 o
No. of Ropes (z) = 4 pcs Radian Value (β ) = 1.85 rad
Ropes Diameter (d) = 1.2 cm Coefficient of Friction (μ) = 0.09
Travelling Speed = 1 m/s Coefficient of Acceleratio (ϕ) = 1.1
Lift Travel = 17.9 m Roping/Suspension = 1 : 1
Place of Machine = OVERHEAD

1. Friction For Undercut Groove

β
4 μ (1 − sin ) 0.2195 × 2.617993878
S2 f ( u ) ×α 2 ×α
× ϕ (b ) = e = e π − β − sin β = e = 1.7764
S1

S2 F + 1.25Q + S
×ϕ(b) = ×ϕ (b) = 1.4612 < 1.7764
S1 G

α
B = d × sin = 0.96 cm
2

9.6

o
106

2. Specific Pressure for Undercut Groove

β
8 × cos
F +Q 2 = 59.1 kgf / cm2
K '
max = ×
z × d × D π − β − sin β

12 .5 + 4vc
K ' max < = 8.250 N / mm 2
1 + vc

2
0.591 kgf / mm 2 < 0.842 kgf / mm
 Evaluation of safety factor for suspension ropes

Design Dept. 2004.7.25

Type : Basement type

Equivalent number Nequip of pullleys

N equiv = N equiv(t) + N equiv(p)

N equiv(t) = the equivalent number of traction sheaves

N equiv(p) = the equivalent number of deflection pulley

N equiv(t) = 15.2 From table N.1 : U-angle(β)

N equiv(p) = 4.7
N equiv = 19.9

D t = diameter of the traction sheave

S f = safety factor
N equiv = equivalent number of pulleys
D t = diameter of traction sheave
d r = diameter of the ropes.

Dt= 570
dr= 12

⎛ ⎛ ⎞⎞
⎜ ⎜ ⎟⎟
⎜ ⎜ 695 . 85 × 10 6 × N equiv ⎟ ⎟
⎜ log ⎜ ⎟⎟
⎜ ⎟⎟
8 . 567
⎜ ⎛ Dt ⎞
⎜ ⎜ ⎜
⎜d ⎟ ⎟ ⎟⎟
⎜ ⎝ ⎝ r ⎠ ⎠⎟
Sf = 10 ⎜ 2 . 6834 −
⎛ ⎛ ⎞
− 2 . 894
⎞ ⎟
⎜ log ⎜ 77 . 09 × ⎜⎜
D t
⎟⎟ ⎟ ⎟
⎜ ⎜ ⎝ dr ⎠ ⎟ ⎟
⎜ ⎝ ⎠ ⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ ⎠

= 18.2

Number of pulley = 3
Kp = 1.56
N equiv(p) = 4.7
 PAGE

II. LAYOUT PLAN - - - - - - - - - - - - E)-l - E)-3

 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
IOWG No.1 NOTE
tTHE FOLLOWING WORKS SHALL BE DONE BY YARD.
(Works not included in elevator contract)
1) Stiffenings & structural opening works for machine room
& hoistway.
(Entrance,indica tors, wire ropes,electric equipment & etc.)
- 2) Equipment & their fixing works for door, ventila tion,
>-10
lighting in the machine room.
Mechanical ventilation system is requested to keep
machine room temperature below 40°C against generated
heat of ~ Kcal/Hr by machinery in the room.
3) Pit floor shall be strong enough to withstand the
indicated striking load for guide rails and buffers.
- 2400
FWDe-1 4) Machine room floor shall be strong enough to support
610 940 3 0 500 machine base frame.
CAR INSIDE DEP H):1POO 338 S) Lightings in hoistway and mlc room shall be arranged
in accordance with EN-81-1 by maker and supplied
& installed by shipyard.
6) A ladder shall be installed for the entire height of
- the hoistway and escape hatch shall be installed
-8
over the ladder.
2. Care must be taken to secure that reduction of the free
space in trunk.e.g. as result of insulating will not
cause functional problems or disregard present rules
o concerning passage etc.
- lJl
ro
3. Clear,plumb hoist way with variation shall not -7
exceed 30 mm at any point.

NO DESCRIPTION DIMENSION O'TY WEIGHT RFMARK

01 TRACTION MACHINE 1 420KG
02 SPEED GOVERNOR
03 SPEED GOVERNOR
- 1-o-S-+-=DE=F,....,.S--H=EA-V"""'E,...---+------4--1--11--....7--0K-G-4-----4-6
1
07 CONTROL PANEL BBOWX400DX1600H 1 170KG
08 AUTOTELEPHONE 1 SKG
1

11 MIR DOOR BOOW X 2000H (1) BY YARD

- 12 CAR ASSEMBLY 9S0W X 10000 1 7S0KG -5
13 COUNTERWEIGHT 1 930KG
14 BUFFERS 2 CAR & CWT
15 LADDER BY YARD
16 T-CABLE GUIDE ASS'Y
17 HATCH DOOR BOOW X 2000H
18 RAIL BRACKET BY YARD
19 RAIL BRACKET BY YARD
- 1-'2=:.:0,-+--=R~A~IL=--- ---4_ _1.. ; ,B. .; ,K_---l_ _~--~---!..:FO~R~CAQ!R.l.........I-4
ANGLE FOR CABLE GUIDE(1) 21 RAIL 13K FOR rWT
(I ... 1 Y<; In. T ANGLE) BY HELCO 22 HOLE FOR ESCAPE 600W x SOOH (1) RY YARn
23 EMERGENCY EXIT 600W x 5000 1
ANGLE FOR CABLE GUIDE(2) 24 SUSPENSION EYE ( 1) BY YARD
(L50X50X6T ANGLE) BY HELCO 2S LIGHTS
26 INDICATOR 110WX[A1JHX90D 4
PLAN OF HOISTWA Y 27 OPB. 160WX[A1)HX910 1
- (SCALE :1/20)
t-'2=-=8'-t-~A.;..,.UT~0~T:-=EL~E:-=P~HO=-:'N~E--+--.....;......;..;;.;..;..,;.;;.-1--1.;..-1-----II-------;1- 3

29
30 CAR JUNCTION BOX 637WX14BOX27SH 1
31 BRANCH JUNCTION BO)( 206WXB50X492H
32 PIT SWITCH 140WX106DX1BOH 1

- 1---t--------+------1----1---+-----~2

CUSTOMER
DAEWOO SHIPBUILDING & MARINE ENGINEERING CO.,L TO.
LOCATION
H 2317 /18 /19 /20
REV.NO APPD BY UNIT MM, 4NE++ TITLE
- DATE -1
~---------1---------_+_--------_1_-~R~EV~D~B..:...Y--I ~ ~CH_K_D-B-Y_+---+_-S__C__A-L....
~--------~--------~--------~-~C~HK~D~B~Y~ ~
0
E -+1_/2_0_,_1/_1__1
D~D BY D.H.HAN PRO~- ~D ANG~
LAYOUT PLAN
:> ~--_+---+_-T.:..:I..::::O.:..=.N-~--__I
~ DRWN BY D.H.HAN DATE JUL.13,·06 1--------------------~R~IEVu.-.:iNno----1
CONTENTS ~----L.--- ........---1....---__I DWG NO

~~):MtfH~ HD- 719101

I I T I I I I I I I I I I I SHT NO
N M L K J I H G F E o ( B A Y3
 22 ESCAPE(BYHATCH HOLE
YARD)
(600WX450D)
600
840 1100
10

L100x75
BY YARD 4-_ 120 HOLES Cl
(BY YARD) -:t
CD

NAV. OK + 950

MIC ROOM DOOR

WITH EMERGENCY ESCAPE LOCK ~AV. OK LEVEL
Cl
\D
CD
x~ r----- 8
I
I
I
STEP & HAND RAIL I
(BY YARD) r----- J
I
I
I
315 NAV. OK LEVEL I

7
610 1100 690
3200 2400
It. CF 00 RAIL It. CF 00 RAIL
PLAN OF MACHINE ROOM I
(SCALE :1120) It. CF 00 RAIL ! CF 00 RAIL 6

SECTION X-X
1900 500
DRAIN SCUPPER
(BY YARD)

5
OIL PAN FOR RAil
(4EA) (BY HElCO)
Cl Cl
Lf1 -:t
CD CD
BUFFER I Lf1
FOR CW
BUFFER ~
F~R
I

CAR Cl 1l0F
____ _ Lf1 4
F!2 F1 ~

Cl
J\
F5
PROTECTION (OVER
FOR (WT (BY HELCO)
I
I F4
:
u Cl
lCREACTION FORCES
F1=5000 KG
Lf1
CD
\D
CD
F2=4000 KG
F3=5400 KG
F4=1750 KG lEACH CAR RAIL
F5=1B50 KG lEACH CWT RAIL 3
OK. -1300
F4 AND F5 INDICATE THE REACTION
FORCES BELOW CAR AND CWT RAILS

1900 500
NO. DESCRIPTION DIMENSION O'TY BOTTOM OF EQUIPMENT 610 1100 690
07 CONTROL PANEL 880(W) X 1600(H) 1 BOTTOM OF MIC ROOM + 400
2400
08 AUTO TELEPHONE 1 BOTTOM OF MIC ROOM + 1350 2
It. CF 00 RAIL It. CF 00 RAIL
CUSTOMER
LEVEL OF EQUIPMENTS IN MACHINE ROOM PIT PLAN VIEW DAEWOO SHIPBUILDING & MARINE ENGINEERING CO.,L TO.
(SCALE :1120) LOCATION
H 2317 /18 /19 120
REV.NO APPD BY UNIT MM TITLE
DATE 1
REVD BY
CHKD BY
Vl
z
0
in
CHKD BY
DSND BY D.H.HAN
SCALE 1/20
PROJE- 3RD ANGLE
TION
LAYOUT PLAN
:>
UJ
a:: DRWN BY D.H.HAN DATE JUL.13,'06
CONTENTS REV.NO

~t'E!MttH~
DWG NO
HD- 719102
SHT NO
N M L K J H G F E D C B A 2 /3
 I J I I I I I 1 I I 1 I 1 I I
I' ON ~)MO I
SUSPENSION EYE
24 (FOR 1 TON) \
(BY YARD)

- r-10

~ND GRIP

a
II-~ I ~.
NAV. OK I:J::I ~ g a a
- -'---.....;.,-+-rl/1f"i-r---=-----t-----a-t ;
a
LJ"'l
r-
~.-@- r-9
LJ"'l
...jI- - I SUPPORT ANGLE
~ ~
M a a W L100X75X7t (BY YARD) ~ J OF CAR
I' a a ~
-
_~I ~ ~
~
-----=0:8-- ~\ I
-
_O_O_K__........
1

I
N

a
a
00
-
a
a
LJ"'l

a
a
-
a
a
LJ"'l
N
I.J.J
---l
L:J
~
a
o
=:::~::::=:::::J::::::::::::::.
~g
LN
ItrOF DOOR ~
~
(j)0 -8

~-++--~ '- ""I \

N ~
I

a LJ"'l a
1
a 0:: LJ"'l
a
- o
( OK I -
....;."...,;;,,;.----t-t- -----"'1'------j
LJ"'l-
CL
a a CL
a a ::l
LJ"'l
I

LJ"'l VI

-
o
a
00
- - ! \ i I / ! O( ""'OETAIL
N a r-7

"i l
1- a
I
B OK
~
- ;
\l,;~~
-------~- -
1

----"'ll-------t - I.J.J
---l
I I
a a CO

I a
a
~
a
~
«
W
a
a
L:J
Z i
a gl- a Z
w
co LJ"'l

l*, .
1

N a a CL
- LJ"'l a o
r-6
A OK I
-----t----'- - --IIoIf-------j
LJ"'l
Cl
I
i
CO

, f/I1 \ '
_~
,i~$11 \'
a
I
W
DOG STEP & HAND GRIP ...:..i
LU ~

-----U-P-P-.-O-K-.-<'~~""""'-----t
> CL
« !
- c::
..-
L_l~_i
I - I - - N a
a
r-S
a a a a
1
a a LJ"'l LJ"'l
a
LJ"'l
LJ"'l
~
N
~
EACH OK.
=':":":::':":"'-=":'':':'-~_.....l._+- +-+
I-----I------!'-
--a
...J

..-«a
a
a
LJ"'l
LJ"'l
N
~
~
IQif-
..- ~-
0:: 558 558
,_ a o
- 1_
a
LJ"'l
N CL
BHD OPENING: 1116 r-4
a ~ CL
LJ"'l- ::l
~ a VI 860 I 840
1- ~
a
a
g-=
a
LJ"'l
a
a
1700
a ~ LJ"'l LJ"'l
a N

- ElR 1ST OK.

LJ"'l1-
a-
a a
I.J.J
---l
CO
VIEW OF A-A
~o~ + '@
32 g~ - ~ ~ ~ (SCALE :1/20) -3
ZLJ"'l
~Nt l of.. ~a..
1fto~"iI~"'"t~........,..~-~-------...L...----l...-+--~+--~+------l---4.A-U
- ~ LIGHTING PITCH

DRAINING SCUPPER
IN PIT(BY YARD) t OF CAR RAIL ~ 5
- t OF CWT. ~ ~
...J r-2
«a: CUSTOMER
SEC.OF HOISTW AY DAEWOO SHIPBUILDING & MARINE ENGINEERING CO.,L TO.
(SCALE :1/100) ...J LOCATION
«
a:
H 2317 /18 /19 120
REV.NO APPD BY Y.K.KIM UNIT MM TITLE
- SEP .12.2007 DATE r-1
D.H.HAN
LAYOUT PLAN

I I I I I I I
N L J I G F A
ill. LAYOUT MANUAL & ASS'Y DRAWING

PAGE

1) ELECTRIC PART ---------------- F)-I - F)-8

2) MECHANICAL PART --------------- G)-I - G)-I?

 r,/
'.' :----1

" , . --~ ,( (,
" ,..:,/ I

==== ==
==== r--------+-+--::::.A' ,:~ fJ ...
0==
==== ==
U1
....
C"l

I:,
,_.__ c, I ",,"n,
• '. I_~r- '.~._", TO'
,"', ". "':.1
'_

o
\D
U1

o o
o o
~ o ~
o
~

- ~ /

==
==
== o
== \D
U1
==
==
== 250
== 60

o0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o

........._......
o
880 400 \D

940
~~
1000

c;L., ,."....." ", ···,··'··················· ···F.····· .,............ ,." .•".. .................................., T " ,................................ , ,.................. ·7·..·····,·········································· , " , . . " . " .. ,.,.,"Q, " ,.,',.." . . . . , .., "" . , .." "':r' .' -It"
 CAR JUNCTION BOX LAYOUT MANUAL
TYPE : SHIP ELEVATOR L-286-5B002
ASS'Y D\.JG,

[E] F-2 I

EMERGENCY STOP S~ITCH

TOP BEAM

540

• • AUTO/INSP, S'w'ITCH

DOOR OPEN/CLOSE S~ITCH

DOOR S~ITCH
CAR JUNCTION BOX
TOP BEAM

• • •

CABLE GLAND CABLE COAMING

<FOR T-CABLD

BRACKET FOR CAR CABLES

REMOTE BOX

BUTTON
DO~N

UP BUTTON
EMERGENCY STOP S~ITCH CAR JUNCTION BOX MOUNT LOCATION

?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO"LTD, L-286-5B002

 A [RlpL s ::,-

,'-----
BT

l!i
.
5@1 ~
~
8888GB
I.
<
-) F T 1\1

-,
,J

1000

@@
_-I
_-=-=.15.:::...-0 60 432 432 60
984
 H/\

490,000

~===================================================== ====================s::==================,.
~@ @~ ,
~--~ ~-, I--
o
o
o Il o!i
I I HI

z i~ 'i lEJ1 I"

iiloi
I

a
~ :!° ~! ~ _-
I III
oE- CO ~- ~ L:::J i! °!
III I

~ ~
~@ @~
1==::::=::==::::::::=::::::===::::::==::==::==::::==::=::==::=::=::::::::=::::::====================:z:===================="

~T R
490,000
II k
,
I'( ]

o
o
o
av
....
iioi!
I !o=!
..--ll.
I

I HI
ff=====================================================

~@
II

HI

<;~
.-"?v

:.~
oE- CO
c
>
~
rn.
WI
m
======z================================~

@~
II
011--,
11I1

mol
III
,
i i o! ,
I
,,I-- L CR

L __ ~ .... t-~ I--

~@ @~
i==::====::=::=::::==::=::==::::::=========::::=::::====::=::::::::::=::====::====::::::::======::::=::=z::::::=::::====::=::=::=="
r

490,000

N
OO 0 o 0 o 0000
o 00 o 0 o 0 o 0
o 0 o 0 o 0 o 0
0000 0 o 0 00000 0000
o 0 o 0 o 0 o 0
o 0 o 0 o 0
o

m
!f=================================:=:==:=:==:=:=:=========:=
========:=====:::=::::::Es:zz:E==::z::z====:==~ 80000 00 000 0 0000
~@ @~
..--ll. 011--, 1- ::::.; Ii ~.j<
I III '/ III I ,
o
o c £ :,:,:,01, 000 000
o
a
I, r.,I,
1111 ~ o E - C O :- > <'-
1111
o
o
0 o
o
0
0
~ !c=! ~_~ ~ mo! o
o
o 0
I
IL_~ ~_J o 0 800000
I II II 000
: ~ @ @II
I il====::===:::::==::=:==:::=::=::==:=::::=:=:=:=::==::=:=:=::=:=:=::::::=:==::==::::::==:==:::=:::E:=:E:E:z===:z=za=:.=~

! "'lli------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ", ,
~ ~

I I
0
0
- f-
a(Xl
>---

60.000
0
140,0001 244,000
D
140,000 I
444,000

L-~~~~~~~~~~~~ ..__~~~ _ , .._._,,_. .._._._._.. __ -.-.---~~--------~---1:~-

..- -----r-~~~~______,~~~~~----~~~__ ._"_-,-~ ~~~_ ~ _~~p- ~~ ______,_~~--~~_q_~~~~~~~--,-A.l~

R T
 C"
'.

1 -~ "'
.I I.~ /

1- 100
336
184 --..
52
,.A

r
==--.!:1~8_f_~-~~~==r~. ·.~t"S".\~!'=_===~-----r---.---
30u ~ ===; ~

. :"1 ~;~'--------r--
--'--,-- I -
l
I "=== M
ln
In ,1
I
, II

r -
1I d
<- /~

\
[L2J .
./
,1 •
. ~
0
U1
,.(
......
I I ~ ~

I
I -
101
481
380 --"'-
---
1
I
I
I
0
0
.......
~

1
-ll'Il.
I, ~[L

l---rtjl -E ~ I
TJ~~rjl'r--~ I
2S..-
!II -= =
l----,-+-~IIt----I~_+li-rd\t-J ~ ~
I - !
I
~ I! i (~, ··1
0
,

+
Lf')
r) I..
I!t
II' -W-
t"-

'I I I "I
Ii:
I I: i
\
\
"\
\, 1
I

l+=:~:=-411+'~1+-.:~,-ltll---.l.L:I---\--'\\-~...,\~ :1 P" t~
C\J
- I, 0 d

!t
0 0
0 0
~

_:. t"-
I:I! ....... C\J

~:4I
r

C'

I I r --.-t-r-- I -

I
~
" II
I
I
I
' dv::th-- T-- 1-::: j
-I, """ f===-
~ II r
i

a
i :
! i
" III =~
I h - - - - - - -----,
II
~I -10
I
Lf')
t"- nDC-R~

-F
CL III ----.:II-lI----- I ---'
I
~~-;~ II I
'.~ ;I
II, "....... I A
1 '1 -l
L..J
.... -
I1 I
III
.-
-

.. -
-
~
--
,
,
J ~
0

-I
,-
0
III
,, ,, .......
II: I
--.I , - Illli+11
: I

'+"
Ii
I
(J
II , 0
1',1 i Ii
l l' ~
1\--r---.-t-r-- I
U1
.......
I
+ '111:
iI IJl I I
I
II
II

LJ
tE
II
""
,I J
~

r=,\
I
1

1\
0
......
t"-
1.

~-
=+ I
, - =>.

..... r' L ...

-...>
I
-<
c:
z
t:::;I
J>
......
f"'l
BEAM CUTTING VANE
r
f"'l
SEE DETAIL 'A'
<
J>
-I
o
;;U ......
00
n TOP FLOOR LANDING C)
I'\.)
~ C)

r-
-I LEVEL FOR LCD C)

I
::I>
LCD SENSOR(ON CAGE) Z
t:::1
..........
Z
CI
GUIDE RAIL (/.)
:::r: n
.......... 0
-0 Z
-t
CAGE TOP BEAM fTl ;;0
I
DETAIL/IA/l fTl
0
I
TOP-l FLOOR LANDING <
::I> t:::1
LEVEL FOR LCD -t fTl
0
;;0
<
..........
n
fTl
VANE
I'\.)
GUIDE RAIL ::I>
C)
C) (/.)
(/.)
-<

CAGE TOP BEAM TOP-2 FLOOR LANDING

BRACKET FOR LEVEL FOR LCD
SENSOR MOUNTING

~
I
I ::I>
I -<
ru 0
~ c:
ru -t

I. .1 262
~CASE OF RAIL JOINTING)
I
ru
::I>
C)
3:
::I>
Z
C) c:
RAIL FISH PLATE ru ::I>
I
ARRANGEMENT OF
LANDING CONTROL TOP-3 FLOOR LANDING
DEVICE(LCD) LEVEL FOR LCD

BRACKET
FOR LCD VANE
MOUNTING

BOTTOM+l FLOOR LANDING

LEVEL FOR LCD

E
1:!!!:!!.'O
............
00 =
C) C) ~
aD BEAM CUTTING VANE

SIDE VIE\J OF BOTTOM FLOOR LANDING I'\.)

LCD SENSOR ASSY LEVEL FOR LCD

C)
C)

r LCD SENSOR(ON CAGE)

I
I'\.)
~
I'\.)
I

~
I'\.)
J>
C)
C)
I'\.)
'1
 BRANCH JUNCTION BOX LAYOUT
L-240-1A003

432 25
MOUNTING BRACKET
150 30

1== 1- c=====

..---
1-4J-
t--
IJ¥
$ $
I-- 0
c:::::J
'* c:::::J
c:::::J
d
z c:::::J
\D x c:::::J
0 Cl c:::::J
C\J IXl c:::::J
...J c:::::J
...J c:::::J
::::l
a.. c:::::J
c:::::J
I-- 0
$ '-- $

l1ft lftt
1::::::= !::::=

CABLE COMBING

n ~

It rr 0 v
(")
(")

0
Lf")
C\J

76 T 280 I

?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CD"LTD, L-241-1A002

 MARINE ELEVA TOR PAGE 1/1
REV,
AUTO TELEPHONE DATE 2001.12.12
FLUSH TYPE
_ _ _ _ _LC-215B HULL NO,: _

143
10 90

DI L
0 B TTDN

DOD
0 DOD
o
0
0 DOD C)
r--.
0
0 DOD ('\J

124
~:J-------I Il2
152 L - -_ _----I III

.....---+-+------1 T2
L - -_ _----I TI

~r_--_SP1

I/lh----_ SP2
HS1
L--~HS2

RS2
. - - - - '-------I-~ HS3
\ RSI
RS3
I
I PANEL C\J
"<t
0
\D
CUT C\J C\J
FROM ON BOARD
I AUTO TELEPHONE
I EXCHANGER

\ ~ A·- CONNECTION
\ I 124 .1
132
I
I PANEL CUTTING SIZE LDCA TIDN IN CAR

l--------------.J
T REV,
MARINE ELEVATOR PAGE 1/1

AUTO TELEPHONE DATE 2001.12,12

'WALL MOUNT TYPE
LC-213B HULL NO,:

4-l&8
HOLES

IAL
o B TT N

DOD
o
o ODD
o 0 DOD co a
o
o DOD CJ'o
-
r--.
C\J

152 43 100

168

---r~-----t Il2
L -_ _-----j III

'--++--~T2
L----~T1

~--jSPI

1/lh--------1 SP2
HSI
' - - - - - - j HS2

IlS2
~- '------r----, HS3
RSI
IlS3

FROM ON BOARD
AUTO TELEPHONE
EXCHANGER LOCATION IN ELEVATOR
MACHINE ROOM
CONNECTION
 SHIP LIFT PAGE /
REV,
ALARM BOX
FOR SHIP LIFT DATE 1998,09,29

HULL -,-, "N=,-O,i _

LOCATION: \J /H

ALA M U ER
FOR ELEVATOR

00
.....
-.D

BUZZER STOP
em
HYUNDAI ELEVATOR

4- 4- C)
("')

I.
I. 90
122
I~
L.d ?\...J ("')

C)
00

cun I NG R ~
HOLE ..........

I. 104
.1 8

£
 ------~
CAR ASSEMBLY LAYOUT MANUAL
LAYOUT TEMPLATE L- 321-0MOOI
2000.8.20 (Jl[V1SI111 III 2 , 2lIlI2J.71 ASS'Y D'WG.

'Y XIT
(600X420) SAFETY GUARD

1. CAR 'WALL MATERIAL I tl.6 STEEL PLATE 'WITH BAKED PAINT DR

tl.S STAINLESS STEEL PLATE
I
~
MEIlGENCY EXIT 2. CAR INTERNAL SIZE & DOOR OPENING I REFER TO
LAYOUT PLAN
3. PAINTING COLOR I REFER TO LAYOUT PLAN
§ lJN..OCKING ClJIDlTIlJI
4. APPLICATION J

~
MICRO SWITCH
THIS IS CAR ASS'Y FOR THE RIGHT-HANDED LANDING
DOOR 'WITH HINGES.
THE CAR ASS'Y FOR THE LEFT-HANDED LANDING DOOR
LOCKING ClJIDlTIlJI IS MIRROR IMAGE OF THIS.

LOCK DEVICE(DETAIL 'A')

I. £PENNIG(J} .1 CAR FRAME SAFETY GUARD

PLAN OF CAR CAGE

I f--

1 7

. (

FLUORESCENT
KEY BOX

IN~
"'-- ~
OPB
~
l~ I.

-
.....
DETAIL OF SEC. C - C

LIGHTING ..........
tJ ""
""
N

ESCAPE LADDER U
..
c-I 7 0
II

~
-X
\
~ c-l ..lli!Q.fL

'C' SEC.B-B
I II

SEC.A-A "
1HYltlDAI ELEVATOR CO.,LTD, L-321-0M001
 ----------------------._---
LANDING DOOR ASS'y LAYOUT MANUAL

LAYOUT TEMPLATE L-375-1E-009

ASS'y DWG. 375B085
ITEM MATERIAL MATERIAL SIZE
NO
PART NAME REMARK
Sf'EC REF.DWG
HOl DOOR PANEL STEEl 10.6
H02 FRAME STEEL 150
H03 SIDE FRAME STEEL 15.0
H04 DOOR CLOSER DORMA
os
H05 HINGE STAINl ESS ST
l
I H06 DOOR HANDLE STEEL t 2.3
I HOI INTERLOCK
I H08 DOOR SWITCH
I
I I H09 VISION GLASS 150(W)X200(H)
I I HlO WIRE GRID 150(W)X200(H)
I I
I 09
on
I '"
:;: 190
10 'i:
I :<:
8:<: §+ c;
I ... :r ...
Z
11.

i~
0 :i:
g C
0
ci
...
z: :<:
III

:<: DECK COVER HEIGHT

(Ace TO YARD DECISION) WELD AFTER ADJUSTMEN
I BY YARD.
I
I
I DETAil "Q"
I
I
I TABLE
I "0"
OPENING
I SUS SILL COVER ~ , AD DH REMARK
L _ JJ H
750 1900 1052 2081

750 2000 1052 2181

800 1900 1102 2081

CONNECTION FLAT BAR BY HELCO TOE GUARD
151 [JJ:£NTRANCE WIDTH] WELD AFTER ADJlJSrMENT 800 2000 1102 2181
BY YARD.
DeTAIL "p"

NOTl
THIS IS RIGHT -HANDED SWING DOOR.
[AO:JJ+302] LEFT -HANDED TYPE IS MIRROR IMAGE OF THIS
BHO. OPEN'G: JJ+316 2. BRAND NAMES OF A-50 DOORS
3. APPROVED BY ABS, BV , DNV , KR , LR , AND NK

1!!tI"~IIIIIOIEH"I') 01 ,;file 1!!tllli!lHlOIEt"l'61!1Af21 :i!~ xft!~. Ql!JV1011llAI!£e ~!i. 'lI 'i'1!!11* V1titLICI. L-375-1 F009
HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO. LTD. THIS DRAWING IS A PROPERTY OF HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO. LTD. REPRODUCTION IN PART OR IN WHOLE OF THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE DONE ONLY UNDER THE PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HYUNOAI ELEVATOR co. LTD.
 ---------"1

LANDING DQJJR ASS'Y LAYOUT MANUAL

LAY!lJT TEMPLATE L-37S-1rOll
ASS'Y DIJG. 37SAOBS
......-.-
ITEM
III
HOI
PART NAME

BRACKET t3.2
--
H02 BRACKET t3.2
H03 RETIRING CAM TYPE -89- 1203-065

H04 HEX BOLT,NUT ,SIIJ,PIIJ M8X25

176 01

CAR HEADER POLE

JJ 35
c:>
c:>
EDGE Dr CAR SILL C")
c:>
EDGE Dr HATCH SILL C") +-_ --'''--~_.....,....j:-_ _+-~
T
A

10 (GAP)

CAR SILL - " - - - - - - - - - - - -

SEC, A-A
G)
I
W

1HYUNDAI ELEVAHIR CO.,LTD. L- 375-1rOll

---------_._-
TWO SPEED SIDE OPEN. CAR DOOR OPERATOR (2550) LAYOUT MANUAL

LAYOUT TEMPLATE L-131-4M002

ASS'y DWG. 1318078
ITEM MATERIAL SIZE
NO
PART NAME REF.DWG
REMARK

HOI CAR HEADER ASS'Y 131B073

H02 DRIVE ARM ASS'Y 131B074

H03 MOTOR 132B007G02

H04 DOOR MACHINE 1328042

HOS HANGER ROLLER 133BOOI

H06 ECCENTRIC ROLLER 133C002GOI

H07 GATE SWITCH ROLLER 1310036

H08 SAFETY EDGE 141B007

HEADER ARM

=m
H09 RETIRING CAM 162C018HOI

HlO SHIM 1330008

...,...o 1
II 1. 1
I~
r-: :1

:1 J I:
w
o--'
[L

0'
W

~
:r:

----l1

G
wll"""
i

3 TABLE
llilli.
OPENING
1. THIS IS RIGHT HANDlO(2SR) CAR DOOR Al A2 A3 A4 AS A6 A7 AS A9 Al0 All REMARK
SIZE! JJ)
LEFT HANDED TYPE(2SL) IS MIRROR IMAGE OF THIS.
750 1168 599 622 735 346 507 135 591 305 152 229
2. DOOR SIZE AND FINISH ARE SHOWN ON LAYOUT PLAN DWG.
- 800
900
1219 599
1372 720
622
743
708
713
400
339
513
515
161
160
636
737
325
335
152
203
238
229

-HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,LTD. L-131-4M002

 CAR F'RAH£ \lITH SAF'£TY D£VIC£ LAyOUT MANUAL
LAYOUT TEMPLATE L-121-0M001
2001.10.31 ASS'Y D'tIG. 121B062 REV III. , 2
Q'TY ITEM MATERIAL
GOI NO PART NAME liT SPEC REMARK

I HOI Ill' BEAM SS41

2 H02 STILE SS41
4 H03 BRACE RDD SS41

CAR JUNCTION BOX 2 H04 HEADER ARM SS41

2 HOS HEADER PIJ..E SS41
RECEPTACLE
08 'tIIRE CLIP
I H06 SArETY ASSY
4 H07 GUIDE SIIJE
2 HOB OILER NYLIJlG MILKY-IJHITE
I H09 GOV, HOLDING DEVICE SS41

NOTE
1. TABLE
CAxCB BG A B EE REMARK
950xl000 1050 1010 1213 540 P 4
950x1300 1050 1010 1513 680 P 6
[Al 1200xl000 1300 1260 1213 540 P 6
05 1200x1300 1300 1260 1513 680 P 8
[CAl 1400x1430 1500 1460 1643 740 PI0
(CAR INSIDE> 1200x2400 1358 1300 6381200 P15
1400x2400 1558 1500 6381200
IOS0x1400 1150 1110 1613

2. THIS IS THE RIGHT-HANDED CAR FRAME.

1( THE LEFT-HANDED CAR FRAME IS MIRROR
OVERLOAD S'tIITCH 'tIIRE CLIP OF THIS

[BGl [EEl

?HYUNDAI ELEVATlIR CO.,LTO. L-121-0M001

 -------
SLACK RDPE SWITCH LAYOUT MANUAL
LAYOUT TEMPLATE L-121-0MOO2
REVISE,98 12 17 ASS'Y D\lG. 125B065
Q'TY ITEM MATERiAl
GOI Nl
PART NAME liT SPEC REMARK

I HOt SEAT SPCC

I H02 BRACKET SPCC

4 H03 LEVER SPCC

I H04 BRACKET SPCC

I H05 MICRO SIJITCH EIZ4P2KI

I HOG IMPACT PLATE SPCC

7 H07 HEX. BOLT NUT,SIIJ,PIIJ SS41 M6xl6

I HOB SPRING SIJP

I H09 HEX. BOLT SCM3<IOn MID

10 HID LEVER PIN S25C

280
ROPE END 70

-1r It:.
I ,- --. .,-
I
.Jh. .Jh. 41 ~
I ..... .....

...,
-1 t-
t-

~t j ~
h
t j ~
(

t
~
~

HIN.144.5 - HAX.175.5
1
DETAIL
290 204.5

1HYUNDAI ELEVAHIR CD.,LTD, L-121-0M002

..,....------------------ -------~
GUIDE SHOE LAYOUT MANUAL
HGS121 L-126-1 BOOl
19975.1
ASS'Y owe. VB637
Q'TY IIDI 1IAlERW. RE_
GOI NO PART NAME Ilf SPEC
1 HOI FRAME SPHC
1 H02 DHOE SUPPORT !'SS'y SPCC
1 H03 OILER SEAT SPCC
1 H04 FIXING PLATE SPCC
1 Hll5 SHOE POlYEllMB£
1 H06 ADJUSUT NUT S20C 116

1 H07 HEX. BOLT, NUT SS400 M18x35

2 Hll8 HEX. BOLT, NUT, S/W, P SS400 M18x35

4 H09 HEX. BOLT, s/W SS400 Max18

2 Hl0 HEX BOLT, NUT, s/W SS400 M8x18

1 Hl1 SPRING PIN SS400 M6x25

A1 A2 AJ M 81 B2 B3 RM. REMARK
140 90 60 32 10_ 56 23 llKG HGS-121COll
~ 140 90 60 32 16 82 23 131«: HGS-121C13
~ 140 90 60 32 16 62 23 IllKG HGS-121Cl

APPLICATION
• GUIDE RAIL : 8K • 13K, 18K
• NET WEIGHT: 4KG

-HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,LTO. L-126-1 B001

 .---------.. ~----------·------------------------·- -- .------.--.----------1

r tillli.
COUNTERVEIGHT ASSEMBLY
LAYOUT TEMPLATE
LAYOUT MANUAL
L-IBl-lMOOI
<REVISE 2 '98.lI9.221

ITEM
Q'TY III

I HOI
PART NAME

COUNTERIJEIGHT
ASS'Y DIJG.
MATERIAL

SS41
MATERIAL SIZE
REr.DIJG

181B007
I H02 SAFETY DEVICE SS41 125AOI5
1. THIS IS RIGHT -HAND TYPE , THE LEFT -HAND TYPE IS MIRROR IMAGE OF THIS,
4 H03 GUIDE SHOE SS41 VB637G03
2. THE TOTAL LENGTH OF THE CoUNTER'w'EIGHT PART = 3451
2 H04 llILER NYLON 127BOOIGOl
3. TABLE (BG. IJI), 4 H05 ROPE SHACKLE STKMI6A IB6B003G03

GoV,ROPE,
, n
~ LII I
,~ ~ 450 450

"'"
2 H06
2 H07

/'w'IRE CLIP
IJEIGHT CLAMP
RAIL CLIP,HEX,BOLT,NUT ,SflJ

'w'IRE CLIP~
SS41

[SPRING

.IrF;Ql
VD2151
IB2DOO57

'w'IRE CLIP

'If' •
13K

• 1.~
loT. 11
\ F' \

~ II J l'\ u
MAIN ROPE 150
\ t'= ~ lD I'
t:
fJ
APP. 305

'" l-
i'§i
....
::-
•

•
•

•
l:l
P'l

05 B: ~I
~....- ~W
..I.-
"I:
-. W +t- LJ -
1
...,
~
III
I ,JI I tl'1'BYI '1/.,
•
~
WEIGHT HEIGHT I 66
132 200 2700 ~
~ 03
GOVERNOR ROPE

.nn
----,
... -- ... ... n
lLdlI
~1
1 ...... • +1
1 I ~
I I
~ ~.
- 1 -~ ...
--J

3451

7HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,LTD. L-IBl-lMOOI

~
--------------------------------
GOVERNOR & GOV. TENSION SH£AV£ LAYOUT MANUAL

LAYOUT TEMPLATE L-115-0MOOI

(REVISE 4 '99,7,6) ASS'Y DIJG.
. I1EM PAIlT_ ~T£IllAI. SIZE
VT ~
III 1lEf.DIIG
11II liIVEIlIDl 115AOI3 2L5

IG! 6IJV. TEIlSIIIl SI£AVE 1168010 52

115CI07 4.5
ItI3 6OVERIOl SII'PIIIlT

11M RIJ'E PRlJTECTII! VP488

HIl5 LIMIT SIiITCH ~

.... 489

450
111I

.
,~
~

r4 SPAC 1NG APP. 5000

1--=
~
6
Ii!

~
i""I THIS PART CONNECTED TO THE SAFETY
L....: "ECHANIS" IN CAR FRAI1E OR FRA~
FOR COUNTERWE 1GHT •

"'= ...

VIEIJ Dr x-x

?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO"LTD. L-115-0MOOI

 TM400 - WVF TYPE LAYOUT MANUAL

SHIP ELEVATOR(55KW,IP44) L-~101 lK006

FINAL REVISED DATE: 2001.6.20 ASS'Y DWe. REV.
I EM N PART NAME REMARK

BRAKE COIL SPEC. NOTE HOl MAIN SHEAVE ~570 (GCD50D)

I.RATEO VOLTAGE : DC 180 V I.MOTOR : 4P, 1450 RPM, IPH, F CLASS, 1HOUR RATING HD2 HOUSING TM400
2.RATFD AMPERE : 0.66 A 2.MOTOR RATEO CURRENT : 13 AMP.
M~R THERMAL ENCODER H03 MOTOR 5.5 kW
II 3.COIL RESiSTANCE : 212.7 ~b 3.MOTOR INPUT POWER BY INVERTER: 3PHASE, 360V, 51 Hz
H04 BRAKE DOUBLE SHOE
U V W THe THI PA PB PGM PGP 4.EFCICIENCY for USAGE: 80%ED 4.MAIN POWER SUPPLY : 3PHASE, 380 --l40V, SO/60Hz~
5.SHEAVE SPEC : PCD 0570 (GCD 500) H05 MAGNETIC COIL BINDER: 41 .3.34 l.3iOO

TERMINAL BLOCK 6.1 UBRICATING METHOO : OiL BATH H06 ENCODER 1024 P/R
70lL QUANTITY : APPROX. 6L H07 MOTOR TERMINAL BOX
ROPE OVERJUMPING ROPE OVERJUMPING 8.LUBRICANTS RECOMMANO : MAKER:SHELL (ULTRA GEAR 220)
SECURING BAR SECURING BAR 9.PAINT : COLOR: MUNSELL No. 7.5BG 7/2
(OVERHEAO lYPE) (BASEMENT lYPE)
10.T/M WEIGHT : APPROX. 420 Kg(WITH MOTOR & SHEAVE)

FOR ENCODER FOR THERMAL

:INLET(A25B)~ / (A20C)
FOR ENCOOFR OUTLeT
/ (A25B)
DETAIL OF GROOVE

G NO. TABLE

~MorOR
_______ FOR MOTOR POWER
G NO. SHEAVE POSITION
I (A25C)
SHAll COVER GOI RIGHT
TERMINAL & CABLE GLAND

~
(RED COLOR) G02 LEFT
, MAGNETIC COIL ASS'Y L NO TABLE

G NO MOTOR SHEAVE DIAJD 1 SPEED

LOl .30 m/min
285 235 205
iBRAKE I EVER L02 5.5kW 0570 45 m/min
- L05 60 m/min

IiTM HANDLE

~
I
I ( '\ \
'<D
.... +- H /
I H
C 1
I \.. ' .... /
/'-,
::l I

I
I
'~
! -+-----+---1~
\

\'--,1
OIL GAUGE
''''''-, G02 (LH TYPE)

GOI (RH TYPE)

o
L-10 1 -1 K006
-HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO,lTD
~------ MACHINE FOUNDATION (FOR IP-44 MOTOR LAYOUT MANUAL
LAYOUT TEMPLAH (OVERHEAD) L - 103 - 1M005
ASS'y OWC. 1038033 REV.: 0
Q'[y ITEM MATERIAL MATERIAL SIZE COOl ITEM
G62'Gci1 NO PART NAME I/T SPEC REf .DWG GROUP
WT RlMARK

5 5 HOl CHANNEL 55400 E250x90x9 -1200

3 3 H02 CHANNEL 55400 E250x90x9 - 725

16 16 H03 GUES5ET PLATE 55400 19x70x224

[P] 10 10 H04 HEX BOLT,NUT,T/W,S/W7 55400 M20xl00

~
W
EPA] >
«w
I
rtr
~1$
w>
I«
[f)W
:;>L
______..[f) NOIE
10- ~ 22 HOLES -i
I
f-~
LLW
---
00
1. FINISH MUNSELL NO. 7.5BG 5/1 .5
r-
1\1== "'=' I I d
2 APPLICATION 900 ;;:: P < 1100
L NO. IPA 1

to
..r
'" to
'"
L I--
to
.-------l .~ ......

• Q

I
II "':
f-

i":J
d
V = 30 M/MIN
L01

L90
495

~CAIA-l

~
L.-.- Q ...... , .$ I

1
65 145 145 100

1200 350 04

I ,flY 90 85 175

a
to
'"
,
I

I ,
I
02
F

1
~
}?JJ
I.
1 J

I II
•
•
,
r

i , f ~~~=:J t~
a
to
a 10 90 219 90
,. .-fi90 ~~ • I • I
- ,,.-.1Q.
~
to
.....
'" 1/ n/\ ....
I-

TYP r
a
to
'" \ 1% 1,, lJ\iP I/TYP COl
( SYM. TO COl )
'-+_/ L
90 305 260 90

COl 745·
--
- -

-HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO,LTD

I L - 103 - 1 M005
r-------- BUFFER ASSEMBLY

LAYOUT TEMPLATE
LAYOUT MANUAL

l-183-1M005 ASS'Y OWG. REV NO.1 1999.10.29

ITeM MATERIAL MATERIAL SIZE

NO
PART NAME REFDWG
REMARK
SPEC

HOl SPRING SUP7 ~ 9A HX9DAS4

H02 PLATE SS100 \9 X [A] X [A]

H03 PLATt SS400 \9 X [A] X [B]

H04 SUPPORT(PIPE) SGP [M]A - [H2]

H05 NAME PLATF HX1ZU

[AJ

n
TABLE 1 (FOR CAR)

AVAILABLE LOAD AVAILABLE LOAD SPRING [Al [Hl1 [H21 [Ml

113
635<LOAO<1016 CAPACITY+CAGE WT. HX90AS4H32 200 640 262 100

947<LOAO<1515 CAPACITY+CAGE WT HX90AS4H33 200 640 372 100

1390<LOAO<2225 CAPACITY +CAGF WT HX90AS4H34 200 640 218 100

TABLE 2 (FOR CWT)

AVAILABLE LOAD AVAILABLE LOAD SPRING [Al [Bl rL 11

635<LOAO<1016 CAGE WT.+(CAPA/2) HX90AS4H32 200 300 369

947<LOAD<1515 CAGE Wl+(CAPA/2) HX90AS4H33 200 300 329

1390<LOAO<2225 CAGE Wl+(CAPA/2) HX9DAS4H34 200 300 413

TABLE 3 (BUFFER SPRING)

:r::
f- WIRE MAX APPROX. TURNS FREE FINAL FINAL SPRING
(5 DWGNO. TOT. DEFl . CONST(kq/mm MATERIAL
z~
~1.IJ_
DIA. 0.0 TOTAL ACTIVE LGTH. LGTH. LOAD(ka)
~--'--, CWT
w~ HX9DAS4H32 20 130 10 9 360 191 2540 169 15.03 SUP7~~9A
l~J
cr CAP
~ HX9DAS4H33 22 127 9 8 320 189 3787 131 2891 I
HX9DAS4H34 26 144 10 9 404 244 5563 160 3477 I
N
I

NOTE
1 THE BUFFER SPRING SHOULD BE COMPRESSED COMPLlTELY WHEN THE LOAD IS 25~~4 TIMES, DNV

CWT BUFFER CAR BUFFER

?HYUNOAI ELEVATOR CO,LTO 1-183-1M005

 --- ----------.-._-------,
GUIDE RAIL LAYOUT MANUAL
LAYOUT TEMPLATE L-182-1 MOO 1
ASS'y OWG.
ITEM MATERIAL MATERIAL SIZE
NO
PART NAME REF.DWG
REMARK
SPEC

01 RAil SS400

02 RAIL CLIP S45C

03 FISH PLATE SS4DO

o~-+ 04 RAIL BRACKET SS400

os LINER SPG,SPCC

02
@\
1~--- 04
,t
-+ -
'\ o
o I
o I
ll"l

c - ~

lJ TABlE 1
VIEW OF Z - Z

XrL..
- ;
I
!
r2""
'[1
I

I
III
0

,." X «
RAIL SPEC
CAR RAIL( 1SK)

CAR RAIL( 13K)

CWT. RAIL( 13K)
CWT RAIL(SK)
A
89

67

56
114

89

78
B C

16

16

10
D

38

32

26
E

3 ,).5
F
5

6
G

38

,38

,38
76

76

76
H I

3
t

9.5

9.5

7
r1

5
5

2
r2

5
71

56

SO
d

TABLE 2

moment of modulus of radius of gy-

e
RAIL SPEC.
AREA inertia (em') inertia (e rrr; ration of area (em)
8 (em)
(em) IX IY ZX ZY iX iY
t -----<~ CAR RAIL( lSK) 20.9 179.0 1090 29.7 191 293 2.29 287
z CAR RAIL(13K)
---Ir:;;~;;:::;-~~I 15.4 59.5 50 4 14.3 113 1.96 1.81 203
CWT. RAil (13K)
CWT RAIL(SK) 9.85 299 261 756 6.71 1 75 1.63 165

HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO,LTO

I L-182-1M001
~._-------~ --------~-- ------"1
ROWNG &; PITCHING SWITCH LAYOUT MANUAl

FOR SHIP ELEVATOR L-115-1MOO3

ASS'y DWG.
Q'lY ITEM MATERIAL
G01 NO
PART NAME 1fT SPEC
REMARK

1 H01 ACTUATING PLATE SUS304

02
ACTUATING PLATE SUS304

SUPPORT ANGLE SUS304

BASE SUS304

2 H05 BEARING F60BZZ

2 H06 HEX BOLT, 2NUT SUS304 MBX35

4 H07 R.H SCREW SUS304 M4X10

2 HOB R.H SCREW,HEX. NUT SUS304 M3X15

2 HOg MICRO SWITCH Autonics

NOTE.

1. OPERATING CONDITION
ROLLING : ± 10' , PERIOD :105 (LR, DNV, ABS, BV, GL, NK, KR)
PITCHING: ±7.5' , PERIOD: 7S (DNV, ABS, BV, GL, NK, KR)
± 5', PRRIOD : 7S (LR)

01 2. WHEN INSTALL THE ROLLING &; PITCHING SWITCH, ADJUST THE CENTER OF
ACTUATING PLATE(H01,H02) AND CENTER OF MICRO SWITCH ROLLER

3. CONFIRM THE DIRECTION OF ROLLING &; PITCHING IN THE CONTRON PANEL

BEFORE LIFT OPERATION
160

03

o
-RELAY: t.lY4(DC24V)
o
n -RESISTOR: R1: 1kOHM
-DIODE D1 : 1N4007
-TERMINAL BLOCK: 3P, 1A
CONDENSER: 50V, 470uF

o
N

~CEmERUNEOF~TUA~NGPLATE i~CEmER UNE OF ACTUATING PLATE

'" MICRO SWITCH ROLLER
'" MICRO SWITCH ROLLER

HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,LTD. L-115-1 M003

 315

I ~

-
<'iT

!!llli
II t~~)~)M)U!-tf N~

"""" !MM,f

e;
..
3lIlI

""
"""
§ ~
;I;
70 "
,
......
, 1--
i

~
7:10

1-
,n"
"" ~ ~
~ ~ it
~~

'" ~""'- ~
II
~
~ I S
i ~ Ifo.-

~ B
~
......-
s I'I>,'
::i ~

f-- t-
S I::
~ ......- .
315 2l!O 315
~ B~
J I .
s I
flR,',.rU. l-
!!lll
s ~
I ~
-

-
r::L

I
88ll
I ~~ 1 :r- a
. !'J

Ii: . tog

L ~ ~==~ ~
~-- ROPE GUIDE FIXING DWG. LAYOUT MANUAL
LAYOUT TEMPLATE L-102--2A013
2006.9.11 ASS'YDWG. :VC15923 REV.:O
1-----------------------, Q'JY ITEM MAn RIAL MATERIAL SIZE CODE ITEM
G02 GOl NO
PART NAME I/T SPEC REt. DWG GROUP
WT REMARK

@) 0 ,
1

2
HOl

H02

HO.1
SUPPORT ANGLE

ROUND BAR

HEX BOI T, S/W,P /W

SS400

SS4DO

SS400
t32X53X271

0P-200

M12X20

__________~~ :__J~-_:~t __ ~=" _

2 H04 HEX. NUT, S/W SS400 M12

--------------------~-=~~=-~l~~-=-~~l~---~~=-~--------------------
:c::--------------"F-.i---rf.ll~=======*1=*====l
- --- ~

I @J ~--~~-- i
,, ,,
L ....J

,,
SHEAVE SUPPORT
DEF. SHEAVEjN
I ~ 11
I I

,I ,,
I I I"" I I II I

i Ii ji i I i I I

~--
I
~---'--Ir--+-Ir-l-------------~--~ DEF. SHEAVE
--) I !!i!!! i I !
......::ft±:lb--~I
i-----*~*-----_.---_---- --
1--~--lI-r-------+-------
,,
!!!! ! ! ! ! !
i i Ii i ' i i
I,, II
I I I"
II
i Ii Ii II',
i i
'" I I

,,I II~!!!!
I
j IIjiilll
I II II I I I

Ii ,I ! 5:-1!
I,, I I 'II I' I II' I I

I,, I' i ,!

L~r~
I

t:::=j:=::=:: ' ::=::=:fP_g ',-,=,-,,-86_-1

I II II
1IIIlliil
Ii i II II
WJUW
!!ClI'l11i!IIlIOIEH"I'l 01 ;qi:E !!ClI'11!i!IIIIIOIEi"l'''IllAI2I :i!~ ;qt!~. ~~lllOIIlAf!E.E ~% ~ 'i'!!W* llltiilLICI. L-102-2A013
HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO. LTD. THIS DRAWING IS A PROPERTY OF HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO. LTD. REPRODUCTION IN PART OR IN WHOLE OF THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE DONE ONLY UNDER THE PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO. LTD.
~-- ROPE GUIDE FIXING DWG. LAYOUT MANUAL
LAYOUT lEMPLATE L-l022A014
ASS'Y OWG. VC 15922 REV. 0
Q'T( ITEM MATeRIAL SIZE CODE ITEM
MATERIAL
CO2 COl NO
PART NAME I/T SPEC REF owe CROUP
WT REMARK

HOl SUPPORT ANGLE

H02 ROUND BAR 012-200

2 H03 HEX BOI T, S/W,P /w M12X70

2 H04 HEX. NUT, S/W M12

~-----rG
I, 1 ~ r
: I /'
I 1 " II
Ii Ii II",,, I Ii
II

~ 1m!! J
2X2-M12 TAPS { \
\
ON THE FRAME I
DEFLECTOR SHEAVE
'III qll_~II'IJI
o
'I I
~1E==d=::t;
o
!:
rrmm
1.11 ",,
1111 '" I

01
o 0
ro :g
1"1

'--~:>_-i_~:':7
"II II'

Jm!!l~
.-ll-t'"''''
IL.jI . . ,-
/ : ,
lO
o
N
I
I \ \
II
II
"II
""
11'1
"'1
II
II
I \

o
0> ( \ lllJUU,. II
~II
10
I
I

\ / It
It
II
II

,/
, I

ly ~.......J1
I II II'
I II II I

I I
I II
I I
II
I II II I

~ ==--l ==L === ==-.--J~ =-l ====::!.

!! tllII;!1 11I0IEH':') 01 ~;;:E !!tI'lI;!IIIiIOIE1':'~IlAf~ ::i!-ll- ~t!~. i1IeJ11011llAI!£E W!<: ~ T!!lI* I1ftLIQ. L102-2A014
HYUNDAI ELEVATOR co. LTD. THiS DRAWING IS A PROPERTY OF HYUNDAI ELEVATOR co. LTD. REPRODUCTION IN PART DR IN WHOLE OF THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE DONE ONLY UNDER THE PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HYUNDAI ELEVATOR co. LTD. 1.- --'
 PAGE

N. ELECTIC DIAGRAM -------- H)-I - H)-IS

 PO'w'ER INPUT 'w'IRING DIAGRAM

HULL NO, : H2317/8/9/20 COL,01

1 ~
• 5 10

FROM IJN BOARD POIIER FROM ON BOARD POIIER FOR LIGHTING

(3PH-HOV-60HZ) <IPH-22OV-60HZ)
A
NOTE
t~~A ~~~~
A PINER LAMP
R S T (IiHIlE, lIN C/P)

.----t'Cln--+f.."~~U I.CABLE OR CABLE CAP COLOR

Nf"BI
(IOoN/32A)
---)
F-- -
) .~~
----'~
) r-o~lsva
4---+-
Q'J (l6A)
" - - 1.2SSQ
I'----P
... R<U),
II.

IE.
S(V) ,
T(\V),
GREEN
YELLO\v
BRD'WN
SjSQ ... PLUS(+) , RED
1>,
... MINUS(-) 'BLUE
~1 ~ j
TO COL2
T1 L CT K ) 2.DEFiNITION OF THE CONNECTOR TYPE
B
'*, 0 TERMINAL BLOCK IN CONTROL PANEL
2.0SQ-~----~ '*, @ TERMINAL BLOCK IN CAR JUNCTION BOX

Sill ) ) '*, 0 JST CONNECTOR

(M),v
.T
0:
T
"or
IN C/P ~EPTACLE TC26, *', D AMP CONNECTOR

I r ~V T~~~. '*. 0 TERMINAL BLOCK

61 NOISE FILTER
03 (NFl-4oB)
62
04 L.:.:::::.:..: ---..~---~
221y:«lJ
] TO CAR JUNCTION BOX
'*. CX) MOLEX CONNECTOR

1----- 0"380
~
-,O"'"4~=OO-N--,I;°T..,...·4~·~L- TRA~SFO;M~R---
!,.
- - -----,

,-----OCINI-I
PellER SLf'PTLmil'S)

CN2-IH >--
DETAILNA'
I (SOOVA) (200VA) (SOOVA>

I I 22 0 I I cr- - - - - --:0 I I 0 2g0 2~O I ~ NI-3

CN2-2(->C
T3 I
HOUSING No
14
PLUG

L~~O_~o ";~~~~_~'--O~O-Of-I-I~-_.Q~
P24 1 P24

r
CN2-3<+>C

N1 S
-
CN2-4(+)
P24 2
3
P24
.
__ 4
N14 5 N14

SV2~ ~ I lSYSTEM N24 6 N14

SII3 ,ifLD -2SC svJ) SIIIO!) svJ) .. BUS BAR NIlO 7 NIlO o
~ (6A>jr-r ~ ~(6A)j~}
BUS NIlO 8 NIlO
BDI ..... BD3 BAR (6A>L:) (3A) <Tn Rd
PliO 9 PIlO

.': 1:: KPH5 -: -: KPB-25 I +==t H2 H3

- PliO 10
RIlO 11
PIlO
RIlO

USA.

r
~
D,4pji)

vvvv
...
CI
T-

>---±j "'.n.. .r """

C~
-'l_±fiP>n" ,r "nv
'"
... r"'II
(3
TNRi;. .....m.
N
>---±j- ~~7""L'.r';,......
':n.Y-v_ _.......
....' I
rjTX
RED YELLIN
RX
CS -1 CS-3
24 N24

,n Dl
TIlO 15
12
13
14

16
TIlO

IIHIlE BLACK A220 17 A220

T II PI
220V 200V B220 18 B220
AIlO 19 AlIO
E l,')SV6 SV7
) (6A) BIlO 20 BlIO
220\1
(6A)
~
~
DC26V DC1l2V 500VA SOOVA
~SYSTEII - -

~B11O
>---<>- ~llJSBNl

- -+-l'---t-- - +---+- - +---f--- - -+--+--1- +-+----I--+-- -----.- X RX X TX

"A" CT24-1 CT24-1 CT22-1 (T 1-2 17-1 T7-2 CT7-3 CT7-4 24 ~24 P24 ~24
CT1 -1 C1l6-3 C110-1 C110-3
F P1t P21 24 [24 [110 [110 I 110 I mo I 200 1 200 I' ~22D [220 ,£1110 ~1I0 ~2X 22Y X RX X TX
H3[_
~-18 13-19 T3~0 T2-IS
.:..:.. T2-16 I-I 1-2 1-4 1-5
T3-1 T3-2
-
T3-5 T3-6
-
T3-9 T3-10
-
T=..3-.:..7_..:.:T3:...:-B=--- ,E-Il T3-15
A~2C B22 C20
,T3-17
- - -

T~HI2
TCB Bel
TI40 T 141 TM 2
RX IRX TX ITX
TMn6 '-v--" TIITSTED
TC44 T 45 TC4~ TC47
P24 P24 N24 N24 rDR RETIRING CAM
(LOCK MAGNET>
b

?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,L TD,

 MOTOR DRIVE 'WIRING DIAGRAM
HULL NO. : H2317/8/9/20 CDL,02
3 I I I 7 10

FRDM C[I.l
Rl SI TI

SURGE PROTECTOR

HIIO --,
T3-20
rROM COL {
T~I~---~
AIIO BIIO S LI L2
~ ~ UP
C~-I !! :S-1 - y,__
l n·4Ln~'=:::J'1
llK.t--....:...JllL
III BRAKING RESISTOR
ON CONTROL PANEL
CNS-2 L--~114~,- X f}-'11~3---=°O-,X.:.----....:0:OX~_f/-:_:::X=_1
""
II LUeXI) "-' CT31-1 CS3-7 \... IFCH ..J
~ :CN5-3
HIVD 700GS CNB~l:o-----if+--<>
MY4 DC24V
TO HCPl ClO-o-'4--+.J---o~~> CNB~~:o----IU-_::Q
INVERTER
II !fJeXl>
CNB~~:o-----if+-...,..o
Cli$-s II CNS-S
I I RST
cIO-6 Y . CNS-6
cNli~:o--.,......c'7-_::Q C

L..~4 "'#~~N
9 CNS-9 INPUT CONDITION BY SPEED PATTERN C~~~:o---7-1f+--::Q
r ...... PORT LONG SHORT CREEP INS INIT c~~'>--
<:120-1 XI 0 0 0 CN
CN6-T
X2 0 0
~
X3 0 0 o 0 ntLD
THl BUS BAR
CH
[ )eN a
;-5.5S1M4
'J 0-----+- - - ,
...J 1
/--'1
V 0-----+
~ .....
~
0: ;;: j;Q
e-'j"' o.
U 0--L....--,,,U ,~

n
.. ......
OJ
....
':I
OJ
..¥
OJ
....
OJ
~
1ii,
N

CH2-lepGP> f/ f/
TO HCPU [ ~:=~~~;: ~:::=IJ========~I /
()_~---l-+-+-....../
CH2-4ePGH) o---_l-<
-l
~~
C:=
~~~
====
~
P-Q
~i\i ?oS ~
~~~
..... I-~
i
I-
cMm..
BUSBAR 5,5SQeG)

~
(PLEASE JUMPER AFTER
2IIIRE TIIIST SHIELD 2PAIR1....1.---,.I-..I--.l----J ON-BOARD GROUNDING IJORK)
c:= ==== P-
>
on
!Ii
w
i!'
!Ii
w
i!'
e~
..
l!l i§
I (FOR SYSTEM GROUND) (FOR FIELD GROUND)

I Q c ~ c .. ~
(0 0 0 0 c5)
I z ~ ~ '" I
I .. ~ Ie l'5 ~!i I
I ~'----.:: ~
~ I
~/-,!!B~~
G,L------,----~----.._2----r-----....-3----,--------.--.----r------.O,-----r----."-b----r----r----~----,,..-----~----q-----.---Ti\G

?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CD"L TD.

 SAFETY CIRCUIT Be LIMIT S'WITCH 'WIRING DIAGRAM rHANGE NOW
HULL NO. : H2317/8/9/20 COL,03
I 2 I 3 4 5 I 6 T 7 B 9 10
PIlO
~ 13-9,ID
.
T3-7,B
NIlO

CAR GOV, SV CVT GOV. SV

--a' ..!;;---a'..!~
A A
md ... _ = ~u ~~ ~~
PIlO PUO
T
M4 M4B TM49 TM5D TT~ -j
ESCAPE SV.
f _ TTD5
UP fiNAL SV.
-IT_ ~ _DOVN---cr£ _ 4- TENSION
fiNAL SV. S.... TENSION S....
----oB _ ~ -IT_ TBD4
PIT sv
_
T!lP
T D5 PITS
"tTB-Z Tll'tJI C~ GX IIG MS ES ~ ~~ rn T6-3

B
PIT
TC09
PITS -oe
CC5-3 SAFETY SV~
~o- ~SAFT SAFT
E-STOP SLR
EO~UP "HAN
- - 1 - Jftv""
TC2B

BTN
L
SLC~ ~AR
_
SV
E N ESON RESDN RESON -o/e>-- ~
EXIT S.... CCB-3 C02-Z
---<Y""'"o- ESIN
E-STOP C02-1
ESIN
TI-18
XIT
I ~IU
[SIN
T1-18
E-STOP
(iN C/P)

"
~

10t- B
(ON CAR) ~ DOliN BTN ON CAR ClN CAR) HH DCIIOV

..11' - MC '\.,

C 1 SR CN r MCXA
C

12oo,2'w'
-
..11' HCX
~F
,.,
I ~~L
HCXA
I
SR eN

J II>DZ 1200,2'w' ZIDoF

LANDING DOOR SAFETY SVITCH LANDING DOOR INTERLOCK S...ITCH(BY RETIRING CAM)
GATE S...
~ !![T!Il!!. Fl. _ -, A y~
FRZ
-~--1 ~
-l< _ - x - _T!!!;. Fl. T!![l5 TC06 TCD7 TC07 T!![lZ BOTTllM FL TOP FL DD3 !NTL
-0-- -","*""" - - --M - - x - -.-...- - -
1NT DDR GS GS TES TES SAF IN X CT4-1,2
D
0
MH DCIIOV

y~
GS ,n~
'--'
T1-14
HY4 DCIIOV

CJQL ZDK,ZV
v v~ XDSS
C'(I-6 H3-29 BDDH

E E

--T--------&---------~
PUO UlS 2DK,Z'"
XULS
C'I'I-7
TTD7
Pill
I
U L
CUP LIMIT S...)
CW3 "V'V'v 0
H3-3 I IDZH I
L ________ ~---------~
ZDK,Z'"

(PRE LIMIT UP SLO'" SII) PLU

;*"4
"V'V'v 0
H3-4 I XPLUL
I03H I
F
TBD~ir- -
P 10
-
I
-&- - - - - - - - -~-
T - - - - - - - -
(PRE LIMIT DN SLO'" S...) PLD.
P~
C Z-4
ZDK,Z'"
"V'V'v 0
H3-7 I ~'6& I
20K,Z'"
L________
IT- - - . - - - - - - lC- (DN LIMIT SII)
DL .
DLS
C~3 "V'V'v ---{)
H3-6 I XOi-S
15H I
G
2 3 ~ b b ~

7HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CD.,L TD.

 BRAKE LINE ~ MAIN CONTACTOR \,.,tIRING DIAGRAM
HULL NO. S316/7/8/9 COL.04
3 5 8 10

B3 B3
CT18-4 CTl9-1

1000
~ Bn ~ ~
.---------------.,---1[[3]JAf-::C"='TlQS--c-l,------<I--,.IlJIKruRul'------:C:::T~18>--3=----rr------'::':Q:-=-----T~:~OS
- - -4>13
2500 JLAC)I
Rl 20011 ,BK'I
47K 2IJ
R200(RIIO) BKA BKB m(
T:P-f-:-----.l
II 11 b-------eJ 1,------+---, I BRAKE COIL
I (ON TRACTION MACHIND

~
~
~
S200(SIIO)
T3~-13---.tll
BKB
b-------eJBKA1>- -' ~ ~~
'------: -+- 0__---B I
O
--IB4
81- __ --0B4
CT19-3 TM09

P24
T3-1,2 T3-5.6
NOTE
C
~ XXXX L
lIE.INPUT BUFFER I ADDRESS I
lIE.OUTPUT BUFFER E XXXX )
ADDRESS

H3~
BRX BKlJ'
14 116H lIE.SERIAL INPUT BUFFER -d AlllEXSS 1-
0
P24
CTl7-1
BK
TMIO
BKDP
CT17-2
lIE.sERIAL OUTPUT BUFFER sCiilE\s3
BRX

H3-33

IRKB
H3-34 391H

H----.l291o:1s--~H3'!?>-36---fC--'H;;;~llJT;;;2Hfi--)-l

P24 MC HCX MCI ~J MCI

+---C::'TO-:-2-----....,.".{ 1r~4,....-----,-1-rl41 ""'b.---------C-lT~>-:1--------------H3~~'-
-_-7....,1I(Z7lIH=j

HCXA
lFDH

HY4 DC24V

G,l-----,------r----"....-----,-------:;-----,,----...-------.-------._---r----.------,--------.,-----,----,,-----,------,..----,---.-I,IOG

?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CD.,LTD.

 CP CONTROL S~ITCHES ~IRING DIAGRAM ICHANGE Nom
HULL NO. : H2317/8/9/20 CDL,5A
')
1 I 2 I 3 I i I 5 I & I 7 I S I I 10

A
A

P24 P24
~ T3-1,2

f-

B
J3

11
40
7
I
9
41
I
5
0
H3-1 I
X41
100H I
C P24

CC2 -1
_
AUTD/INSP SIJ.

m~D
ON

IlNSfC20-2
CC20-3
DXAUTD
C 1-1 C 1-2 sl
XAUHl
140H I

-
-

XDNS

9
40t----rB3
5 J2
0
H3-13 I
X40
lOCH I sl 130H I
I--

29 X29
10
I
6
0
H3-2 I 101H I
AUTO/INS SIJ
MAUTO ~ I XHAUHl I
C
H3-9 I 10SH I
~
~

cR MCS ~ I XMCS I
H3~1O I 109H I
UP/DN BTN SIJ
MCSUP I XMCSUP I
~

H3-11 I 10AH I
~

D cR MCSDN
D
I ~ I XMCSDN I
H3~12 I 10BH I
AD/INIT S'J
- AD I XAD I
~

H3-15 I 10EH I

-4- INIT ~

H3~16
I
I
XFHSIJ
10FH
I
I
E
E

P24 .
TDl2
---(0 I--
I--

14 13 ALARM I XALARM \
ABN
F I I CS3-B \ 54DH I F
MH DC24V

I-- -
G
r,
I I £ I ,j I ., I :> I b I (
I D I ."

?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,LTD.

 OPTIONAL FEATURES ~ ARRIVAL LAMP \JIRING DIAGRAM ICHANOE NOTEo
HULL NO. : H2317/8/9/20 CDL.5B
I I 2 I 3 1 + I 5 -r 6 I 7 I 8 9 10

P 4 N24 P24
l
T3-1,2 " HOME LANDING , 3RD FLOOR (A DK) T3-5,6
A
A

~_-fHbQ0!l-
II __ -#;
T~ CS~3-1 C~~)
.
+- __ ,- . .UJ,g0EQ9-i _ _ _ --.!&R CSg-2 C 5~iH)

+-~--t-'~---;
~P.l1;~ RIP ROLL YDn, 1 Tr08
0
CS23-3 c5~~H)
8COH
__
~~~
_ _ _ ~R
C~~H)
TD09 CS25-1 -i.F190R
0
B CS23-4 B
1 T II
+- __ L2.F190~_ _ _ .....:&R , 0 C~iH)
~
CS23-5
P24 I TrH
_ _ _ ~R
C~~H)
L _ _ ..2.F190R
TDI2 0
TFl7 CS23-6

CAR ARRIVED LAMP

(AT HALL INDICATOR)
TD13o>P24
C
C

0 0

c:: c' ::
ARM
ARH3

] ALARM BUTTON CONTACT ] ALARM BUTTON CONTACT

FOR ELEVATOR FOR ELEVATOR MY4 OC24V
14 P 13 SP2 r P ""
rAULT MONITORING FAULT MONITORING

E
A 2 PANEL PANEL I '--,:.-I I CS26-2 \... 540H./
E
T 34 TM36

= TM 0
] MOTOR RUN SIGNAL
FOR ELEVATOR
rAULT MONITORING
PANEL

~-
DET AIL 'WIRING OF RDLL/PITCH_ :Tl
: c::=:
Rl
H
F
COO ABN
A~I
] ABNORMAL SIGNAL
FOR ELEVATOR
rAULT MONITORING
PANEL
1 TM27

A4
] ABNORMAL
FOR ELEVATOR
FAULT MONITORING
PANEL lk
1
1031
RT

~,
RIP
41\1 S\lIT,c:E 2

FOR ROLLING
S\/ITCH I

F : PITCHING
I
I
F

TM26 TM28 I RP
-
G
2 b 0
"
?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,LTD.
 LANDING CONTROL DEVICE ~ LOCK MAGNET \JIRING DIAGRAM ICHANGE NO'"
HULL NO. I H2317/8/9/20 CDL.06
2 I 3 5 B I ID

~ 4 ~ 4 A
73-1,2 73-5,6

UP/DOliN Sll.

+---:C-o~2D-I_-I t:ll
~ ~-2 I
XONUP
sl 13IH

~>-N
__
------:: XONDN
C'i1'l-3 sl 132H I
+-__-[~r:n---_{P2::>4- -d- ~>-D -:: XOVLD
P'fi:O'3 CC~-I OVERLOAD SII CC26-5 sl I3FH I
CAR DOOR
P£4
+---C:C:-C5-t"I- -
C2
SAFT~ SII.
- - - ~-3
SE
CC~4---JI---fI~l;';~E~H-1

0 D

LANDING CONTROL DEVICE

<ON CAR)

~
N~4
CC -7 - - , - ~y f- . , - - - - CC3-~
I I
I L I ~A
~
ULA XULA
I f- I - - - - c8=l TCOI 71-6 H3-2~ IlBH I
E r- ~UQ f-l ~4U E

f- -t - ~
XILU
I - - - CC -2 7C02 Tl-7
H3-26 1l9H I
~- ~D-Q ~1 ____ Z-~ ~ I
XILD
I -t CC3-3 TC03 Tl-B
H3-27 llAH
L_ ~A-Q f-J
~
f- _ _ _ _ _ ~ ~ A
CC -4 7C04 Tl-9
H3-28
XDLA
IlBH I
F

G
G
• o

""YUNDAI ELEVATOR CO"L TD.

 CAR LIGHT IF AN ~ ELEC, CHIME 'vIIRING DIAGRAM rANG' NOTEo
HULL NO, H2317/8/9/20 COL.7A
2 3 5 7 8 10

22X
TC2
-, AIlO
TC41
BllO
TC4 'TC2
22Y A220
M40
B220
M41
I
I C/P FAN
I B220
CT21-2
I HOUR METER
(
A220
I PSV I-I
I
22Y A220 B220
I T2-16
ELEVATOR RUNNING LAMP
<ON CP, GREEN)
T2-18
I .-- ;,>--__C_Cl-:'}O CTB Bd. L-CZJ--'" TNR4 <ISG391K)
I
I N2-3.4(+) CN2-1,2(-)..., 0
CCI-I.2
I POIIER SUPPLY(SMPS)
I A 0 B 10 A220 B220
I CNI-S - - - - -c>------'
CC9-2 CC!l-I TO DOOR INV. TC38 TC39
I (COL8)

I ON CAR RECEPTACLE I c
L ~--------------~

P24 N24
FAN T1-19.20 T2-1,2

FAN SII. CAR FAN ELECTRONIC

\I (DNDPB) ~ ~ ~ CHIME
~--~-[1r-~---C::C_~3- -<Y""o- - ~':-4----....,c:':"clf.:3 - ~ - -C.cCI07_-I- - - - - t (IN OPB)

CC -S CC -7

C CHUP ') CHUP UP

~ 396 7 CC~--

LIGHT SII. CAR LITE C CHDN ') CHDN DO

~ 397 7 CC~--
L--~-[f-~---..:.c_~5 _(~~ _ C[lt:6
~'---------='&5--
\I
CCIB-3
~ - --c()-----~
- ~ CClB-1

BUZZER
(IN CAR J. BOX)
~-----~P~2~4---~_--~~Z----~L~~OL~B~Z-')~
CC2-4 L.J CC2-3 s;::: 38EH . /

LY2 DC24V

LT
399H

LY2 DC24V

"'INDAI ELEVATOR CD.,L TD.

 EMERGENCY LIGHT I INTERPHONE ex SPEAKER 'W'IRING DIAGRAM
HULL NO, : H2317/8/9/20 COL.7B
I 3 I 5 7 8 10

ON BOARD EMERGENCY POWER SOURCE

I Dcew I
A Ee4 EO
TMI7 TMI8

14 14 T4
r.-:- f- -
L:.:...- -
Tel8 Tel8
---@--~-
TH2e
FROM YARD AUTO •
AUTO r:- /59 /59 I /53 ] TELEPHONE EXCHANGER
TELEPHONE ~f- __ ~~_
~~H I I B
(LC-215B) I I
?J!?4
I,MI5
EWCY LIGHT AUTO-TELEPHONE IN CAR
I I
...--. ..J'l'-'lL,RYIr- ---;EMi\}lLf- ~ -ioW21
(BY OTHERS) I I
I I
Tel3 ~
I I
I I
ALARM BUTTON ~f- J I
I~ HY4 DC 4V
1~2 - - - - - - - -0 0-- - - - - - - - -T'-@-4c..AL-----1=.:14--{~1-1~13_-.... I C
AUTO r:- I
TELEPHONE ~f----- - - - _-.J

'WALL MWNT
l,AL
°0M37 ALARM BUZZER 'WITH LAHP(FLUSH)
AUTO-TELEPHONE IN
L J;h,/.Il2 -.lfo ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM
~ MI8 (BY OTHERS)

o
SPI SPI SPI
---~~--

Dl 1
e
3
FLUSH
(RS-2)
- J
-----~~--
- . . ,L

SPEAKER IN CAR
(BY OTHERS)
3
3
~~
3
3
spe

r ·r
r~ _ _
spe spe

]
SPEAKER LINES
CON BOARD)

" "
?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CD.,LTD.
 DOOR CONTROLLER 'WIRING DIAGRAM rHANGE NOTE'
HULL NO. : H2317/8/9/20 COL,08
5 8 10
2 3

Ml DOOR OPERATOR <ON CAR)

P 4
T1-19,20 ~ ~~IM DOOR ~N-;"ERTER
'-- ~P>-4 -._I--f-j~"'-,
CC13-5 I I
I
sl_.!;~~",8H,,-_~ - - - - i
t-~~
I
JI--~XD~C~L--l~ - - - - -i _1-+12>~""-+--1
13:;b-
4
c-1c~ JI ~I
CCI3-1

t----,.j
CL
i:lf..---C-":C1CL
eS_-2 - - - - iI -H:'I"'"--J DOL , CAR DOOR OPEN LIMIT S'w'ITCH
DCl , CAR DOOR CLOSE LIMIT S'w'ITCH
DCoM I I DOOR
L-------c~cI5_~4 - - - -II-H?:I~---.J OPEN LIMIT C
SIGNAL
I ERMINAL
BLOCK
INPUT
I
L +24VDC
N24 +24VO
0------ Dvne DOOR
CC32-3 CLOSE LIMIT
N DV'Of.---1---1
SIGNAL
INPUT
CLSO+---+---1-..J

CNll
o
P24
T1-19,2D

I
I
I

---~
I
I
DOOR MOTOR I I
'-- ..i _ +I----+--
FMRI-_-oIILISQ-_ _,[J,,---H

B~ ~0tT4AR~ _ J ! 5 9 T1-12
LY2 DC24V
IPH-AC22DV-6DHz CCI4-1 U22DV):

(FROM COL7> A22D-II-mNDli;;.2 -4N~ _ -<X>- j

C~2 C8?-1 CC14-2 N(22DV) I
N~ --co- .J
CC14-3 PE

?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CD"LTD.

 CAR CALL \,.fIRING DIAGRAM rHANGE Nom
HULL NO, : H2317/8/9/20 CDL,09C
1 I 2 I 3 I .. I 5 I I) I 7 I 8 I '3 I 10

A
A

~ '-

~
B

"t
TC3

P24
TC3.
N24
TC36
_____

I
~l
TC36

__

I- - -

:
-o--'-oJ.C - - - - - - .1Ca
-@!f-L- _ _ _ _ _ 1~
C -I
C03-1 sl
sC
XIC
161H
lCL
214H )
I
~
B

: ~--~--'-~------~
C -2 sl
X2C
162H I C
C
~ _ _ _ _ _ ~--~l------~ 2Cl
) .
C05-2 sC 214H
I I
I I
l-
I +- __ ~--'-~ ______ ~
sl
X3C
I
I C -3 163H

t- - - - - - ~- - _@f_l--- - - -3~_3 sC
3Cl
214H )
I I
I I
D
I +- __ ~--'-~ ______ ~ X4C
I
D

I C -4 sl 164H

t- - - - - - ~- - --Q?)1f-l_ - - - - -~-4 sC
4Cl
214H )
I I l-

I I
I --'-5C~ XSC
I +---~C>-""'------
C -5 sl 165H I CALL ADDRESS

t------~---@f-l------~
C05-5 sC
SCl
214H ) 2l4H CAR CALL OUTPUT lCL - BCL
E
E
I I 228H H-CALL UP OUTPUT lUL - 8UL

I I 238H H-CALL DN OUTPUT 2DL - BDL

I ~--'-oM----- -.2Co X6C

I
L --
C03-6 sl 166H I
-
~ L ________ ~- - - - - -~-6
sC
6Cl
214H )

F F

.
:... -
G
G
"I I 0 I b I I 0 I
., I
I £ I ;j
I

?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CD./LTD.

 HALL CALL 'WIRING DIAGRAM ICHANGE NO'"
HULL NO. : H2317/8/9/20 CDL,09H
I 2 I 3 5 10

[" r"t- -'-

P24 N24
A

m -'-
IU W W IU
PZ4

TTl _ _ _ 1_ _
- - O O - - - - T - - - TF'OI
----@JI&.--J
iCS7 1
-
f
191H
IUL ""'\
I '- 22BH ./

II 2U <lJ <lJ X2U

t----~--@Jllio--J
--0 O - - - - T - - - TF'OJ
i CS7 2
-
f
192H
2UL ""'\
'- 22BH ./

I L _ -o-'-o-3.u..- _ - T ___ 3U 3U X3U

I I
! - - - - f - - - @ - 3llio _ _ J
TF~
i CS7 3
-
f
19 H
3UL ""'\
'- 22BH ./
I I
T~1I9
4U X4U
:

t- - - - ~ -
r---o-'-o-4.u..---

-@-4 llio - -
T
J
---
i CS7 4
-
f
194H
4UI ""'\
'- 228H ../
c
I L -'- SU su 5U SU
I --0

L _____ -@-5llio _ _ J
o - - - - T - - - Ti'iZ
i CS7 S
-
f
19 H
SUI "'
'- 22BH ./

r'
P24 N24

PZ4

TTl
r~ NZ4
HZ

--_L--0-2~--J
--0
- ' - 2D
O----T---~CSI3-2 ~ I~:LH
X2D ~
23BH
I
: L - -o-'-o-3lL - - T - - - :j1l ~ X:<D
IC3H
I Tf07 TCSI3-3
L ___ l-_-@-3~ _ _ J f 3DL "'
'- 2'l8H ../
I I
I t---o-'-o-4lL_- --- w ~ X4D
I T TrIo TCSI3-4 IC4H

t- - - - ~ - -@-4~ - - J r 4DL "'

'- 23BH ../

: t- - -o-'-o-SlL - - T - --
5D
Ti''i3
!jp
TCSI3-S
SD
ICSH

t----~--@-S~--J f 5DL "

'- 23BH ../

: L--o-'-o-6lL - -
T
-_- ~
TFl6
~ 6D
IC6H
TCSI3-6
L _____ -@-6~ _ _ J f 6DL "'
'- 238H ../

G G
• b

?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CD"LTD,

 INDICATOR 'WIRING DIAGRAM
HULL NO. : H2317/8/9/20 CDL.10
I 2 3 4 5 ~ 7 I 8 I 9 I 10

A
A

P 4
TC35
CAR DDT MATRIX
INDICATOR TC3~
N 4 P 4
T3-1,2
HALL DDT MATRIX
ND,cATnR T3-5,~~ 4

sC FIlLA)
24AH C
[ib-----
-4
TLI
~ IFEH CS -I TTI2 - - ----<
TLI .
sC F2/L8 )
Jis---- TL2
C F2/L8 ) F2
CS~-2
T~ _ _ ----< TL2
24AH C 4-5

Ji6----
°t o

I
C
IFEH

F3
T 13

T~ _ _ ----< TL3
°t I
o

sC F3/LC )
24AH C 4-~
TL3
I
r3/LC )
IFEH CS~-3 TTI4 I
B

sC r4/LD )
24AH Jh----~
C 4-7
TL4 A C r4/LD )
IFEH
F4
CS~-4
Tf&- -
T 15
----< TL4 A I B

sC MUP
249H ) If&---~
C 4-1
HUP C MUP
IFDH
) Mif
CS4-1
M~
T 16
_ _ ---< HUP

I
C~---~ ~
HDN
sC 249H ) HDN I IFDH CS4-2 T 17 - - ---<
HDN I
I
sC ) ~---~ ~
DST DST DST
24911 C 4-3 IFDH CS4-3 T 18 - - ---< C
C

sC LED!
249H ) L~ ---~ OVERLOAD
CD-17
C LED3
IFDH
) L8 3
CS4-6
D~
T 19
__ ~ OUT OF SERVICE
I
L~ _ _ _

i P~4 N.e.4
sC LED2
249H ) ----<
ROLL/PITCH I -- ........ 24V GND >-

~ ')
CD2-18 TTlI TT20

C~
E
S 249H
'Il'-
CD2-19 - - - ----< OUT OF SERVICE
(SEE CDL.58 FOR
D
P24 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ --< 24V GND _ _ -lN24 CAR ARRIVED LAMP)
~--- D
TC35 '---- TC36

HALL INDICATOR
.
CAGE OPERATING PANEL(OPB) INDICATOR

E E

r r

G
£ ~
• , b
"
?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,LTD.
 CONTROL PANEL TERMINAL TABLE 'JIRING DIAGRAM ICHANGE Nom
HULL NO. : H2317/8/9/20 CDL.90
.
B I 9 I 10
1 2 I 3 I 'f 1 5 I 6 I 7

T-CABLE BLOCK DOOR ~ OPTION BLOCK MACHINEROOM BLOCK TOP PULL BOX BLOCK HIP BLOCK
NO. COL. NAME NO. COL. NAME NO. COL. NAME NO. COL. NAME NO. COL, NAME NO. COL. NAME A
A TCOl 6 ULA TDOl 3 PIIO TMOl 2 PGP TM48 3 CGX TTOl 3 CG TFOl 10 lU
TC02 6 ILU TD02 3 SAF TM02 2 PA TM49 3 \JG TT02 3 CGX TF02 5 lAR
TC03 6 ILD TD03 3 INTX TM03 2 PB TM50 3 EMS TT03 3 VG TF03 10 2U
TC04 6 DLA TD04 3 INT TM04 2 PGM TM51 TT04 3 TES TF04 10 2D
TC05 TD05 3 DOR TM05 2 THC TM52 6 C200 TT05 3 TESX TF05 5 2AR I-

TC06 3 GS TD06 5 FIRE TM06 2 THI TM53 TT06 3 UFL TF06 10 3U

TC07 3 TES TD07 5 CO2 TM07 4 B TM54 TT07 3 PllO TF07 10 3D
TC08 TD08 5 MAS TM08 4 B3 TT08 3 UPL TF08 5 3AR
TC09 3 PIT TD09 5 RIP TM09 4 B4 TT09 3 PLU TF09 10 4U
B
B
TClO 3 EXIT TDlO 5 FOAM TMlO 4 BK TTlO - - TF10 10 4D
TCll 6 LMl TDll 5 GEN TMll 4 PDT TTll 10 P24 TFll 5 4AR
TC12 6 LM2 TD12 5 P24 TM12 - P24 TTl2 10 TLl TF12 10 5U
TC13 7 EML TD13 5 P24 TM13 - N24 TTl3 10 TL2 TF13 10 5D
I-
TC14 7 AL TD14 5 MAS2 TM14 - - TTl4 10 TL3 TF14 5 5AR
TC15 7 T1 TD15 TM15 7 Y24 TTl5 10 TL4 TF15
TC16 7 T2 TD16 TM16 7 YO TTl6 10 MUP TF16 10 6D
TC17 7 T3 TM17 7 E24 TTl7 10 MDN TF17 5 6AR
TM18 7 EO TTl8 10 DST TF18 c
c TC18 7 T4
TC19 7 T5 TM19 7 Tl TTl9 10 OSL
TC20 7 E24 TM20 7 T2 TT20 10 N24
TC21 7 YO TM21 7 T3 TT21
TC22 7 Y24 TM22 7 T4 TT22
TC23 7 FAN TM23 7 T5 .
TC24 7 LITE TM24 - -
TC25 10 GEN TM25 5 AB1
TC26 7 22X TM26 5 AB2 BOTTOM PULL BOX BLOCK
AB3 D
D TC27 7 22Y TM27 5 NO. COL. NAME
TC28 TM28 5 AB4
TM29 5 Rl TBOI 3 FLS
TC29 TB02 3 DFL
TC30 3 SLR TM30 5 R2
TM3l 5 R3 TB03 3 CGT l-
I- TC31 7 SPI TB04 3 \JGT
TC32 7 SP2 TM32 5 R4
TM33 5 ARM1 TB05 3 PIT
TC33 7 SP3 TB06 3 PllO
TC34 6 LP24 TM34 5 ARM2
TM35 5 ARM3 TB07 3 DPL
E
TC35 1 P24 TB08 3 PLD
E
TC36 1 N24 TM36 5 ARM4
TM37 7 AL TB09
TC37 TBlO
TC38 2 A220 TM38 1 22XA
TC39 2 B220 TM39 1 22XB -
f-
TC40 TM40 7 A220
TC41 7 A1l0 TM41 6/7 B220
TC42 7 B110 TM42 7 EO
TC43 TM43 7 ALZ
TC44 1 RX TM44 7 SPI F
F
TC45 1 IRX TM45 7 SP2
TC46 1 TX TM46 7 SP3
,
TC47 1 ITX TM47 3 CG
I-
l-
G r I
., I I
G
I T ~ I
.~.

I 't I ::l I b I ( D
-
 RELAY & CONTACTOR COUNTER TABLE &
BOARD MODULE PORT TABLE 'WIRING DIAGRAM
HULL NO, : H2317/8/9/20 CDL,91
3 I 5 I I 10

1. RELAY 8. CONTACTDR COUNTER TABLE A

lIE, IN CONTROL PANEL

NAME 29 40 41 ARM P ABN LRY BRT LM MCXA NAME BRA BRB MCA NAME BKA BKB
TYPE MY4 MY4 MY4 MY4 MY4 MY4 MY4 H3Y MY4 MY4 TYPE LY2 LY2 LY2 TYPE HG2 HG2
COIL 3 3 3 7B 5B 5A 1 5B 5B 4 COIL 4 4 4 COIL 4 4
VOLT DC100 DC110 DC110 DC24 DC24 DC24 AC220V DC24 DC24 DC24 VOLT DC24 DC24 DC24 VOLT DC24 DC24
9/5 9/1 4 5A 5A 7A 7B 4 6 3 5/3 5/1 41 41 41 1/3 1 1/4 41 41
10/6 10/2 5A 4 4 5B 5B 5B 4 6 3 6/4 6/2 41 41 41 8/6 1 8/5 41 41
11/7 11/3 4 5A 5B 5B 5B
12/8 12/4 4 7B 4
NAME MC MCX
lIE, IN CTB(CAR TOP BOARD) TYPE 3RTlO 3RTlO
NAME OP CL NUDG FAN LT COIL 3 3
TYPE LY2 LY2 LY2 LY2 LY2 VOLT DC100 DC100
COIL 8 8 8 7 7 1/2 2 2
VOLT DC24 DC24 DC24 DC24 DC24 3/4 2 2
5/3 I 5/1 18 81 81 7 17 5/6 2 2
6/4 I 6/2 81 18 1 7 7 13/14 5A
53/54 5A

2. BOARD MODULE PORT TABLE

SID BOARD IN/OUT MODULE PORT TABLE
PlJllULE HI H2 H3 Hi H5 H6 H7 HB H9 HIO HII HI2 HI5 HIG HI7 HIB HJI HJ2 HJ3 HJ~ HJ5
INIDUT -PTYPE ]-PTYPE -PTYPE -NTYPE D-PTYPE C-PTYPE D-PTYPE D-PTYPE !-NTYPE -PTYPE !-NTYPE D-PTYPE I-NTYPE D-PTYPE !-NTYPE -PTYPE !-PTYPE -PTYPE -PTYPE !-PTYPE C-PTYPE
LED GREEN GREEN GREEN YELLIlV RED RED RED YELLIlV YELLCII RED YELLIlV RED YELLCII RED YELLCII RED GREEN RED RED GREEN RED
X~O XHAUTC XULA BRKA HUP FI rcAHL 1U IUL XDSS IAR XRCLL ALARH
X29 XI4CS XILU BRKB NDN f2 NASTL 2U 2UL 2D 2DL 2AR XCC2
SIGNAl. XULS XHUP XILD fR2 DST f3 3U 3UL 3D 3DL 3AR XRUN
NAHE XPLUL XHDN XDLA I4CA LED! f1 ~U 1UL 1D 1DL 4AR XHAS
XPLUH X~O LED2 5U 5UL SD SDL SAR XNRN!
XDLS LED3 6U 6UL GD 6DL GAR XNRN2
XPLDL XAD XB!< X-RELAY rIREL 7U 7UL XfCAH fAULT
XPLDH XfHSII XHCI ALARM CCL2 au aUL

CTB BOARD IN/OUT MODULE PORT TABLE

MODULE Ml M2 M3 M4 MS M6 Me M9 Mll MI2
IN/OUT I-PTYPE J-PTYPE J-PTYPE I-PTYPE O-PTYPE D-PTYPE I-NTYPE J-NTYPE D-PTYPE D-PTYPE
LED GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN RED RED YELLDIJ YELLDIJ RED RED
XDNS XDDL XAUTD XEMC BZ FI Ie ICL
XDNUP XDCL XJNS LED! F2 2C 2CL
XDNDN XSE XJNUP LED2 F3 3C 3CL
SIGNAL XINDN LED3 F4 4C 4CL
NAME XDOB LED4 5C 5CL
XDCB MUP GC GCL
MDN
XOL XDCS DST

:?HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CD.,L TD,

 FIELD \v'IRING DIAGRAM(CAGE \v'IRING) \v'IRING DIAGRAM
HULL NO, H2317/8/9/20 FIELD-l-l
8 10
2 3

A
C06 -I
C06-
C02- 1
C02-2 -

,
C02-3 -"
C02-
. ..",
_.-.. 1
~'-3

..
~~~~~t'~I~~
~
~
~
~
~
-

l
I
-

DERG£NCY STIP SVITCH

r~ SVITCH<K(Y SVIleH>
1
2
3
4
5
6
CC2
NO NAME
CHUP
CHDN
OlBZ
P24
P24
N24
-=16l
/BC
2-e3
2-e4
r .. p
rHlW

'----'
ABLE

J'[] DM
IN [PI

BUZZER
<IN CJB)
BELL Ce13-5
et32-3
em-B
CC13-6
P2,
H2,
DCl
DOL
1
Z
3
,
L-HPYC-12
<I£LCD vtRINj)
IKD [J>£RATlIl

+24V<DPB.ClB)
OV(CM)
ClC
DPC
CABLE TAG NAME

ee3-1
eC3-Z
ee3-3
ee3-'
cc3-7
UlAU
Il
IlD
DlA
P24
ULA
IlU
IlD
DLA
P24
'A
'1'Il-I""""'-III-VleE

ILU

ILD
Bl.A
A

_7 ~ ~ ] N24 CCl3-1 OP DP ee3-5 H24 N24

C02- IT LIGHT SVITCH<KEY SVlTOD
l •• TtIlSE CABLES FIR LANDING COORD.. DEVIcE ME TO

-
_0 CCI3-Z Cl Cl
C02- lTX BE YARD VIRED TO PREVOfT llAHAGES [F 'Tl£ D£VJC[
CO, .-.'>
CC4 £DPYC-l.5U£\I-JlS eC13-' DCllM CM DlRING THE U1ADlNG. LN..DADJ~ AND SHIPPING,

C04
C04-
C04-
....
0_'0
-."
-."
111.1'

DST
TLI
~
-
-
·t·
INDICAT[R JOARD
NO NAME
1
2
3
GS
N24
INTl
V

B IIu I I r"1 GATE

SlJnCH
CC14-1

CCl4-2
B220
ND2
9
10
R
S
PE *" -JlPYC-5O£V JIS>

COA- :2-17
COA-
:.-
Tl2
Tl3
-
- B CC5
/J1i'YC-I,5INE\J- JlS>

CO, -_.-'" Tl4 - NO NAME V

t;~~EjC~Mt3
V

I d'iSAFETY
.0 SAFT
C02-1 OVL - 0IIERl.DAD 1
C02-L.
TC21 0
o
••
RPL
Y24
- RD..LIPITCH
ALMH BUTTON
2
3
N24
PITS B IIu SlJnCH
DEVICE IKD lJPEN LIIlIT S\JlTCH(ID.)
DI:I:R CLOSE LIMIT SVITOf(IICU
DPL
ell

TC1"-'· AL
l CN]
CC6 ClJPIH:NT CIllltE
NO NAME o£LeD \/IRING)
1 SAFT
I 2 [SON

COl
.,- DIlB ~~- IIOlR IJ'EN 8UTTDN TC BLOCK
TC26 SlR SLACK ROPE
COI-] -" DCB --r<'~~ lOR CLDSE BIJT1tIi
SlJnCH

CC7 CC19 OP/Cl SlJ

CC2-1'-'" P2'~
CttJP
r=t~UP NO NAME
==
ARRIVAl... CHDE IN REMOTE BOX <IN CJB)
CC2-2···· HDH NO NAME
~ H2' 1 ESON
-=- ~ .::J:-STOP
1 ONS
2 RESoN 2 DOB
~
CD3-1-''> ~
cos- ;.-, ~ 1
CCB
DPYC-l.5CI£\I-.nS> 3 DCB
( N CJB)
.,- ~ NO NAME
COO-
~
'0- CC20 AUTO/INS SlJ
ClIS- 20-:>
~
- 1 RESON
V
NO NAME (IN CJB)
-." 2 N24
CD)- 3 ._,
CDS- 3 -
CD)-, -
3C
3Cl -
'0--
3FlJIR CAll JlIJT1tIi 3 EXIT
B 1
2
P24
ONS
IAUTO
TINS In?
""V
AUTO
I
CDS-,.....
CC16
0
'C
'Cl
' C>-

~
4rUIRCAl..l~

ND NAME
3 IFR
JUMPER CABLES
CC21
eD3'
eos-
CD3-
.•-'<
'RI
SC
SCl
6C
- 0--
SUD CAll BUT1~ 1
2
22Y
22X NO NAME
1 P24
UP/DOlJN BUTTON
<IN CJB) CC15 CC25B
CDS-6
6 .-1<
6Cl - CC17 2 ONUP UP BTN~:J NO NAME NO NAME
NO NAME
1 22Y
3 ONDN UN BTN-
1
2
ND2
A220 b 1
2
P24
N24
0
31 SE
- 2 N24 CAR FAN CC25 SAFETY EDGE CC24
3 FAN NO NAME S~IICH NO NAME CC4B
NO NAME
CC18
""YC-70EV-JIS> 1 P24
N24
~

I
1 P24
b GS

0
2 2 EE 1
NO NAME 3 SE 3 N24 2 N24
1 22Y 3 INTl
2 N24 CAR LIGHT CC26 CC24B
3 LITE NO NAME NO NAME

CAR EMER,
1 P24 1
2
P24
EE b
5 OVlD 3 N24
UGHT
G
G 8 o

1HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,L TD,

 FIELD \JIRINGCCAR JUNCTION BOX TO CP) \JIRING DIAGRAM
HULL NO. H2317/8/9/20 FIELD-1-2
2 3 5 I 8 10

TRAVELLING CABLE(ROUND)
(YARD 'JIRING) A
18A'o'G CABlE

~
IN TRAVELLING CABLE
TT TERMINAL

T,~~~~~~ BOX) <It~~J1L~o~L~~ Ell

~
(IN C!J
1 ULA ~- - - 1 ------ 1 ULA
2 ILU '- - - - 2 - - - - - - 2 ILU
3 ILD ~ - - - 3 - - - - - - 3 ILD

'--i-= -= ======
18 A'JG CABLE

~ D~SA :=Jl=~rr= :====== ~ 4 D~SA

<TOTAL 30CORD
~ ~
14 A'JG CABLE
(TOTAL 8 CORD "I)I)I) ~ /
~~'ffi~m~'_
TES 7 ------ TES

:~~ ~= 1~ :~~
9 9
10 10
11 LMl -- - - 11 - - - - - - 11 LMI MO ' ' ' '

~~ ~t ~~I#~I~ ~~ ~~~~~~~ ~~
16 T2 -- - - 16 - - - - - - 16 T2
SHIELD C A B L E ( 2 0 A ' J : /
(TOTAL 8 CORD

17 T3 -- - - 17 - - - - - - 17 T3
18 T4 -- - - 18 - - - - - - 18 T4

:==n=Itt-= ~~ ====== ~~
STEEL CORE

~~
18 A'o'G CABLE
Er:4 Er;., 0 0
21 YO '---- - 21 - - - - - - 21 YO a a

~~ ;:~ ~=i= =~~ ====== ~ ;:~

r:P 0 0 co
8 '0
24 LITE ~ - - - 24 - - - - - - 24 LITE 14 A'JG CABlE ~ "-SHIELD CABLE(20A'JG)
25 ,-- - - 25 - - - - - - 25

Jl- -
26 22X '- - - IT - 26 - - - - - _1-'2='6;+--=22"'X,-l ""'--OUTER JACKET<URETHAND
27 22Y ~ LL_ 27 - - - - - - 27 22Y
28 ~- ~ 28 - - - - - - 28 ] SPARE TERMINALS
TRAVELLING CABLE CROSS SECTIONAL DIAGRAM
29 - -~ - - 29 - - - - - -l'2~9;+-_-J AND
30 - - - - 30 - - - - - -r30 SPARE CABLES
31 SPI - - - - - 20-R-Y - - - - - - 31 SPI 20-R-Y, PAIR W3 RED CABLE IN YELLO'o' 20A'o'G(SHIELDED> CABLE
o
32 SP2 - - - - 20-'o'-Y - - - - - - 32 SP2 20-'J-Y. PAIR W3 'JHITE CABLE IN YELLO'o' 20A'o'G(SHIELDED) CABLE

-1---
33 SP3 I- - - - - 20-R-OR - - - - - - 33 SP3 20-R-OR' PAIR W4 RED CABLE IN ORANGE 20A'o'G(SHIELDED> CABLE
M M TRAVELLING CABLE SPECIFICATION
35 P24 I- - -+1- - - 14-I-B - - - - - -~35;+-;;P""24:-1 14-I-B, 14A'JG WI BLACK CABLE

~
14 A'JG CABLE 20 A'JG CABLE 19 A'JG CABLE
14-2-'0', I4A'JG W2 'JHIlE CABLE
;~ N24 I- 14-2-'0' - - - - - -;~ N24 (2,IMMSQ CABLE> (SHIELDED CABLD (0.8MHSQ CABLE>

38 A220 - - - - - 14-4-LA - - - - - - 38 A220 14-4-LA< 14A'o'G W4 LAVENDER CABLE NO. 8. CONDUCTOR INSULATION PAIR JACKET CONDUCTOR INSULATION
39 B220 - - - - - 14-5-LA - - - - - - 39 B220 14-5-LA< I4A'JG W5 LAVENDER CABLE SPEC, NUMBER COLOR NUMBER COLOR NUMBER COLOR
~ ~ BLACK (B) RED (R)
I 1 1-10 YELLO'J (y)
41 AIIO - - - - - 14-7-LA - - - - - _r-;;41;+-A""'I'7I""0-1 14-7-LA< I4A'JG W7 LAVENDER CABLE ClJl[ BLACK (B)
2 VHIlE ('01) 2 11-20 ORANGE <OR)
42 BIIO - - -T1- - - 14-8-LA - - - - - - 42 BIID 14-8-LA< 14A'JG W8 LAVENDER CABLE or
coou:~
3 GREEN (G) 3 YELLOV (Y)
21-30 TAN <TAN>
a a 4-8 LAVENDER (LA> 4 ORANGE (OR)
44 RX - - ~- - - 20-R-R - - - - - -1-'4'"4;+--;;R""X-J 20-R-R. PAIR WI RED CABLE IN RED 20A'JG(SHIELDED> CABLE
fOR COMMUNICATION
45 IRX - - - - - 20-'J-R - - - - - - 45 IRX 20-'J-R, PAIR WI 'JHITE CABLE IN RED 20A'o'G(SHIELDED) CABLE
46 TX - - - - - 20-R-B - - - - - - 46 TX 20-R-B> PAIR W2 RED CABLE IN BLACK 20A'JG(SHIELDED) CABLE EACH PAIR CONTAINS
NOTE FOR PO'JER fOR CONTROL
2 CABLES INSIDE.

I
47 ITX - - - - - 20-'J-B - - - - - - 47 ITX 20-'J-B, PAIR W2 'JHIlE CABLE IN BLACK 20A'JG(SHIELDED> CABLE
ONE IS RED(R) AND
THE OTHER IS 'JHIlE('J).

j
TER INAL
NUMBER
TERJINAL
NAME
TERMINAL
NUMBER
TERJINAL
NAME

u NOTE u
TRAVELLING CABLE MODEL' C'JR46PUR
TRAVELLING CABLE OUTER DIMENSION , ABOUT 32 MM

THE TERMINAL NUMBERS ARE NOT SHO~N

ON THE TERMINAL BLOCKS,
THE TERMINAL NAMES ARE MARKED ON
EACH TERMINAL,

G
b D

7HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO"LTD,

 tlDST WAY TIP
IHDISTVlAY!

-
~
PULL BOXlIl -L-"'YC-I"

~CGI--1.1
.... rlNAl. LIMIT SIo'lTtH
!::¥ ~

TfsXI- ' 05
CAR GOVERNDR SIiITCH(NC)
~:@1--2 02 c:::::: l:¥ ~ lJ' LIMIT SVITCH
~~1--3 CllJNTER IIEIGHT GOVERNOR SIiITCH(NC) "'T'J
03 - .-
T04 TES 1 - - ' 04 _ rl
=To: :-=i):¥ ~ I---J TRUNK TIlP ESCAPE SIiITCH(NC>
PRE-LOOT I.P SUN S\lITCH
r
~ "tFt1--6 06 '---' f:¥ -----=c---, UP FINAL LIMIT SIiITCH(NC) t:::l
TO ttC-7 07 _
:e:::
To' UPL - . 08 :-=i ~¥ -----=c---, UP LIMIT SIiITCH(NC) :r: .-
I
I·
I
;g: ~ -9 09 '---' .::~ -----=c---, PRE-LIMIT UP SLOII SIiITCH(NC)
'"
c
r ;:;0
.-
I 10 r z
11 1 1- P24 C1
n c;u- ~2"' ill z
i PULL ~~~
BLOC~
'IT'lli,
=::- ~
Tl TL3
1

1
II
_,
_2
_3-
12
13'3"'
14
•
2-
3- Jtt
-=-=-
. - TL3
t
B
I 2-rru-
3-Jtt t
.- c=-=-
TL3
!=J .-
t:::l
J>
tf ~ I _. 15 5 , - TL4 ,-'TL4 B :r: C1
-"'--"-- -, 6 ~ ~
ru ;:;0

_9
,g ~ _6- 16 7 6-g 6-g w ]>
Tl MDN 17 7- MDN M"""""" 7- MDN M"""""" ....... ::s::
TI 'tst
-'" -"-'-
_7
_8
18·e-
.....
.-'IisT
c=:'-
._~ "-J "
n
-

'"OJ
0.=.-
,g ~I--l 19 -lo- 9-~ 9-~
w
"'U
~ ~ I -<Ir 20

!-A,
N24

1>-~
N24
'"
o...D -l
0
T2 - r--t+--2 21 P BUTTON
'"ru
~~ ~ ~~ II ~ ~~~~:~T~~~p = "'U
C
=R-=- ,--2 24 '6D BUTTON
r
= - 25 ~f----0 ARRIVED LAMP (~ ~ LUu/<l "
{
~~I-- II -il- 26 1-_ -L-HPYC-19 tJ::t
11F1~ 5D 1---- 27
0
H ~sARf----J I ~.....- 28 - Lbl' LUUK)
X
BLO~K r---"=
'-/
29 L-MPYC-19 -l-IlPYC-l.5
•
~~I----++' 1--<Z--1-...;3=,,0_-l- I ~~DCOR INTERLOCK SII.
~~I----t1--' f,-J'-- ~~ - 3~DOOR SAfETY SII.

L-HPYC-27- 33 '--II-- ';. ~~ ~ _ _ •

OOR INTERLOCK SII. 6 F OOR)

OOR SAFETY SII.

o

:e:::
.-
(5 FLOOR)
;:;0
"'T'J
.-
.- Z
rl
r C1
t:::l t:::l
I .-
ru J>
I C1
....... ;:;0
J>
::s::

n
I
:J>
Z
C1
i'T1
cp--L-HPYC-I9 Z
D
-I
i'T1

TO PULL BOX 112

I o'".-r----..",-----,-----m-----,------,,---------"""";';"----,------;;;;-----,--------:>=------' 0
..,)
:::c
-<
c
Z
t::::l FROM PUL BOX NO.1
~

c P--L-MPYC-19

PULL BOX#2
1----p-
01 1-,-----;;-;::::::::;;:===:;--1
_...... 1- ~
n 1-r:=Z:-:"4""----'
I---H- _P
OZ _3"'" 2- J!:!- .... 2-...!!:!... .... :r:
~~ ~ ~ ~E I ~~ I c
4-1:::4='" 04:1_ 4-E B II 4 - ~ B r
r
5-:::?" 05 5- ~ 1---~.....5- TL4
'HUP

:=*-
&-:::6"" 06 &- &- MUP &-
z
7- -::;::p 07 _~ 7-'HDN lIlT IF IOMtl: 7- ~ lIlT IF IOMtl: ~
8-:::8"""
~~
08
~
_'I-
~
8-
~~
~
-i(}-:::iiT"" 10 ., NZ4 NZ4

-- ~g!~~~~~====&~~~~J
~ .2!!... 1 11 1 II I---++-U- ~ P BUTTON
~ ~1---+l---2 12 .-l2'" I---+Hlc-l~ O'JN BUTTON
HIP FO 3AR 3 13 .-l3" '------t'+-J.:r-;itR"l .::: RRIVED LAMP
BLOCK ro"""4U 4 14 ~IID BUTTON .-::::..::..:.. ~
[ ~][ 15 ~DO'JN BUTTON ~;1 ~ LUUI<J
:I
II
!t!:.:~ & 16 ~ARRIVED LAMP '---L-MPYC-19
-i1-WI--...:.17~--l (4 FLOOR)
L-MPYC-IZ- 18

-12---~9~
--L-MPYC-19

~~
-1r-- 1 ZZ
--
1
f-wYC-:l l~OOR
2
INTERLOCK S'J,

::~I-"";~:':~:""--1=:=hl I ~ v ~ OOR SAFETY S'J.

-t+-:::i4"'" Z5 III --H-- ~ _ DOOR INTERLOCK S'W.

'--_ _+1-_ ~ DOOR SAFETY S'W.

-l-wYC-5

CP--L-MPYC-19
:e:::
.........
'1 /0
......... .........
rTJ Z
r Q
PULL BOX#3

~
PRE_LIMIT
t:j
t:j

.~~~i~~~~I~I~ :-l-~YC-\.:l
I .........
~&f--1 01 t:::::=~V DO'WN FINAL LIMIT S'WITCH(NC)
IXlIIN SUIII SIITTCH ru :I>
I
.:!Q;~f--2 02 r--. . W
Q
B~CGT 1 - - 3 03 r==::~ ~j~~~ CAR GOVERNOR TENSION S'WITCH(NC) IXl\IN LOOT S\IITCH
/0
W 'VGT - 4 04 I-===:: ~ COUNTER 'WEIGHT GOVERNOR TENSION S'JITCH(NC) :I>
BOTTOM
PULL BOX
w"PI'T
=- r--- - 5 05 1---1 PIT EMERGENCY STOP S'WITCH(NC) IXl\IN F1NAl LlHiT SIITTCH
3:

BLOCK
~~,.--&
BO DPL -7
II 06
07
--V~~~~.~
~~
DO'WN LIMIT S'WITCH(NC)
Bo 'PLiJ-8 08 -I PRE-LIMIT DO'JN SLO'J S'JITCH(NC)
PIT
~::= 09
Bl - 10
'-- '--- 11
1- 1 -----;::----;:=::;:::=:::::::;-----, n
_2- 1- ~ 1----++-1- ~
-2- 12 2-...!!:!....... 1----+-1-2- TLl
II 1--3- 13 .,..- 3- TLZ I 3-~ t
1--4- 14 4-
_:1-
4- TE3
- B II 4-~
I--
B
1--5- 15 5- ~ 1 - - - - r r - 5 - TL4
1--&- 16 &- &- MUP &-~
-7- 17 _: 7-~ lIlT IF DYIa: 7-~ lIlT IF SDMIX
-8- 18 8- ~ 1---++-8- DST
-9- 19 ...... ,- ~ 9- ""DSL
II --iD--- 20 -1~ NZ4 N24
P BUTTON

RRIVED LAMP

'----L-MPYC-19

-l-ll'YC-5

O:::::-T----=;;------.------;;;-----,...-----;::;-------------::::-------,.-----=------,----__-:-- ...J(;
...,
:r:
-<
c
!ClP I ___---_L I MACHINE ROOMI
Z
t::l
i!::
,..,
,..,r _T:C~ r~p:-~
<
===:y:-it ===
R

'i
J>
--I S }MAIN PDVER SOURCE
o T C3PH-440Y-60Hz)
;;0

n TERMINAL """'l
p BLOCK U u TM400 >-<
f'l
r---I V V
r
V V
!=:' t=1
G
DR ~
ERMINAL
.......
I /0
X
C
.......
f-fI--fHI'GP
'" r z
h.--rr-iA+ r Ci
~~----tB+

H-1--i"j--1 PGM Z t=1

0
.......
:I>
H-A--+--I THC Ci
NDT
H-tt----t---t THI (U,v,'w',G> /0
HOTDR THERMISTIJl ~ BRAKE I :I>
H-H--t--1 B3 CTHI,THC , B3.B4) ru 3::
r-..
H-ll--t--1 B4 ROTARY ENCOOCR
(PGP,A+,B+,PGM) .....
W
-.....J
n
--0
.......
DSL.2'" CABLE-2PCSHIELDED) IN rLEXIBLE CCNDUIT 00 -l
....... 0
L-MPYC-5 \.D
....... 3::
TO CONTROL PANEL ru
rIELD GROUND
= :I>
n

~
YARDCABLE
:r:
.......
2X - - - - - - CAGE NORMAL LIGHT SOURCE z
2X - - - - - _ ><lPH-220Y-60Hz) f'l
/0
E24 ~- - - - - - >CAGE EMER. LIGHT SOURCE

----r-
ED - - - - - _ CDC24Y) 0
0
3::
'-/

- - - - Jl_ - } rRDH YARD AUTIl-TELEPHONE

TERMINAL BUICK
""'""'~-
f[R[Jl BOARD
SIGNAL ~ MACHINE

=
ROOM SIIITCHES
~
.......
- - - - +l - - } SPEAKER
====~ = SIGNAL INPUT
<rRDH GN BOARD PIA SYSTEM)
U1
-r"]
>--<
f'l
;;0
.......
Z
Ci
- - - - - -- TO ALARM MONITORING SYSTEH r t::J
- - - - - -- >(ClOSE COOACT "'HEN CAGE ALARM BUTTON IS PRESSED) t::J .......
- - - - - - TO ALARM HllNITORING SYSTEM I :I>
- - - - ti - -- ><lJ'EN COOACT 'JHEN CAGE ALARM BUTTON IS PRESSED> W Cl
/0

----11--
- - - - ~- - - >TO ALARM MONITORING SYSTEH
<DPEN CONTACT "'HEN HDTOR IS RUN)
:I>
3::

====]]==
==== =
- -

_ _ _ _
- - ~-
=
--

_ __ >ALARM
>l~L:~CN~~OR~SZI~~E~BNDRMAL
TO ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM
CONDITION)

>COPEN COOACT 'JHEN LIn ABNORMAL CONDITION)

BUZZER "'ITH LAMP SIGNALCTO 'JIH)
n
:r:
:l>
z
C"I
rr1
Z
CJ
-I
':l

5,5SQ(G)
(PLEASE JUMPER ArTER
ON-BOARD GROUNDING "'eRK)

(FOR SYSTEM GROUND) (FOR FIELD GROUND)

5,5SQ(G)
.
I
., >0
-<
C
Z
t:::l
~
MACHINE (2C)
ROOM C/P
(CONTROL AUTO
PANEU TELEPHONE

---------
T-CAIlE
HDISTYJAY tiP
Z7C
tIP
~
......
;;0
FLS(TOP
......
N
I Z
C CI
r
r t::!
......
z ]>

T-GABLE
!? CI
;;0
:c
f\)
]>
~
~ /"'0,
n
HDISTW'AY ESCAPE slf.'1 -...J
"- ]>
CAR GOVERNOR S~j====T~~================;::=====rc=:::;:~ _ _~.li!;...r-' CC tx:::I
COUNTERW'EIGHT GOVERNOR sI,/. 2C "-
\D
,-
fTl
"-
f\)
o ]>
;;0
~FL ;;0
]>
9C
Z
CI
fTl
~
fTl
Z
-j
'-./

EMER.
(2x 7 )
LAMP
CAR
EXIT SW'
(20

I
I
I # T-CABLE
L - _~ROM CONTROL PA~L~ --'

(2C)

AUTO-
TELEPHONE

(2C)

~FL
9t

Z7C 2 FL

~
tiP lD

LANDING DOOR SAFETY SW'ITCH

PULL BOX ;--n-L--...j..:',--<I" DlIIR INTERl.DCK ,

~ SAfETY COOACTS

LANDING DOOR INTERLOCK SW'ITCH

L11CATION OF LANDING DOOR SW'ITCHCHINGED)

>0
V. MISCELLANEOUS

PAGE

AME PLATE ------------------- I)-I - I)-5

TEST AND CERTIFICATE - - - - - - - - - - - - - ])-1 - J)-8

TABLE FOR LUBRICATING OIL & GREASE ------ K)-1

SPARE PARTS LIST --------------- L) -1 - L)-6

SCOPE FO SUPPLY LIST - - - - - - - - - - - - M)-1 - M)-3

 NAME PLATE LAYOUT MANUAL
DECK NAME, CAPA, 'w'ARNING L-295-A-28

200
o

DECK NAME
ELEVATOR
360 KGS
SHOP NOTE
4 PERSONS
DO NOT USE TH~/~~~T~~~EN THE GENERAL 1. LETTER SIZE AND COLOR :
ALARM HAS SOu~tu ~t~!~OF FIRE OR DECK NAME I BLACK, GOTHIC, SIZElO
WHEN THE SHIP IS ROLLING MORE THAN TEN ELEVATOR, CAPACITY, PERSONS I
DEGREES (10-) FROM, THE VERTICAL
BLACK, GOTHIC, SIZE10
WARNING I TITLE IRED, GOTHIC, SIZElO
CONTENT I BLACK, GOTHIC, SIZE5
rrpO~OXH 2. LOCATION I LANDING DOOR(FRONT SIDD

O'JNER NOTE
o

o 1. LET US KNOW THE EXACT SENTENCE OF TRANCLATED LANGUAGE.

2. THE TRANCLATED LANGUAGE SHALL BE CLEANLY TYPED AND
BE SENT US BY MAIL.

1HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,LTD. I L-295-A-28

 NAME PLATE LAYOUT MANUAL
HO\tl TO OPEN L-295-0A-010

200

o 0
HO~ TO OPEN THE LANDING DOOR ON THE TRUNK INSIDE

TURN THE INTERLOCK LEVER AND THE DOOR HANDLE AT

THE SAME TIME,AND PUSH THE LANDING DOOR FDR~ARD. SHOP NOTE
1,-ALL LETTERS' COLOR :BLACK
-EDGE LINE'S COLOR :BLACK
- BACK GROUND COLOR :'WHITE
2,CHARACTER HEIGHT :5.0MM<TITLE :7,OMM)
INTERLOCK LEVER
c:>
(I)
3.CHARACTER 'VIIDTH :2.4MM<TITLE :3.4MM)
(\J

4.CHARACTER DIST ANCE:1,OMM.

5, 'VIORD DIST ANCE :3.4MM.
6.PRINT LETTER ON ACRYL BACKSIDE.
7.ATTACH PROTECTION COVER ON FRONT.
8.LETTER TYPE -F ACE ;M.S.GOTHIC ROUND BOLD.
9.MA TERIAL : SUS

n1'I1:"n; ~\l'fJ(Ne.: TO XU10\;\1 nil: IKJI'T.\l. K\l 11J

"o,,-,ou."'~\lJu. "'" U1f'{IEIE IIIN IKwn N' ANOI3EL lIELOCATION :IN TRUNK (ENTRANCE DOOR).
o 0

O'JNER NOTE

1. LET US KNO~ THE EXACT SENTENCE OF TRANCLATED LANGUAGE.

2, THE TRANCLATED LANGUAGE SHALL BE CLEANLY TYPED AND
BE SENT US BY MAIL

1HY~DAI ELEVATOR Cll.,LTD, L-295-0A-OIO

 NAME PLATE LAYOUT MANUAL
RESCUE METHOD L-295-0A-016
REV.:

(l) TURN OFF THE MAIN S\lITCH IN ELEVATOR

MACHINE ROOM.
(2) RELEASE THE BRAKE MECHANISM BY MEANS OF
THE BRAKE HANDLE AND TURN THE FLY-\lHEEL
OF YELLO\l COLOR IN EASER-TO-TURN
DIRECTION. LET THE CAGE STOP AT THE SHOP NOTE
NEAREST FLOOR \lHEN THE BRAKE IS
LOOSENED. FULL ATTENTION MUST BE PAID l.-LETTER 8. EDGE LINE COLOR ,BLACK AND RED
SO THAT THE MOTOR IS NOT TURNED. - BACK GROUND COLOR 'IJHITE
(3) STOP THE CAGE AT ARRIVAL LEVEL \lITHIN 2.CHARACTER HEIGHT :5.0MM(TITLE 17.0MM)
±200MM OF THE SPECIFIED LEVEL AND OPEN 3.CHARACTER IJIDTH 12.4MM(TlTLE '3.4MM)
THE DOOR BY MANUAL OPERATION AND RESCUE 4.CHARACTER DISTANCE,1.0MM
5.lJoRD DISTANCE ,3.4MM.
6.PRINT LETTER ON ACRYL BACKSIDE.
7.ATTACH PROTECTION COVER ON FRONT.
(1) flPlm TON KENTPIKO AlAKOffiH rTH BUH "Ott". B.LETTER TYPE-F ACE IM.S.GoTHIC ROUND BOLD.
o 6!AK0Iffi[ BPlD<ETAi ITO ..HXAt«lITAlIKl TOT ANfAKTITHPA.
9.MATERIAL I SUS
(2) AflEAET9EPOrTE TO +PENO KAl rTPEtTE TON
KITPINO aONllTAO npOI THN nANO H KATO
KATET9TNIH OnOI EINA! H ENllEEH llANO ITON
KINHTHPA, lAEXPI 0 9N1AlAOI NA +TArEI ITON -LOCATION , ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM.
nAHI:IEITEPO OPOW.
nPOIDE om NA lAHN nEPIITPA+EI TO lAOTEP.
(3) OTAN 0 fW.M)I .TAIEI nEPtOOf ITA 200.... AnD TON
OPO+O ANOI::TE THN nOPTA XEIPOKINHTA AnO THN O\JNER NOTE
E::OTEPIKH METPA, XPHIIlAOnOIONTAI TO EIAIKO
KAEIAl KAI AnEAETBEPllITE TO ErI<AllB[lAENO ATOlAO.
1. LET US KND\I THE EXACT SENTENCE OF TRANCLATED LANGUAGE.
2. THE TRANCLATED LANGUAGE SHALL BE CLEANLY TYPED AND
o BE SENT US BY MAIL.
/

200

?HYUNDAI ELEVATlIR ClI.,LTD. I L-295-0A-0I6

 NAME PLATE LAYOUT MANUAL
MISCELLANEOUS L-295-0A-025
REV,:

2
I-
110
-, T ,-
110
-,
~[IO SIGNAL FROM THE LIFT 01
~ ~[IO ESCAPE HATCH 01
-LOCATON I IN ACCORDANCE 'WITH INTERPHONE POSITION -LOCATON , IN CAGE AND PULLEY ROOM OF TRUNK TOP

110
,. 200
-,
I- -I
~[Io DECK NAME 01
~[IO ELEVATOR INTER PHONE 01
-LOCATON I ON LANDING DOOR (REAR SIDD
-LOCATION, IN ACCORDANCE 'WITH INTERPHONE(EXCEPT CAGE INTERPHOND

SHOP NOTE
I.-ALL LETTER COLOR 'BLACK
- BACK GROUND COLOR .'WHITE
2.PRINT LETTER ON ACRYL BACKSIDE.
3.ATTACH PROTECTION COVER ON FRONT.
4.LETTER TYPE-FACE .M.S.GOTHIC ROUND BOLD.

1HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CD.,LTD. I L-295-0A-025

 IJARNING PLATE LAYOUT MANUAL
IN CAGE : ENGLISH L-295-1BOOl
ASS'Y DIJG.

200
200

190
ft -f
T..--- ----,:f NO SMOKING
OPERATION PROCEDURE
I. PUSH YlIlR DECK BUTTON. THE CAR DOOR WILL BE CLOSED
1 fllErTE TO KOYMIlII'lA TO KATAI-TPOMA TlPOOPIIMOY [AI.. H
ArTER FEW SECOOS AND THE LIFT WILL RUN lO YlIlR nOPTA TOY 0AflAMOY 0A KflElrEI AYTOMATA KAI 0
SELECTED DECK. THE CAR DOOR WILL BE OPENED ANEI\KYITHPAl: E'lA LTAMATH!EI HO Enl0YMHTO KATArTPOMA,

I~
AUTOMATICALLY. H nOPTA TOY 0AflAMOY 0A ANClFEI AYTOMATA
2. Illl NOT TRY lO OPEN THE DOOR DURING THE RIDE. 2 DTAN 0 ANEAKVHHPAr KINElTAl MHN flPOtflAOHI:ETE NA
BLANK FOIl RELEVANT LANGUAGE
ANO!~ETE THN no PTA
3. WHEN THE LIFT RUNS AIINOIlMALLY OIl YOU ARE LOCKED IN
THE CAR. OPERATE THE INTEIlPHIH: AND PRESS THE ALARM
BUTTON ON THE CAR OPERATING PANEL.
3 EAN 0 ANEAKY!"THPAl: rTAMATHrEI ::A¢NIKA florn 6lAKomn:
PEYMATOr l i KAnalAr ANOMAlIiAI. XPHLtMon01HlTE TO
EHHEPIKQ TH/\EC1l0NO KAI flATHrTE TO KOYMni .ALARM ~ ITON ~
I
ntNAKA XE1PI[MOY
4. IT IS NlIIlMALLY SAFER lO REMAIN IN THE CAR 4 rYNH00r EINAI Ar~AAEI:TEPO NA nAPAME1NETE ENTor TOY
AND WAIT FOIl HELP THAN lO ESCAPE BY YOURSELF. ANEAKynHPA KAI NA nEPfMENETE rIA BOHeEIA nAPA NA
r1POH1A0HaTE NA [),IA¢lvrETE,
S. THIS LIFT IS NOT AIR-TIGHT. o ANEAKYHHPAr AEN EIN,lId AEPOHErH£
6. lO ESCAPE. FOLLOW THE 'HOW lO ESCAPE IN AN riA NA l.\IA¢lYr"(:lE AKOJ\OY0HlT£;; lH "IHAbIKA:::IA bIAt1lYrHI>,
EMERGENCY'.
b.IAldKALIA bIA¢lVI"Hr.
HO~ TO ESCAPE IN AN EMERGENCY
I. BREAK THE COVER GLASS or KEY BOX AND TAKE THE KEY. rnArTE TO TlAMI TOV KOYTlOY KAI nAPETE TO KAEllll
SHOP NOTE
.::E::K/\!:,:IAOL IE: ! HN I::::OL\O lHAQ>YI HL r OV 0AI'IAt.'OY KA! DGHL I E:
2. lJN..OCK THE CAR ESCAPE HATCH AND PUSH IT lO OPEN. THN npor TA EnANO riA NA ANOI;'EI I.-ALL LETTERS' COLOR :BLACK
fl,IA$VrETE: Ano THN E "i;060 HHN OPO$H TOV 0AAAMOY
3. ESCAPE THROUGH THE CAR ESCAPE HATCH lO THE CAR TOP. MHN KAEI!:ETE THN [:06.0 t:.IA<llYrHL ENEPronOHIHE TO
-EDGE LINE'S COLOR ,BLACK
= 4. 00 NOT CLOSE THE CAR ESCAPE HATCH. ACTIVATE THE 6lAKOnTH AKINHTOnOIHrHI TOY 0AAAMOY nay BPI1KETE HHN
- BACK GROUND COLOR MHITE
.....
M '"=
M EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH ON THE CAR ROOF.
5
OPOrbH
IH·'OH1A0H[TE NA AI"IOMAKPYN0EITE ArlO THN rlI'lHlIE[TEPH 2.CHARACTER HEIGHT '5.0MM<TITLE '7.0MM)
S. TRY lO EVACUATE THROUGH THE NEAREST LANDING IlllOll AS rlOPTA A$looHI AKOAOvE) ONTAr. Tlr OaHrlE r. nov BPI!KONT AI
INSTRUCTED ON THE SIGNBOARD FITTED ON THE LANDING OYPOKOAAHMENEr I-THN rWPTA. EAN EINAr rHO BOI\IKO 3.CHARACTER IJIDTH 12.4MM<TITLE :3.4MM)
DOOR OIl IF MOllE CONVENIENT. CLIMB lO THE TRUNK lOP ANArP1XH0EITE lTO 4lPEATlO TOY ANEAKVnHrA
BY USING THE TIlUNK LADDER. THEN OPEN THE TRUNK XPHr.iMonOIONTAr TH EKAI\A. ¢JTANONTAr HHN KOPY4lH 4.CHARACTER DIST ANCE,LOMM.
ESCAPE HATCH AND ESCAPE. ANOI::,"fE TI-lN E"i;Oll.O TOY <1}PEATIQY KAI AnOMAKPVN0EITE
5.IJORD DISTANCE :3.4MM.
ESCAPE ROUTINE ESCAPE ROUTINE 6.MATERIAL , SUS

lIELOCAnON 'IN CAR

D\JNER NOTE
1. LET US KNOW THE EXACT SENTENCE OF
TRANCLATED LANGUAGE.
2. THE TRANCLATED LANGUAGE SHALL BE CLEANLY
TYPED AND BE SENT US BY MAIL.

1HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.•LTD. L-295-IBOOI

 NAME PLATE LAYOUT MANUAL
GPD316 L-295-1A030
REV.:

4-'i'>3.S HDL ES

ELEV, NO, : GPD316 ARTICLE 25 ITEM 8, ARTICLE 31 ITEM 2

RATED LOAD: KG, CAR \JT,: KG
1. ALL LETTER COLOR IBLACK
RATED SPEED : M/MIN
BACK GROUND COLOR :IJHITE
DIA, x NO. OF ROPE : HH x R
2.LETTER TYPE-FACE :M,S.GOTHIC ROUND BOLD.
BRKG, STR, : KG/ROPE
MFG, DATE: -LOCATION : ON THE CAGE TOP

~ HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,L TD. MADE IN KOREA ~

- -100- -1 4-'i'>3.S HOLES

I I ROPE GPD316 ARTICLE 31 ITEM 3

ELEV, NO, :
1. ALL LETTER COLOR :BLACK
TYPE: 8xS(19)
BACK GROUND COLOR :IJHITE
DIA, x NO. OF ROPE : HH x R 2.LETTER TYPE -FACE IM.S.GOTHIC ROUND BOLD.
BRKG, STR. : /ROPE
INSTL, DATE : ILOCAnON I TERMINAnON OF IJIRE ROPE (MAIN ROPE &e GOVERNOR ROPE>

~ HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,LTD, MADE IN KOREA ~

~1_ _--11 100

!![(IIIi!.IIlftOIEj('I') 01 XI_e
!![(IIIi!.I"OIEl'1'~t1Algj~~ Xltll!l. ~2.!1101l!lAI!£e ~£ ';,! "!!1I~ I1&LICI.
HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO. LTD. THIS DRAWING IS A PROPERTY OF HYUNOAI ELEVATOR CO. LTD. REPRODUCTION IN PART OR IN WHOLE OF THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE DONE ONLY UNDER THE PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HYUNDAI ELEVATOR co. LTD.
I L-29S-1A030
 III
DET NORSKE VERITAS
TYPE ApPROVAL CERTIFICATE
CERTIFICATE NO. 8-4258
This Certificate consists of 3 pages

This is to certifY that the

Lift Component
with type designation(s)
Personnel Lift Overspeed Governor Type DG 160
Manufactured by
Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd.
lchon City, Kyoungki-Do, Korea, Republic of
is found to comply with
DNV's "Rules for Certification of Lifts in Ships, Mobile Offshore Units and Offshore
Installations".

Application
Generally applicable to personnel lifts with rated speed up to 0.5 mls and 1.0 mls. For
details see page 2.

Place and date This Certificate is valid until

Hovik, 2005-01-05 2008-12-31
for DET NORSKE VERITAS AS

JJ 1l o
J!jJ ~
Egil Alling Local Office Anders Fodstad
:0\ Head ofSection DNV Seoul Surveyor

Notice: This Certificate is subject to terms and conditions overleaf. Any significant cbange in design or construction may render this Certificate invalid.
The validity dale relates to the Type Approval Certificate and not to the approval of equipment/systems installed.
tf any person sulfom loss or damage which is proved 10 l'IIIve b&efI coused by llfly ~liQenlllet or omissiofl of oet N<lor.5U Verus. Itlen DIll Norsl<$ Ventas $1\811 PIIY compensation 10 SUdl pef5Ol1lor his proyed ~ loss or damage.
However. 1M ~ shall not lI:lII:>I:NId an amounl equal 10 tllf1limes the fee charged for the service In question, prcMded lh8l the mWTun compensation Shall nfMM'lIl11':1'HKl USC 2 milMon.ln lIli$ pn.wision"Oel NorsU Vefilas" shall
mean lh8 F()UIl(lIltion Oat ~ VIlrilas IllI well as allts suDiSia18ries. dlred<n. ~ . em and a other on llflhllll lit Del Norska Veritas.

DETNoRSKE VERITAS AS VERITASVEIEN 1, 1322 H0V1K. NORWAY TEL: (+47) 67 57 99 00 FAX: (+47) 67 57 99 11

Form No.: 20.90a Issue: January 98 Page 1 of 3

•
 Cert. No.: S-4258
File No.: 686.25

Product description

Personnel Lift Overspeed Governor Type DG 160.

Application/Limitation

1. The units are understood built in accordance with the following drawings:
Il5A003 Rev. PI and its subdrawings

2. The electrical safety contact according to drawing 1158007 is understood to comply

with the Rules 14.1.2.2.

3. The force to engage"the safety gear is limited to 725 N.

4. The activating speed setting is to comply with the following restrictions (ref. Rules
9.9.1.):
Tripping of the overspeed governor shall occur at a speed at least equal to 115% of
the rated speed and less than:

a. 0.8 mls for instantaneous safety gear except for the captive roller type

b. 1 mls for safety gears of the captive roller type

c. 1.5 mls for instantaneous safety gear with buffered effect (or progressive
safety gear used for rated speeds less or equal to 1.0 mls).

For use on counterweights with instantaneous safety gears the max. allowable service speed
is I mls and the activating speed will have to be suited to the choice of safety gear on the
car and its governor's adjustment.

Type Approval documentation

The following drawings were stamped 2005-01-05:

Drawing No. Rev. Title Status
l25CI01 AI Switch assy For Inf.
115A003 PI Governor ass'y Type Approved
1158007 1/2 GI Switch assy For Inf.
11580072/2 CI Switch assy For Inf.

Tests carried out

At Hyundai Elevator's Test Laboratory.

Date: 1992-02-25. Ref. Report HYL-0225.

DET NORSKE VERITAS AS VERITASVEIEN 1. 1322 H0VIK. NORWAV TEl: (+47) 67 57 99 00 FAX: (+47) 67 57 9911

Fonn No.: 20.90a Issue: January 98 Page 2 of 3

 Cert. No.: S-4258
File No.: 686.25

Marking of product

Each unit is to be tested, marked and sealed for the specified activating speed.
Product certificate to be issued for each unit. Testing at installation and in service to be
carried out according to above Rules.

Certificate retention survey

For retention of the Type Approval, Det Norske Veritas' representative shall carry out
biennal Product Audits if regular certification no longer takes place.

END OF CERTIFICATE

DET NORSKE VERlTAS AS VERITASVEIEN 1, 1322 H0VIK, NORWAY TEL (+47) 67 57 99 00 FAX: (+47) 67 57 99 11

Form No.: 20.90a Issue: January 98 Page 3 of 3

•
 ,.
DETNoRSKE VERITAS
TYPE ApPROVAL CERTIFICATE
CERTIFICATE NO. S-4257
This Certificate consists 00 pages

This is to certify that the

Lift Component
with type designation(s)
Personnel Lift Progressive Type Safety Gear, Mark.GSB 220
Manufactured by
Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd.
Ichon City, Kyoungki-Do, Korea, Republic of
is found to comply with
DNV's "Rules for Certification of Lifts in Ships, Mobile Offshore Units and Offshore
Installations".

Application
Generally applicable to personnel lifts with rated speed up to 1.5 mls.

Place and date This Certificate is valid until

fWvik, 2005-01-05 2008-12-31
or DETN9.RSKE l:!J:.RlTAS AS

/,~& It J~
Egil Alling Local Office Anders Fodstad
Q ,- Head ofSection DNV Seoul Surveyor

Notice: This Certificate is subject to terms and conditions ovuleaf. Any significant change in design or construction may render this Certificate invalid.
The validity date relates (0 the Type Approval Certificate and DOt to the approval of equipment/systems installed.
If .-.y pel50n sutleno IOS.I Of o.mIiQe wnictlis prQ¥«IlO _
~. lIlll ~ sIlai nat ~.., _
lIMon causell Ily "'Y ~ -= Of <:mISSion 01 0lII. Norske Ventas. l/'letI Del Norske v.us SIIaIl llWf ~ 10 5UCtI person for ms pl'll"tId dIrec:l lOSS or ~'
eqo.-110 tIM limes Ihe lee c:Nfgecl1or the ileI"IQ in QUeSllon. ~ thee tile m & O T U n ~stIeI _ _ eJIDNd usc 2 mAon.ln lIa pnM:5Ion -e.t NclrsU VefUs" SI*I
rr-. 1IW Foundlilion Oet Nonb Ventas as ..... lIS .. Its ~. dftclors. otllcers, tnd tither 011 bell. . ot Clef Norske V - .

DETNORSKE VERITAS AS VERrTASVEIEN 1, 1322 HllNIK. NORWAY TEL: (+47) 67 57 99 00 FAX: (+47) 67 57 99 11

Form No.: 20.90a Issue: January 98 Page 1 of3

•
 Cert. No.: S-4257
File No.: 686.25

Product description

Personnel Lift Progressive Type Safety Gear, Mark GSB 220.

AppiicationlLimitation

I. The connection of the unit to the safety frame is to be carried out in accordance with
the following drawings:
125A013 Rev. V3 Safety Assy
Mounting of Safety Frame & Cage Support Frame dated 92-06-26.

2. The electrical device for checking the activation of the safety gear is to comply with
the Rules 14.1.2:2.

3. The operational limits are as follows:

3.1. To be used on guide rails of 16 mm thickness and 16 mm gripping width of

machined surface, lubricated with the applicant's recommended oil

3.2. To be used for service speed up to 1.5 mls conforming to an activated speed
of max. 2.04 mls.

3.3. With 4.0 deg. gib, type H03, ref. drawing 125C057 and -060, max./resp.
min. total permissible static weight is 1470 kgll270 kg.

3.4. Clearance between gibs and guide rail is fixed to 3.5 mm.

3.5. With 4.3 deg. gib and jaw guide, type H02, ref. drawing 125C057 and -060,
max./resp. min. total permissible static weight is 2105 kg / 1820 kg.
Clearance between gibs and guide rail is fixed to 3.0 mm.

3.6. The force to engage the safety gear is measured to 250 N.

Type Approval documentation

The following drawings were stamped 2005-01-05:

Drawing No. Rev. Title Status
125A013 V3 Safety assy Forlnf.
125B039 C2 Jawassy For Inf.
125C055 CI Jaw frame Type Approved
125C056 BI V-spring Type Approved
125C057 BI Jaw guide Type Approved
125C058 BI Roller cage Type Approved
125C059 B1 Gib guide Type Approved

OET NORSKE VERITAS AS VERITA$VEIEN 1. 1322 H0V1K. NORWAV TEL: (+47) 67 57 99 00 FAX: (+47) 67 57 99 11

Form No.: 20.90a Issue: January 98 Page 2 of3

 Cert. No.: S-4257
File No.: 686.25

Drawing Nn. Rev. Title Status

125C060 BI Gib Type Approved
1250064 CI Top plate' Type Approved
1250066 A Side plate Type Approved
1250067 BI Bottom plate Type Approved

Tests carried out

At Korea Institute of Machinery & Metals (KIMM). Date: 1988-12-06, ref. Report IS-0054,
and at Helco's Test Laboratory. Date 1992-06-23.

Marking of product

Each unit is to be marked for identification with rating and type. Product certificate to be
issued for each unit. Testing at installation and in service to be carried out according to the
above Rules.

Certificate retention survey

For retention of the Type Approval, Det Norske Veritas' representative shall carry out
biennal Product Audits if regular certification no longer takes place.

END OF CERTIFICATE

OET NORSKE VERITAS AS VERrrASVEIEN '. 1322 H0VIK. NORWAY TEL: (+47) 67 57 99 00 FAX: (+47) 67 57 99 11

Form No.: 20.90a Issue: January 98 Page 3 of 3

 m
DETNORSKE VERITAS -
TYPE AFPROVAL CERTIFICATE
CERTIHCATE NO. 5-3260
This Cenificalt consists of3 pages

This is 10 certify lholl~

Lift Component
wilh ty~ dtsignaJ.l()I'I(s)
Personnel Lift Instantaneous Type Safety Gear, Mark ISC 200
Mwmjaclured by
Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd.
Ichon City, Kyoungki-Oo, Korea, Republic of
Is found 10 comply .,.,ilh
DNVs "Rules for Cen.ifiulion of Lifts in Ships., Mobile Offshote Units and Offshore
InsuJlations".

Applioolion
Ge~rall)' applicable 10 personncllifls of maximum "''t:ight 1012 kg using guide mlEK
(raillhiekness 10 mm and gripping width 18.5 mm) and a maximum weight 2000 kg using
guide rail 13K (rail thickness 16 mm and gripping width 22 nun).

n.u~ u\Glid.-.,J
2003-12-31

Egil Alling Anders Fodstad

Head o/Seclion Surveyor

. , - " fib c b ,u';", _ T. Aft' ~rnlfk_ < 10 HoI '_100 , , C.rtI ".I .....

on Souu vurr"" AS 1lE0IIT_... '. , _ . - . """""._

_ No.20__ ...... -,$11
 em No
File No

ProdUCI dUCliplion

Personnel LiftlMtanlalleous Type Saofefy Gnr, r.b.rk ISC 200

Appliutlon!LimilDlion

Type Mark lSC 200, Personnel Lift In!;lantMle()U5 Type Safety Gear.

Generally applieable 10 per:sonnellilb of maximum weighl 1072 kg using guide ral18K

(raillhicknesJ 10 mm and gripping ","dlh 185 nun) and a maximum weighl2000 kg wing
guide rail ilK (rail thickness 16 nun and gripping widlb 22 nun) For lift ~ up 10 a mel!
5peed of 0.63 mil and for countc:rweighll up to 1.0 mil.

The unil5 are understood buill and connected 10 the safety frame in KGOrd:utee with the
drawing: 125/\015 Rev GI Safely Any, and lhe detailed drawings mentioned on that
drawing.
The material in the safety j.lw is to be tC$lw and comply with min. 271 at 5 °C in lbe
Charpy V-llOIeh test procedure.

2 The e~rieal devioe for checking IIIe acti'"1Uion of tile IlIfefy ~ is 10 oompJy with the
Rules 14 I 2 2.

3 The operalional lim;ts are as follows'

3.1 To be used on guide rails machined surfaces, lubricated witll tile applicant's
recommended oil.
3 2 Clearance belween fixed pan of safety jaw and guide rail is fixed 10 1.0 mm.
3.3 Ifcalch.ing occurs, the lift is lIO! 10 be put in opemion before tile safely gan re
found to be in order after a dose examination by a oompelenl penon.
3 4 The force to engage lhe safety gear il measureU 10 400 N.

Type App~nl dO(um~nlation

Dr.win!: No. Rey. Tille

125AOl5 GI Safelyan'y For Inf.
1258047 C3 Frame Approved
12S8048 BI ~felY,Pw Appro~
1250017 C2 Krorled roller Appro"'"
HXIDSI AI Name plale Forlnf
Tesl report results For Inf

,...... (.•1)(7"."

I
Orr NouKf: V,arrAS AS -.uIlT.uYl1Ul '.• m ICIVI<. ,,,,,.,,.,,,y
, ..... ""_ :lD.lIDo ....... J.""•.,.. ,,_2..·
 C=No. S-J""
File No 686.25

Tests CJ~ritd oul

AI H)'Unclai Ele\'IIOf Co LId Date: 200106 OS

Marking of produ~l

Each unit iSlo be marked for identification with rating and type. Produa certificate to be
is,",ed for earn unil. Tesling II installation and in service to be carried Out aeooroing 10
above Rules.

Certificate retention survey

for retention oflhe Type Approval. Del Norske Veritas' repre$enuti\'c sllall carry oul
bitnnal Product Auditll if regula.- certification no longer lalc6 place.

EJl.'DOF CERTIFICATE

DuNouu;Vun 1<S "''''''_IEN' ""''''''-' NOIIN'iAT ,....,••»...,."

f ..... No...llI.900 ~1Ill "5of)
 ~
IE
DETNORSKE VERITAS
TYPE ApPROVAL CERTIFICATE
CF:RTIFICATE NO. 1<'·17199
This Certificate consists of2 pages

This is /0 cerlifY Iha/lhe

Class A Door
wilh Iype dcsignalian(s)
"SM-A60-3C.EV"
Manufactured by
Sung Mi Co., Ltd.
Kyungnam 621-840, Korea, Republic of
i.lfound 10 comply willi
Oct Norske Veritas' Rules for Classification of Ships and Mobile Offshore Units
DCI Norskc Veri la<;' Interpretation of SOLAS 1974 Convention as Amended

Application
Approved for use as an integrated part of fire retarding divisions of class A-60.
Maximwn size of clear opening: \000 nUll x 2050 mm (W x H)

~°i~
< ~

Place Gnd dale

&; This Certificate is vahd wlli!
"'13H'"
HflVik,2003-03-04

IL
2 7
.
for DEc;0RSK~VER[T~ AS
/. X~r1\h .
Kristin Urdahl weal Office Rolf t:milsen
HecdojSa/ion DNV Pusan ACEA Surveyor
./

-_ __
.. .....
_.. ,-""-, ,-~--,'~-_
~._

DIT NOIlSKE VERIT "-~ AS

..... _ _----_
~."'" TlH. c,,,<ro,,,, ;, I"hi'" 10 ,"....',. <o.di,~, o>,rl.,r, Aoy 'o:oir,,,", ,b ..., i••""," ., , ••",."ioo
u._.""___""_.. . .... _,-""',. __.........__.
............
, . , . _ - . .... _ _ • ......, ..... _<-.N .. _ _
...,,--_-. .........
~_.""--
....
~_...
"'J ".d" ,.i. c".. r."" tili<-
Y''''''' '0".11«1.
Th, ..lidi'r dot, "",'" ,. ,)" Tn" A.........' C".,"'." ,od 00' '0 to. .pp,o>,.1 .r .Q.ip"',.....

--
Tn: 1'''1 or " .. 0(1
_--""" ~

F,OJ(, (-'7) 0' " .. "

F_ "0, 2090. '''''''- J.oo,'Y 9<l P.go I 012
 Ccrt_ No.: 1'-17199
FileNo,: 471.13

Product dcscriptinn

"SM-A60-3C.EV"
is composed of single lcaf hinged door, with doorlcaf composed of 1.2 mm steel sheets and
insolated with mineral wool "I-li-wool" with density 280 kg/m'. The door may be flued
with window made of38 mm Contraflam N2 fire resistance glass (Manufacturer Vetrotech
Saint-Gobain, Germany),
Maximum siu offire tcclmical glazing unit: 350mm X 500mm (W X H).
The door frame is fitted with a gas tight packing (fiber glass) 3mm x 15 mm.
The door is fined with four hinges.
TOI,~lthickncss of door is 60 1Tllll.

Type Apprnval dneumefltatiofl

Certification in accordance with Certification Note No. 1.2, Type Approval, December 1996.

Test report No. 20021350 d3led 26 December 2002 from Fire Insurers Laboratories of
Korea.

Tested according to lMO FlPC Part 3 (lMO Res. A.754 (18»).

Marking (If product

The product is to be marked with name of manufacturer, type designation and fire-technical
rating.

Certificate retention survC)"

Del Norskc Veritas' slllveyor is to be given permission to perform Certification Retention

Surveys at any time during the validity period of this certificate_ The arrangement is to be in
accordance with procedure described in item 4.3, Certification Note No. 1.2.

END OF CERTIFICATE

DOT NO".SKE VERrTAS AS TEL, 1"".7 57 .. "" fM'('")61~'''''

F,,", ""._10 9<). '$$'.: Jan",'Y 9~ Page 2 ~f:.l
 Dale Issued: O8IMAY/2Ol)l
Certil5cate Number. 01.eK55961·X

"(:" . -.. ""ABS

'
'-'
'

Til''' APPROVAL PROGRA\\

Certificate of Type Approval (RQS)

This is to certify that SUNG MI CO., LTD.
has met the requirements of ABS Product Type Approval for
Fire Protection Doors
Model Name(s): SM-A-60-3C.EV... SM-B1S-3.AG, SM-B1S·3.BG &
SM-Bb-1.oG

P.....nled 10:

SUNG MI co.. l TO
1260. Naesam-U, Jood;...'"Illl~"''''''
.
~

'''''''~
"""'
Intended Servke:
For use on Ships and Otfsllore l~staliaHons

oes~rlptlon:
A-60 Class Fire Siogltl Door SM·A-60-JC.EV. 8·15 Class Fife Single Door: SM·Bl5-J.AG. 8·15 Class Fire
Single Door SM·815-3.8G & 8·15 Class Fore Oouble Door: SM-815-1.OO

!tilings;
,4,-60 & 8-15 CLass 0Ms00n

Con."eMS;
o.x approval is basad on that the aI>ovt! maler>ats have been tested and oertified by Fire 'nsurel'5labCJralOries
of Korea(FllK).

Notes I Do~um"ntatlon;

•
Term 01 Valid;ly:
n.s producIIrnocIeI is c:overed under ProdJct Design Asses$m&rll (POA) Cerlillcate , 03-8K318878-POA. daled
23/Jun0'2003. ThIs POA. e.rti6cate expires Jun of 2008. It .... remain valid for Ihe 5 yean; fn:Im datil 01 i$Sue Of
untillhe Ruleit or sped,..."I......S used in Ihe "" "'!l,llllll revised ("loicJ ..._ oc:o.n lint).

"as R....s:
National $t.srKUords:

International Stlondards:
IMO Resolullon A. 75olo(18)in~ wilh SOlAS 197•. as lIO' .... oded

Govltmment ..... thOflty:

EUMED:

Manage<, ASS Program.

AIlS ""s......, <1<>0

"'.""t._
~ Tho
....
_go
_Ie
Iho
~ In Iho _ l i o n "' ....

rnan<J'lao:lln<'& ~ .........,..... _
01 Or_ _ PrOO.lctI __
<:8<li_. _ '..._
~

-1onlI-'"
Iho
was.n-. T_ _.. ~ s Dtaw!tIg A&Hs...-l " ' - Tosq and
1n1Otm_ on Iho . . - " It.- AllS _
..... «>ntr<Jl..-...--o, U'nilecI <irwrnt_ may oIIow <riy
""'5 RIolo, 10 _ It'"I'
···.woo.
""*"\'PO 1"*'V 10
'" Iho
_I)'
.. '"

1_
A,BS
_manurocanr.lO ......... _ _ .....'..· ... """" ..
_~IO_ ... _ . . . . , . _ _ ..
F""'*'............ t "cal> -....,1n ... """""'*"'ol .....
P'O<loCl. T ""..........,;ty_ ... •,••
G i 01' .",
...-..y ~ ~ _ .... ~b'_IOIIO_... _ MOllU"'IaciIiIy_IOIIOA8S ....... " ' _ •
.,.....,. .. _ ... A8S, 00_ .. ~ ... .-ry 01 AllS RuIN "' _ lOt _ _,..... ""*'II '" 01 _
_ ........... "' .. _ .... _ '''bAllS

-""',-_............ _-
 'A, -~

"T.1~J.l\cl
.-.~l~~_"V ,
• !!AU UND BETRlEB

AN 5~14

Notified body; TOV ell!>- una e,,~r,ilbSlectlni~GmbH

Umenl"hmonS>lrupp" TOV Sli<Jd~,kichI3na
i Ze"ift2loru~{Jsslelle IlIr Aufzuoo una Sicnemcit,bavle;lc
WeSlends(ra'>c 199, 1)-80656 Muncne~
(l<ennnummer 0635)

APl'licanli
•• K.A. Sdlmersal GmbH &. Co,
Certificare hol~r: M6ddiI\Oslmf~ 30
0-42279 Wvppertal

Dam of submission'

KA Sctlmersnl GmbH &. Co.

MOd~lngsnolc 30
D-42.27~ Wuppllrtal

Product, type: Loclo:ina device wr.n boll type lockJ,'ll ekment ana me3~~ LI"""J 10
prove the poslll()~ Of II ioc)<inll element with posrtive operation I<ll
dirn(;( IOc~rtO action of 5;ngle-wi(l\l~d hinged I..ndj"ll doors.
TypeAV15

TO\! Bel>- und 8otri~bil~chnik GmbH

Z"ntrnlnbt,!iI,~ng A,l1fzUo;e ur'ld Slctlcme,l5b6ul"ile
Gottlieb-Daimler_Slr, 7. D-70794 Filde";!.,,,JI

o.nr, and \W8-07·01

nurn t>er of test report: AN 5914

95116JEC

The 5;JfelY oo"lPQnant ":)nlOr.'T1S lQ Ih" directive·" sefety require-

menl:;' lor (he respective scope of 3pphc.:ltlon st.lJ\co <:In pa~e 1 01
the Hnnex 10 \his EC w~e-"~"mir,,rtiOfl cer1if,ca:e,

C<><"tificatc date: 1898-07·01

z".-ufl velU" g s"t e lie

(ur AUlzug& lJnd Sicnefne<tsba1J1elle
"'", ,
'~'I---- . . .... "'
)Ii ~.,
"'''''.
I ~': . • O'U
~ct;r +km~;- "G~'"

="".
IW .....,).""' • .",u.."lID"'~ M' ._~ ,"""v _ _

_~""'"_" . t_,
" ..... ~,"" .....""'.""'~~......,... >1m""'" _
Co.......
.. ~"'"'~.,
110"', ~ ... "fi '1)-/
 . __ .'
. "'.' . --,-"7:'-
,,- ,'- ..
_-_
.
•
..
'

Annex to thc.EC typa-examination certificate No. ATV 5974 of 1998-07-0_1.

• •

1. 8c~p. 01 Appll<;lllion

1I Lod<inl: \leVl(:e wiln tdl. rype Io:><:Nng otcm_ aoc melns u~1<i 10 "rev. 1M po5ll\orl el ~
10Cld1l9 IIlllmeol with posillV" <>pf!r::l!'cn for ~ea lod\i~ aaion of snv1...,.;ngad hongcd
landing doors.lYP" AV 15.

• TI>e lockiI>ll devl::'" may l>B uUd for

diU~n:m1 landing d.....,; liS nlllTlel! in l.1 of :h,S amex. II
lor Ill,s dsellc end fOI potenUaJ exi51u'll additional parts. wiridl are lnvOIVl!'ll In lne Ioct.i~g
1Ie1IM anc supervjSoon Qf lhc ~naln~ coo~. I separate =C-ty........ J<~mirull"'" CIl'rt,!ic3IC
r oocord'illlilio ~c UI'\ dlmctive fl5I161EC exists.
t. '
Nominlll values of Um electric safety <lavloes (kid<. conrad):

Allomll1lng current 230 V. 2 A.

Dlrec: cUl11!m 200V.2A

••
Tl1e 10<:1<1011 device nas 10 en\llllle 0""",11 M loasl 16 mm lor ~t least 13 mm at 1M munwnt 01
" connadion 01 the /!Ieetric salety device ot 1M IOek,nll dev,,,,,) inlo or benNul Ihe pntl wt~ch i~
,n be locke" In order to g'''..... nl.... til .. ~o~;tiv" o!!,,"'lion or thQ moon. u.~d lO ~rov, tho
poSlllon of \Ile lockino element.

TI1~ ;IPP11'v~1 9",winll -"q::. !>OO~2. edHlon E, page 1 to 4 :In<! lhe instl\ld:lOn~ am
" me:a3u~.nls have to be obseNc<L

FOr l/'l. ~ '~I>~;';" ~~e~

• ~ofdesi<.ln
lJlumb~ng poslllons
•
•
drnct!.. for opernli<>n
ad<:frtlQnal conIroi !iWilches (!>WItches for further rundlons)
•

, . llUIn rnemioned In Ule 3ppn>Vi'l dt:nw>g rr.tI$l not be used

The doSIflQ pasitJon of the Iand[r'!l door has 10 oe ~ ... peMsed bl' a seoarate eleetrtc Ulli,
dew:e {door swfldl} The EC-~mi<1:Uiondoes n~ ~.dude Ule us: or ll'US elec::.r,c soorl!ly
cevlCOl.

,.
For i<ientifie-tion and lnfcrm;rtlon about the prind~1 ~Mtruc'.ior.. ,h~ approval O!?o"l'lng ~z
50052, IldHlon E. pa~e 1 to 4 wftl1 sump of lS9~-{li-{ll h:ls lo;,e e:\close::l to \he EC-l.yps--
e~mil'lllliQn ccnificale AlV 59/4 and ns annex.

'.2 At the lod<Ing device a si9n with paRiCllI mrs lor klenliroC3~cn 01 the ~mponlllli. canlolnlO9 lhe
name of the manufacturer. me sJlln Of the E.C.lypo·c"",mlnation and ~~e ty.... speelficatlcn
must be allachlld.

TIm EC-typfl-examlnatlon cer:IJlc:m moy only be IIscd In connection with the perllnem annex.

• IJ)-Z.

1991l-Q7_01 I BW·FASI"'lv~S 40_""1\.';<><:

_=. _."
, ~...::i'if_ ._ .. -_ 0 r; •.
--.,,_.
~.j,.~' .

"
EWG-KonformitatserkJarung
EC-beClara~/on of Conformity
,.
•
1m SiMc _ E Q - ~;Y161EG;Mh~.
~ 11111>0 £C-U-"""":r<e is/'61 E!OC; - . .

--
I, •

.._ _"" .... dIll-........ ~_ 0<: ...."%feV'rl... Soc_~'" wfI;..... Il c. ~;,:ny l.O\C Beu.Il'OO< c,c·

_~~~""'_~~c~IOII'e_~Ut:~ .....

K. A. S<nf>OIUl Gt,OH '" eo. ....... "'".:t-..,'9...::.~

~ l' tr2 63. Q-4W2 W ~
- . , . n XI, 0-<22711 WuppoorUl
Toi.
T ..,
-.'Cl202 - 0<1 ,.-C
-«lllO2 _647< '00
I lr._ __ hC~;I .I~4e
e_ _•.,."........... d.

AV 15 f AV I! I AV:O IIIV 2' I AV X5! AV:<e

El"!ochrebo"'9 CIt. SieMft>ol~... ,or:s; ~utt~.-T....... 'ri"9""..-.:l....

De.<<:rlpli<Jn ", lhI .olory C<l "'''''''''"''' E'-'''' 0 _ LocJong o.";"es

E ohI~l;o EG-"""''''''I+I',;
ilol M ce· rJil~O".,...:
""9""""r.<:l. h",monlo,.". No",", EN ~1_1I_2

/fforml>n!ad m.n<:;W!,,'

-,,)v 8M>- ...... B.tn..tIOl.........k Gm~

Un","""""""gnJl'f':" n)v ~.:.dd...r.sc.'Gnd
Z,;... .........." ...l..... It.< .....l<Uo- ...,..; $l<:N<n.. '..,.~~....
Ww.~...o" 199. o-ao6e6 I-\UncI>on
Euocio.1a<:I\ nolil\<OotIO SloI'. . tc.v>-Nt. 06'15
~ """"""" boa)' "'.-""- 1;l6.75

B....,...g~' p,.~" ATV WI.....V 151. ATV 60/. \-'-":z51.

ModcI .... "'~il- t",~ -- -."..no..:- -").TV 7l'o'~ ,""v 2.SI. ATv 76<' IAV ~lI\.
AN ~. (..v 2tIl. ATV S2'9 """V
21)

Rod.",•..,. cknor LontltK:llril\

~afr ~Q :ION""""
--~
(G"':'&lIriL:nr_)
11'.I~ Cire=rl

7)-]
MAIN WIRE ROPE(012rnrn)

626-850 fHt ~~AI ~~'C! ::t~2.l753-1\!:lxl

~J:I- 055-375-2500 ~~ 375-2505 _.kiswlre.com

Customer Test NO,

:c.?t! HYUNDAI ELEVATOR Altl No, 0212E12 702 -92,95,96,99,100,117,121,131
Construction
T~
8 x S(19)+SS 138,159
Length & Quantity
iiOlil TW 1500M x 10RlL
2003/02104
Test Results Altl~:nt
Diameter Tensile Torsion Wrap Test
Rope Spec Actual Hardness
Strength
Wire (mm) (Turn) (Hv) (1d-8Tum)
T~ ;:r~ ~~Ij;1 (N/rmf)
::t~~ ~~~£
1::l1~~ ~£ ?:PI
Grade E d3 Spec 0.79 ±0.02 1320~ 28i 322 - 378 GOOD
~~

Preforming Ratio GOOD GOOD 1 0.790 1332 44 352 GOOD

~!i'-~
Diameter
(mm)
No. Load
.!i!-$a~
12 - 12.6 12.53 2 0.792 1331 42 332 ·
10% Load 12 - 12.36 12.35 3 0.790 1338 48 345 "
£.!!.~ 10%!i'-~f
Length 81! 74.21 4 0.788 1333 45 334 "
2i!~iJOI
Lay(mm)
Direction
2i!QJ~~
O/Z O/Z 5 0.791 1333 46 357 ·
Lubrication
(%)
Core
;:?AI
12 - 17 12.04 6 0.790 1331 45 - ·
£* Strand
..... e3'fc:f
1.5 - 2.0 1.96 7 0.791 1335 43 - ·
Breaking Load (KN)
ol~t;fil:
58.7i 63.4 8 0.789 1336 44 - ·
Unit Weight (kg/m)
c:f~;:?~
0.494 0.509 9 0.792 1335 46 - ·
Material of Core
~f'ml>l
SISAL SISAL d2 Spec 0.46 ±O.02 1620~ 28i - GOOD
Surface Condition GOOD GOOD 1 0.461 1696 44 - GOOD
.I!~AfeH
Modulus of Elasticity
(kg/nll!')
- - 2 0.465 1685 48 - "

~~1l19 3 0.4G3 1688 45 - ·

Elongation
(%)
20% - - 4 0.465 1691 46 - ·
t!~ 100% - - 5 0.460 1686 47 - ·
Charge No. X48988 6 0.463 1689 46 - ·
Chemical CX 100 37.2 7 0.462 1692 45 - ·
Composition Si X 100 17.5 8 0.464 1684 47 - "

(%) Mn X 100 45 9 0.465 1695 46 - "

i:t~~~ P X 1000 16 Others.
S X 1000 6

Chief of Laboratory
GOVERNOR ROPE(09.5mrn)

626-850 ~ Et ~t!-AI ~~ i!! ~~2.I 753-1 ttl AI

~. 055-375·2500 1JI~ 375·2505 www.kiswire.com

Test NO.
HYUNDAI ELEVATOR AI!! No. 0205E9.5 703 - 6,7,9
Construction
T.z 8 x S(19)+SS
Length & Quantity
lIol'i! TEt 1500M x 3R1L
2003/01/16
Test Results AI tl~J!l-
Diameter Tensile Torsion Wrap Test
Rope Spec Actual Hardness
Strength
- (NTnIiT)- .. .(Iurnt
... Wire (-).-- - r (Hv) (td-8Tum)
T~ Tl-24 . -~A-lr~
~~~ ~~Y£
I:iI~EJ i?lSO ;Y7\
Grade E d3 Spec 0.62 ±O.02 1320~ 29i 322 - 378 GOOD
~-lJ
Preforming Ratio GOOD GOOD 1 0.640 1333 51 357 GOOD
O!I'!;!~
Diameter No. Load
~¥"'f
9.5 - 9.98 9.96 2 0.636 1332 48 342 "
(mm)
10% Load 9.6 - 9.88 9.72 3 0.634 1332 45 365 "
£E.~ 10%¥"'f
Length 64.3! 57.9 4 0.640 1339 48 348 "
1i!QJ~OI
Lay(mm)
Direction O/Z O/Z 5 0.634 1337 47 353 "
1i!QJ"}~

Lubrication
(%)
Core
g~
12 - 17 12.4 6 0.637 1337 47 - "

£%
Strand
..... ~~cf
1.5 - 2.0 1.66 7 0.636 1338 49 - "
Breaking Load (KN) 36.7i 42.2 8 0.635 1336 50 - "
OI~"'I~
Unit Weight (kg/m)
C:1!/1g~i
0.311 0.324 9 0.635 1331 46 - "
Material of Core
~~A/I~
SISAL SISAL d2 Spec 0.36 ±0.02 1620~ 28i - GOOD
Surface Condition GOOD GOOD 1 0.367 1750 46 - GOOD
.ll'2V fE H
Modulus of Elasticity
(kg/lll11')
- - 2 0.373 1831 45 - "

~~J.tI9- 3 0:370 1740 45 - "

Elongation
(%)
20% - - 4 0.368 1863 48 - "
t!~ 100% - - 5 0.365 1884 47 - "
Charge No. X34387 6 0.369 1813 50 - "
Chemical CX 100 37.6 7 0.369 1870 47 - "
Composition Si X 100 20.7 8 0.372 1760 48 - "
(%) Mn X 100 47 9 0.371 1770 46 - "
~~~~ P X 1000 14 Others.

S X 1000 7

Chief of Laboratory
 TABLE FOR LUBRICATION OIL & GREASE

Name of Oil Company

Name of Installation Filling
Lub. Q'ty & Time TOTAL EXXON
Machine Place Method FAMM SHELL BP Castro I SK
(ELF) MOBIL
6 liter 3months later Pinnacle Omala EPONA
Super
Gear case of for the first time. Initial Marine 220 Z 220 or Mobil Enersyn Alphasyn
Gear oil Gear EP
Machine After that exchange filling gear or Ultra EPONA SHC 630 HTX 220 HG 220
220
it every 12months 220 Gear 220 SA 220
Machine
MOBILU
Bearing room
X EP2 or Crown
parts of Initial MULTIFA ALVANIA CEI{AN Spheerol
Grease 300g every 1 month Mobil MP-MG2 Grease
Traction filling K EP2 EP(LF)2 WR2 SX2
Grease EP2
Machine
XHP222
Guide rail Filling at
Above Car
(Each installation
& C.W.T
Lubrication) stage
Cage Door
Car & Car Initial
& Safety
Frame filling Tellus VACTRA
Device
Machine 2 liter every Regal R&O 1'68 or Turbine OIL 2 or Perfectto Super
Governor & THB-68
Oil M/C Room 1 month Initial 68 Tonna Oil 1'68 Mobil 1'68 Way 68
Gov.Tension
Pit filling 1'68 DET13M
Sheave
Around
All
Entrance Initial
elevator
DoorOiinge filling
doors.
part)
 ELEVATOR PAGE 1/5
REV

SPARE PARTS LIST

~ I.
-----

I
I
APPUCATCI\I • ~RA[TlDN ~ACHINE ex ·1· HOw TO ORDER • SEND US THE ORDER NO,
DOOR CLJSER HUL'L Nil ex NE~DED Q'TY
~

I I
ITEM
NO,
I OUTLINE SPEC SPARE Q'TY REMARK 1

I #62 1 0 2
I I

I
I 1 I BALL BEARING

1 I

~~r----~-----+----:---
1 2
1~-1 ~iTll
I'
I
BRiOKE SHOE

LlNI'C
{m rilcp'.

I '
, I

I 3 I ~JI!~ SEAI_

I 4

I
1 t

!
 .. -

,
Hi
~

F - '-,-/ , : - -'

- ~ 1 :-'::':-'[1
'"

: j
, ~

-
.T - ~::-r/L:<·./
'jJ ."
'"
~ -,
.,' 1

,1
"

K~
,;
[ ] O~
28 35,5
--:
l:,""'? -

I I I I 1 ...
"

.-

fd3 Gj
~ --
.::',-,.
r'
.. 1<3:,':':

I 32
I

T
-

.trY
" " ..
, .. .-
"

~J [?J
I

~-

I
-- ~ < ~ ~

I 51
I I 41
I
:.1 [ :,: -]

0 0 0
...... ~-.-J

DODD ,.;R

0 0 0

I
I
•I
I
I
-- I

I
I
•I
I
I
-- I
 4/5

- "

- -

is - ~ -

f - -0\ .-
F L'( .•..•
L

~:) ,
~, ~
- =

h
"

0 n

,-

.- ~) " ,
- ~
-

,- D D ;

J
-
-
'(

D
1.

I
__________________________ __ ,",,,-,,-:,
~=" ~': :".':':,/S·'2 ~

78
I I

{» - - ..

70,5

~
• •
~I CJ '"'"
I -..::::U(
148
~

~
,

r T
 ** SCOPE OF SUPPLY LIST **

PAGE 1 OF 3
MAKER YARD
NO DESCRIPTION REMARKS
SUPPLY ERECTION SUPPLY ERECTION
MACHINE ROOM PART
1) TRACTION MACHINE ASS’Y O O INCL. MOTOR. SHEAVE & BRAKE
2) MACHINE BEAM & BASE O O
3) GOVERNOR & TENSION SHEAVE FOR CAGE O O
4) GOVERNOR & TENSION SHEAVE FOR CWT O O
1
5) CONTROL PANEL ASS’Y O O INCL. POWER BOX, MAIN SWITCH

6) ROLLING & PITCHING SWITCH O O

7) GUIDE PULLEY O O
8) SEATS FOR CONTROL PANEL O O INCL. GUIDE BRACKETS
CAT PART
INCL. HANDRAIL, DADDER EMERGENCY DOOR,
1) CAGE ASS’Y (WALL & CEILING ASS’Y) O O
FAN & LIGHTING
2) CAR FRAME WITH SAFETY DEVICE O O INCL. FLOOR & SILL
2
3) GUIDE SHOE & OILER O O INCL. OIL
4) CAR DOOR OPERATION ASS’Y O O INCL. MOTOR & DRIVE ARM
5) CAR DOOR O O INCL. SAFETY SHOE
6) CAR JUNCTION BOX FOR MAINTENANCE O O
COUNTERWEIGHT PART
3 1) C.W.T ASS’Y WITH SAFETY DEVICE O O INCL. WEIGHT
2) GUIDE SHOE & OILER O O INCL. OIL

P
M-1
 PAGE 2 OF 3
MAKER YARD
NO DESCRIPTION REMARKS
SUPPLY ERECTION SUPPLY ERECTION
LANDING DOOR PART
1) LANDING DOOR ASS’Y O O A-0 OR A-60
4
2) INTERLOCK ASS’Y O O
3) DOOR CLOSER O O
SIGNAL FIXTURE PART
1) CAR OPERATION PANEL O O INCL. INDICATOR
5 2) HALL POSITION INDICATOR O O FOR LANDING PART
3) AUTO TELEPHONE, SPEAKER(INTERPHONE) O O
4) ALARM BUZZER O O
TRUNK PART
1) GUIDE RAIL FOR CAR & CWT O O INCL. FISH PLATE, RAIL CLIP, LINER, ETC
2) BRACKET FOR GUIDE RAIL O O
3) BUFFER & SUPPORT FOR CAR & CWT O O
4) TRAVELLING CABLE DUCT O O INCL. BRACKET
5) TRAVELLING CABLE O O
6
6) WIRE ROPE & SHACKLE FOR CAR & CWT O O
7) CABLE FITTING ACCESSARY O O (CABLE TRAY)
8) FINAL LIMIT SWITCH O O INCL. BRACKET & ACCESSARY
9) PROMIXITY SWITCH O O INCL. BRACKET & ACCESSARY
10) PIT SWITCH O O
11) JUNCTION BOXES FOR BRANCH & HATCH O O

P
M-2
 PAGE 3 OF 3
MAKER YARD
NO DESCRIPTION REMARKS
SUPPLY ERECTION SUPPLY ERECTION

OTHER ACCESSARY PART

1) SAPER PARTS O INCL. STORAGE BOX
2) EMERGENCY OPEN KEY O FOR LANDING DOOR
7 3) HAND LAMP ON CAR O O
4) NAME PLATE(SIGNS & NOTICES) O O FOR DOORS, MACHINE ROOM, ETC.
5) PAINT FOR REPAIR OF TOUCH UP O
6) MARINE CABLE INSTALL IN TRUNK & M/C ROOM O O
YARD SUPPLY PART
1) LIFT TRUNK & MACHINE ROOM O O
2) ESCAPE LADDER O O FROM PIT TO TOP OF TRUNK
3) ESCAPE HATCH ON TRUNK O O
4) ENTRANCE DOOR FOR MACHINE ROOM O O
8 5) SUSPENSION EYE IN MACHINE ROOM O O FOR MAINTENANCE & INSTALLATION
6) VENTILATION SYSTEM O O IN LIFT TRUNK & MACHINE ROOM
7) LIGHTING & RECEPATALE O O FOR MACHINE ROOM
8) LIGHTING FOR LIFT TRUNK O O
9) MARINE CABLE FOR EQUIPMENT IN W/H OR ECR O O
10) INSULATION & STIFFENING O O FOR MACHINE ROOM & TRUNK

P
M-3
 INSTRUCTION BOOK
FOR
MARINE ELEVATOR
(ST-VF Marine Elevator)

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS INFORMATION PROPRIETARY TO HYUNDAI

ELEVATOR COMPANY :
IT IS SUBMITTED IN CONFIDENCE AND IS TO BE USED SOLELY FOR THE
PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT IS FURNISHED AND RETURNED UPON REQUEST. THIS
DOCUMENT AND SUCH INFORMATION IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED,
TRANSMITTED, DISCLOSED OR USED OTHERWISE IN WHOLE OR PART
WITHOUT THE WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO. LTD.

2007. 4

(Total 157 Pages with Cover)

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

A. SYSTEM OPERATION

B. FAULT FINDING

C. MAINTENANCE

D. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT(INVERTER)

E. CAR DOOR CONTROLLER (HIDC-400IM)

F. TRACTION MACHINE

G. OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING
A. SYSTEM OPERATION Page

1. OPERATIONAL SEQUENCE ------------------------------------------------- 1-1

2. AUTOMATIC OPERATION ---------------------------------------------------- 1-2

3. EXPLANATION OF MAIN ELECTRIC COMPONENT ------------------ 1-4

4. DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION OF MCPU BOARD --------------------------- 1-10

5. EXPLANATION OF ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM -------------- 1-23

6. MANUAL OPERATION FOR INSPECTION ------------------------------- 1-25

7. HIGH SPEED TEST RUN & ADJUSTMENT ------------------------------ 1-29

8. HOME LANDING FLOOR CHANGING METHOD ----------------------- 1-37

i
 GENERAL LAYOUT OF INSIDE CONTROL PANEL
================================================

1. OPERATIONAL SEQUENCE
Pay attention to the following points well when you peruse the description of electrical circuit.
1) Floors are called ‘1 Floor’, ‘2 Floor’, ․․․․․‘K : Top-2 Floor’, ‘M : Top-1 Floor’, ‘N : Top’ Floor
in turn from the lowermost floor to the uppermost floor.
The ‘N : Top Floor’ shows the number of uppermost stop floor.
2) Sometimes, in the control circuit, intermediate floors are omitted. But, the circuit
constitution is same as that of the floors above or below the intermediate floors.
3) The basic relay operation is described in this manual.
When optional features are required by the customer, additional circuits shall be shown on
the submittal drawings.

1-1
2. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
In describing this feature, the car is assumed to be at standby condition at the second floor
with landing door closed and all the switches on the COL.2 and the relay contacts or switches
before the control circuit potential relay 29 on the COL.3 of the elevator safety circuit are also
assumed to be at normal condition (On). Maintenance switch is assumed to be located at
AUTO (button released) and the Door switch is assumed to be located at "Off". Under
aforementioned conditions, the following relays and magnetic contactor are energized.
․ ABN: Elevator abnormal signal relay
․ ARM: Car alarm button relay
․ BKA, BKB, BRX, BRA, BRB : Traction machine brake operating relay
․ BRT: Brake coil protective time relay
․ CL: Door close relay
․ FAN: Cage fan On/Off relay
․ LM: Lock magnet (Retiring cam) operating relay
․ LRY: Normal and emergency light interlocking relay
․ LT: Cage light On/Off relay
․ MC: Security magnetic contactor
․ MCA: Security relay
․ NUDG: Not used
․ OP: Door open relay
․ P: Motor run relay
․ X: Car re-leveling relay
․ 29: Elevator control circuit potential relay
․ X40, X41: Car door and Landing door switch confirming relay

As the car is at standby condition at the second floor, the second floor position indicator of the
landing indicator panel at each landing door is lit.
Incidentally, as the car door is open and at standby condition, the interlocking mechanism of
the floor is released and a passenger can open the landing door and ride in the car
immediately.
Let's assume that the landing button of the 3rd floor is pushed.
A description is given on the operation hereunder.
1) When the landing up button at the 3rd floor is pushed, button operating circuit of 3UL shall
be made on the COL.09H.
2) Up directional lamp on the indicator panel at each landing door is lit as shown on the
COL.10.
3) Due to operation of relay CL, door close signal shall be engaged to the door
controller(HIDC-400IM Door Inverter) on cage and the door motor shall run to door closing
direction. (COL.08)

1-2
4) If it is 100～150mm before the final end of the door closing stroke, the speed of door is
decelerated by door encoder inside the door motor on cage.
5) When the door is fully closed so that the door close limit contact (DCL) is input, the output
signal for door close is halted and so the door motor is stopped.
6) When the car door is closed, the car door (gate) switch on cage shall be electrically
operated, and the car door confirming relay X40 on the COL.03 shall be energized.
Simultaneously the retiring cam (lock magnet) at front-right (or left) on car top on the
COL.06 shall be shrunk mechanically and the landing door at that floor shall be locked.
7) As the landing doors of all floors are locked, the landing door switch confirming relay X40,
security relay MCA and contactor MC on the COL.04 shall be energized.
8) The machine brake relay BKA, BKB, BRX, BRA, BRB on the COL.04. are energized.
9) Relay P is energized. (COL.5B)
Motor Drive Unit (Inverter) is operated by input commanding (UP, LU, MU, HU) and
electrical power of variable voltage variable frequency (VVVF) shall be engaged to the
traction motor from the Motor Drive Unit (Inverter). And the car runs toward selected floor
with rated speed.
10) The Inverter shall output with the low frequencies voltage to the motor to make it
decelerated for landing to the designated floor. And the car position indicator for that floor
shall be changed.
11) The above low speed shall be maintained until the exact landing signal(so called “Door
zone” signal) is input. The Landing Control Device (LCD) switches of ‘ULA’, ‘ILU’, ‘ILD’,
‘DLA’ on the COL.06 shall be operated and the door zone signal shall be made. And the
output of the inverter shall be stopped.(But in this case, the motor is still held during 1sec.
by inverter zero speed function)
12) The up moving direction lamp shall be stopped, and machine brake coil shall be de-
energized after 1.5 sec by control sequence.
13) The door shall be started to open by energizing of the door open relay (OP). And the car
door starts opening until the door open limit (DOL) contact on the COL.08 is input.
14) When the car is stopped at the designated landing, the door Interlocking Mechanism at
landing door of that floor shall be released due to the releasing operation of the lock
magnet (retiring cam). The landing door interlocking switch of that floor and gate switch on
cage are turned-off, and the car door switch confirming relay X40 on the COL.03 shall be
de-energized. So, a person can ride in car from the landing area.
15) The car shall be stand-by under this condition until next landing call from another floor or
car call is made.

1-3
3. EXPLANATION OF MAIN ELECTRIC COMPONENT
3.1 Control Panel Cabinet
Following electric components were provided in control panel.
․ PC Board: MCPU Board, SIO Board, TCB Board with optional relays
․ Motor Drive Unit: Inverter (HIVD-700GS), Reactor, Braking Resistor
․ Others: Main Switch, MC Contactor, Noise Filter, Circuit Protectors and Fuses, Control
Transformer, Terminal Blocks, Fan, etc.
Note) CTB (Cage Terminal Board) Board is fixed in the Car Junction Box on cage top.

3.2 PC Board Part

1) MCPU (Main Control Processor Unit) Board
MCPU Board is composed of 3 Micro-Processors such as Main Micro-Processor, Position
Control Micro-Processor and Serial Communication Micro-Processor.

Fig. 1.1 Layout of MCPU Board

1-4
 MCPU Board performs the functions as below ;
․ Signal transmission with SIO Board for input/output interface.
․ Serial communication with CTB Board in cage.
․ Serial communication with other car in case of duplex control.
․ Signal transmission with Position Control Micro-Processor for deceleration and
floor information.
․ Signal transmission with Inverter Unit.
․ Control the input signals from diagnostic button and the output signals of
7-segment LED.

2) SIO (Signal Input / Output) Board

SIO Board performs the interfacing function of input/output signals between MCPU Board
and the various input/output signals in the machine room, hoistway and the landing side.

Fig. 1.2 Layout of SIO Board

3) TCB (Terminal Connection Board)

This board is for connection of the harness connectors inputting various signals
as follows.
․Input signals from safety circuits in machine room and hoistway(trunk).
․Input signals from relays related with the brake operating power and safety.
․Input signals from relays related with the fire emergency.
․Input signals from the main power supply.
․Input signals from the car via the traveling cable.
1-5
 Fig. 1.3 Layout of TCB Board

4) CTB (Cage Terminal Board)

This board is mounted in the Car Junction Box. It transmits all input/output signals except
the safety related signals from the car top and COP (Car Operating Panel) to MCPU
Board in the control panel by serial communication method.

Fig. 1.4 Layout of CTB Board

1-6
5) Input / Output Modules

Output Module (Red) Input Module (Yellow) Output Module (Green)

Fig. 1.5 Layout of I/O Modules

3.3 Control Power Transformer Module

This transformer module is composed of 3 output of AC 22V, AC 110V and AC 200/220V.
AC 110V and AC 200/220V are used as the power supplies for car door controller / lock
magnet (AC 220V), elevator safety lines (DC 110V) and machine brake (DC 180V). AC 22V
is used as the power supplies for control signals and relays by converting DC 24V.

Fig. 1.6 Control Transformers

3.4 Motor Drive Unit (Inverter)

For the traction motor drive, HIVD-700GS inverter shall be applied.
For more details, refer to D. Motor Drive Unit (Inverter).

3.5 Car Cage

1) Car Junction Box
a) As the CTB Board is mounted in the Car Junction Box, and the Remote Box for
maintenance with inspection speed is provided at the car top.
b) AUTO / INSPECTION Switch, Emergency Stop Switch, Car Door Open/Close Switch
and Car Door power On/Off switch are in Car Junction Box.

1-7
 Up/Down button under inspection speed and additional Emergency Stop Switch are
provided on the Remote Box.

Fig. 1.7 Layout of Car Junction Box and Remote Box on Cage

3.6 Signal Fixtures

1) Sweeping DOT Car Position Indicator

Fig. 1.8 Layout of DOT Indicator Board

As shown on the following Connection Diagram, the display for the service floor is
determined by the binary code of TL1, TL2, TL3 and TL4.
The display of Up and Down direction in the sweeping state and stopping state is
determined by the input signals of MUP, MDN and DST.
Display data for moving direction and service floor indicating is memorized in PROM (U1).

1-8
 Connection Diagram for HIP Indicator Board

Connection Diagram for OPB Indicator Board

Indicator Specification
․Rated Voltage: DC 24V
․Display Character: Two(2) Letter of all English or Arabic Numbers
(E3, UP, A, B, NB, etc)
․Display Floor: Max. 16 Floors
․Direction Display: Up / Down of Sweeping DOT Indicator
․Floor Input: Binary Digit (TL1, TL2, TL3, TL4)
․Information Display: LED Module (Out of Service, Overload, Arrived, Roll/Pitch)

1-9
 2) Push Button
Button Specification
․ Button: Micro-Push with Stainless Steel Push Plate
․ Rated Voltage: DC 24V
․ Rated Current: 50mA
If push button has malfunction or damaged, take out the faceplate from the indicator box
and remove the screw on the fitting plate of the troubled button.
Replace the button by new one.

4. DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ON MCPU BOARD

There are LED displays (6 digits) on MCPU Board which inform the electrician about the
operational state of elevator and in the error happens, it enables the electrician to handle any
trouble easily during installation and maintenance.
It's also possible to scan the data of the system and set the data by using the key pad.

4.1 Function of LED Display

1) Operational state of elevator is displayed.
2) Operational direction of elevator is displayed.
3) Operational state of landing device is displayed.
4) Floor indication of elevator is displayed.
5) Error code is displayed when any error happens.
6) Information of input/output signals is displayed.
7) Deceleration distance data is scanned and set.

4.2 Mode of Displays on MCPU Board

Display unit, Mode switch and Key Pad part are as shown below.

1-10
 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6
U24 U25 U26 U27 U28 U29

[ STATE ] [ DIR ] [LEVEL] [ FLOOR ] MODE SW.

Operational ON
state
Direction SFT UP DN ENT
Landing Level 1 2 3 4

Car Position DWEL

F / N / Key Pad
Display Part T RCS (Push Button)

《Function for MODE SW. of Dip Switches》

Switch SW1 (DFT) SW2 (W/R) SW3 (ENC) SW4 (L/S)
ON Data Display Data Setting Mode Deceleration Data Setting Mode Long Run
Mode Mode
OFF Default Mode Data Scanning Deceleration Data Scanning Short Run
Mode Mode Mode
Fig. 1.9 Functional Arrangement of Display Part, Mode Switch & Key Pad Part

1) When the operation is normal, typical LED display shall be as follows.

For more details, refer to the Table 1.

LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6

U24 U25 U26 U27 U28 U29

[ STATE ] [ DIR ] [LEVEL] [ FLOOR ]

Operational
state
Direction
Landing Level
Car Position

Display Part

1-11
Table F-1 LED Display under Normal Operation State

Item Display Description

Operational
State AU, SL, Ar, CL, Cd, oP, etc........
(LED1 and LED2) (Automatic Operational Mode)

Direction UP : ∩
(LED3) DN : ∪
( UP ) ( DN )
ULA
Landing Device
DZ
(LED4)
( Door Zone ) DLA

Floor
1,2,3,4,5,----
(LED5 and LED6)
( In Case of 12 Floor)

2) When the error happens, the LED display shall flicker until the error is removed.

Level
Error Display Car Position
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6
U24 U25 U26 U27 U28 U29

Error Rank
Error
Location
a) Error Ranks are classified by 8 kinds and each error rank is described as follows ;
- F1: Operation is impossible. Even when the system is reset, error can not be removed.
- F2: Operation is possible with slow speed operation.
When the system is reset, error can be removed.
- F3: When the car is out of the door zone, the car lands at the nearest floor, and the
display of error code is removed automatically.
When the car is in the door zone, the error is removed automatically.
- F4～F8: It's under automatic operation state and only the error is displayed.
b) Error location is the specific area from where the error is happened.
Error locations are also classified by 8 kinds.
- 1: Switch part of the safety line or a major part of the system (System Error)
- 2: A part related to the position control system (Encoder Error)

1-12
 - 3: A part related to the serial communication and Back-up RAM
(Communication Error)
- 4: A part related to the door operation system (Door Error)
- 5: Motor drive (Inverter) unit (Inverter Error)
- 6: Brake switch part (Machine Brake Error)
- 7: A part related to the switches (Switch Error)
- 8: Duplex communication part (Duplex Error)

c) Error Codes and Causes

Errors are classified according to the given codes of the error rank and error location
and shown at the Table 2.

1-13
Table 2 Error Code Table

ERROR GENERATION PART

COMMUNI DUPLEX
ERROR SYSTEM ENCODER DOOR INVERTER BRAKE SWITCH
-CATION / RMS
LEVEL ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR
ERROR ERROR
1 2 4 5 6 7
3 8
# SAFETY
ERROR
# MC CONT- # X30B # BRAKE DUPLEX
# X40 # ULS/DLS
F1 ACTOR ON - - ERROR ON FAULT COMM.
ERROR ERROR
FAULT (AFTER 2SEC) (2 TIMES) ERROR
# DC24V
FAULT
* FLOOR # INVERTER
ERROR OUTPUT
* BRAKE
# ANTI (IN CASE OF ERROR RMS
* DOL_DCL ON FAULT * PLU/PLD
F2 -STALL : "00") - (AFTER 5SEC) COMM.
_ERROR (AFTER ERROR
ERROR * SERVICE RY1 ◎, ERROR
2 SEC)
FLOOR RY2 ◉,
UN-MATCH RUN ◉
E # INVERTER
* SERIAL
R * ENCODER SETTING
CPU * DCL * LCD RUN-BY
R F3 - CPU ERROR -
ERROR _ERROR ERROR ERROR
ERROR (AFTER 4SEC)
O (8031)
RY2 ◉
R # INVERTER
R * FLOOR
* DUAL RUN ERROR
MEASURE * RELEV- DOOR_NO
A PORT * DOL (AFTER CAR
F4 - -MENT - ELING _OPEN
N RAM _ERROR RUN)
OPERATION ERROR ERROR
K ERROR RY3 ◉,
ERROR
RUN ◎
* CLOSE * DECELE-
* PULSE _FAULT 1 RATION BUTTON
F5 - - - -
ERROR DCL ◎, ERROR JAMMING
40 ◉ (PLU/PLD)
DOOR
* CLOSE
* UL/DL OPEN
* CTB CPU _FAULT 2
F6 - INPUT - - - ERROR
ERROR DCL ◉,
ERROR (15 SEC)
40 ◎
DRERFLG
* CHECK ARG MODE
F7 - - SUM - - - - SAFETY
ERROR DRIVE
F8 - - - - - - - -
Note :
# → Not Operation * Serial Communication Error (1FL Car Button ON/OFF) ⇒ F63 Display
* → Only Manual Operation * CHECK SUM Error (2FL Car Button ON/OFF) ⇒ F73 Display
◉ → OFF * MCPU(8031) Error (3FL Car Button ON/OFF) ⇒ F33 Display
◎ → ON
1-14
4.3 Operation Method of Key Pad on MCPU Board
Referring to the figures shown below, the operation methods of the key pads are explained
at following Table 3.

LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6

U24 U25 U26 U27 U28 U29

[ STATE ] [ DIR ] [LEVEL] [ FLOOR ]

MODE SW.
Operational
ON
state
Direction SFT UP DN ENT
Landing Level 1 2 3 4
Car Position
DWEL
F / N / Key Pad
Display Part TRCS (Push Button)

1-15
Table 3 Operation Method of Key Pad on MCPU Board

Mode Operation Method

Default * Set all the Mode Switches to OFF.
Mode * If the car stands by at 3rd floor under normal operation, LED1 to LED6 shall
display as follows.
- LED1 LED2

- LED3 : OFF
- LED 4

- LED 5 LED 6

Data Ex) When reading the data of the address 300H.

Read (1) Turn ON the Mode Switch 1. Other Mode Switches shall be OFF.
Mode (2) LED 1,2,3,4 display '0' and LED 5, 6 display 'XX'.
The cursor flickers at LED 1.
(3) Press the SFT key one time, then the cursor moves from LED 1 to LED 2.
(4) Press the UP key one time, then LED 2 displays '1' and LED 5, 6 display the
data of the address 100H.
(5) Press the UP key two times so that LED 2 displays '3'. Then LED 5, 6 display
the data of the address 300H.
- Whenever the SFT key is pressed, the cursor moves to the right by
one space. When the cursor disappeared, press the SFT key again, and then
the cursor appears at LED 1.
- When the UP or DN key is pressed, the figure increases or decreases where
the cursor is located.
- The ENT key is inoperable on the Data Read Mode.
- When the key pads are continuously pressed, they do not operate. When they
are changed from ON to OFF, they operate.

1-16
 Mode Operation Method
Data Writing Ex) When writing the data '3F' at the address 1234H.
Mode (1) Turn ON the Mode Switch 1 and 2.
(Other Mode Switches shall be OFF.)
(2) At this time, LED 1 to LED 4 display '0' and the cursor flickers at LED 1.
(3) Press the UP key one time and LED 1 displays '1'.
Then move the cursor to the right by pressing the SFT key one time and
press the UP key two times so that LED 2 displays '2'.
(4) When LED 2 displays '2', move the cursor to the right and continue the
key pad operation as explained above so that LED 1 to LED 4 displays '1'
to '4' respectively.
Then move the cursor to LED 5 and LED 6 in order and set '3' and 'F' in
the same way. Then the cursor flickers at LED 6.

(5) To write '3F' at the address 1234, press the ENT key.
(6) After writing the data, turn OFF the Mode Switches 1 and 2.
(7) Then it returns to the Default Mode.

Deceleration Ex) While the elevator is operating on the Short Run Mode(60m/min), if the
Distance Data creeping speed after deceleration is comparatively long, it needs to
Adjusting decrease the deceleration distance, for example, from 1400mm to
Mode 1350mm as follows.
(1) When turn ON the Mode Switch 3, LEDs display as below.

(2) Press the DN key one time, LEDs display as below.

(3) Press the DN key one more time, then LEDs display as below.

1-17
 Mode Operation Method
Deceleration * When adjusting the deceleration distance, refer to the Appendix 1
Distance Data Standard Deceleration Distance Table according to Elevator Speed.
Adjusting (4) When the LEDs display as shown at (3), press the ENT key.
Mode (5) After pressing the ENT key, the LEDs display for about 2 seconds as
follows. The meaning of each LED display is explained below.

- LED1, LED2: Encoder Mode ("E", "n")

- LED3: Short/Long Run Mode (Short Run : S, Long Run : L)
To change the Long Run deceleration distance data, turn ON the
Mode Switch 4.

- LED4: 'd' or 'i' is displayed which means to decrease or increase the

deceleration distance data.
: Basic deceleration distance is as follows.
- Short Run (30～60m/min) : 1300mm
- Long Run (30～60m/min) : 1300mm
: For changing 1300 to 1250, 'd' is displayed.
: For changing 1300 to 1350, 'i' is displayed.
- LED5: Same as LED3
- LED6: For each 50mm change of the deceleration distances, the digit of the
data changes. In case of example, as 50mm changed, it's displayed
as '2'.
* Contrary to the above example, if the creeping speed after deceleration is
comparatively short, it needs to increase the deceleration distance, for
example, from 1400mm to 1450mm. In this case, press the UP key instead
of the DN key in the procedure explained above. And press the ENT key,
then LEDs display for about 2 seconds as follows.

(6) After changing the deceleration distance data, Mode Switches 3, 4 shall be
turned OFF.

1-18
 Mode Operation Method
Deceleration Ex) When confirming the Short Run(60m/min) deceleration distance data.
Distance (1) Turn ON the Mode Switch 3 and press the ENT key, then the LEDs display
Data as follows.
Confirming (In case the Short Run deceleration distance is 1550mm)
Mode

* The meaning of each LED display is same as explained at

Deceleration Distance Data Adjusting Mode.

Ex) When confirming the Long Run(90M/Min) deceleration distance data.

1) Turn ON the Mode Switches 3, 4 and press the ENT key, then the LEDs
display as follows.
(In case of Long Run deceleration distance is 2300mm)

1-19
Table 4 Standard Deceleration Distance Table (For Speed 30m/min)

Data Increase of Deceleration Decrease of Deceleration

(LED 5, 6) Distance (mm) Distance (mm)

01 800 800
02 820 780
03 840 760
04 860 740
05 880 720
06 900 700
07 920 680
08 940 660
09 960 640
0A 980 620
0B 1000 600
0C 1020 580
0D 1040 560
0E 1060 540
0F 1080 520

MODE SW.
ON

1 2 3 4

DWEL
F / N /
TRCS

MODE SWITCH on MCPU Board

․Mode Switch Setting: Dip Switch No.1 & No.2 - Off

Dip Switch No.3 - On, No.4 Off - When adjust Short Run
Dip Switch No.3 - Off, No.4 On - When adjust Long Run
(Long Run Deceleration Distance shall be set with Short Run Deceleration Distance equally)

1-20
4.4 LED Display of the CTB Board
The CTB Board is located in the Car Junction Box on car roof.

There are three(3) LEDs (LED1, LED2, LED3) at right side and below of the SMPS
(Switching Module Power Supply) on the CTB Board.
3 LEDs shall display the state of data Input/output to(from) the I/O Modules, and can
change the display of 3 LEDs by changing the 3 Dip Switches on the CTB Board.
When the 3 Dip Switches are located OFF, 3 LEDs shall display the state for input/output
of M1～M15 I/O Modules and MD41, MD42 Modules for 2 seconds periods sequentially.
If the 1st Dip Switch is located On only, 3 LEDs shall display the state for input/output from
time of On situation, and not change the contents of display.
If the 3rd Dip Switch is located On only, display of 3 LEDs shall be Off.
3 LEDs shall display for 2 seconds sequentially the input/output state to(from) Modules as
follows.

1-21
 Fig. 1.10 Display Part of CTB Board

Data of LED2, LED3 (8 Bit : 7 → 0 Bit)

Order LED Display
Meaning of
of Upper 4 Bit (7 → 4) Lower 4 Bit (3 → 0)
LED2, LED3
display LED1 LED2 LED3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 1) 2) M1(IP) Data (Hex.) FC5 FC4 FC3 FC2 FC1 ONDN ONUP XONS
2 1 1) 2) M2(IP) Data (Hex.) OVLD FULL L70 L30 EE SE DCL DOL
3 2 1) 2) M3(IP) Data (Hex.) DCSA WDOB DCB DOB INDN INUP INS XAUTO
4 3 1) 2) M4(IP) Data (Hex.) PWR SKIPO SKIPE EACH MOVE PASS ATT EMGY
5 4 1) 2) M5(OP) Data (Hex.) DST MDN MUP OOPT OFIRE OELD OEQ OLBZ
6 5 1) 2) M6(OP) Data (Hex.) LH LG F32 F16 FC8 FC4 FC2 FC1
7 6 1) 2) M7(OP) Data (Hex.) PET EMGYL LN WDOBL LL DOBL LJ LI
8 7 1) 2) M8(IN) Data (Hex.) CA(8) CA(7) CA(6) CA(5) CA(4) CA(3) CA(2) CA(1)
9 8 1) 2) M9(IN) Data (Hex.) CA(16) CA(15) CA(14) CA(13) CA(12) CA(11) CA(10) CA(9)
10 9 1) 2) M10(IN) Data (Hex.) CA(24) CA(23) CA(22) CA(21) CA(20) CA(19) CA(18) CA(17)
11 A 1) 2) M11(OP) Data (Hex.) CLO8 CLO7 CLO6 CLO5 CLO4 CLO3 CLO2 CLO1
12 B 1) 2) M12(OP) Data (Hex.)CLO16 CLO15 CLO14 CLO13 CLO12 CLO11 CLO10 CLO9
13 C 1) 2) M13(OP) Data (Hex.)CLO24 CLO23 CLO22 CLO21 CLO20 CLO19 CLO18 CLO17
14 D 1) 2) M14(IN) Data (Hex.) CLI32 CLI31 CLI30 CLI29 CLI28 CLI27 CLI26 CLI25
15 E 1) 2) M15(OP) Data (Hex.)CLO32 CLO31 CLO30 CLO29 CLO28 CLO27 CLO26 CLO25
MD41 and MD42
16 F 1) 2) LIGHT FAN CHDN CHUP ALARM NUDG CLOSE OPEN
Data (Hex.)
Note) * 1) means the upper 4 Bit (Hex.) of I/O Data,
* 2) means the lower 4 Bit (Hex.) of I/O Data.
* Hex. : Hexadecimal

1-22
 Example of Display : Display 755

The 8th Input Module(M8) data is 55.

55 is hex value, and the hex value 55 is divided
by the Binary value, the data is 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1.
It means that the Car Call Input signals of the
7th floor, the 5th floor, the 3rd floor and the 1st
floor are On.

5. EXPLANATION OF ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM

Following explanation is provided for better understanding the each column of the
Elementary Wiring Diagrams.
For the correct Wiring Diagram, refer to the ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM for exclusive
Project Name.

5.1 COL. 1
1) This column shows the power supply system.
2) 3 phase power is received and coming the circuit breaker (NFB1) and is connected to
the incoming part of motor drive unit (Inverter).
At middle, there is the line that is connected to the transformer module.
3) Power source of TR1 transformer: AC 110V, DC 110V and AC 220V
- AC 110V: DC 5V power supply (SMPS) for Main Board, SIO Board and CTB Board.
- DC 110V: For elevator safety circuit signals.
- AC 220V: Power supply for Door Controller (Inverter) and machine brake.
- Power source for the machine brake is shown on the COL 4.
4) Power Source of TR2 transformer: DC 24V
For input/output signals except the safety circuit signals, power supply for the car
position indicators.
5) Fuses and circuit protectors are provided to protect the AC and DC circuits.
6) AC 220V power is supplied from the on-board (ship) through the circuit breaker (SW8)
and used as the power source for the car fan, light and other AC 220V receptacles.
7) The standard of the 3 phase main power source is AC 440V - 60Hz.

5.2 COL. 2
COL. 2 shows the external wiring diagram for the motor drive unit (inverter), the relay ‘X’
for elevator re-levelling and wiring for grounding.

1-23
5.3. COL. 3
1) This column is for various elevator safety circuit lines and rated voltage is DC 110V.
2) The relay ‘X40’ and ‘X41’ are used for conforming the opening and closing of car /
landing doors, which is in serial connection with the landing door interlock switch and
the gate switch.
3) The relay ‘29’ is energized with all safety related switches in serial connection.
For fireman's operation in case of the fire emergency, relay logic is provided for
Emergency Stop Switch, Exit Switch, etc.
4) The magnetic contactor ‘MC’ is energized with all safety related switches, landing door
interlock switches and the gate switch.
5) B-contact (Normally break contact) is used for top and bottom limit switches.
6) Input or Output symbol of the micro-processor is as belows.

* Input in Micro-Processor:

* Output from Micro-Processor:

* Serial Input in Micro-Processor:

(CTB Board on Car Junction Box)

* Serial Output from Micro-Processor:

(CTB Board on Car Junction Box)

5.4 COL. 4
1) Circuit related to the machine brake and circuit related of relay ‘MCA’ for Magnetic
Contactor ‘MC’ energizing are shown here.
2) For the machine brake circuit, single phase AC 200V is supplied from the COL.1 which
comes through the bridge rectifier (BD2) and DC 180V power is supplied to the
machine brake coil. DC 180V power is supplied to the brake coil, voltage for opening
and holding the brake is controlled by the resistor (BKR1) and the parallel b-contact of
the ‘BRT’ time relay.
3) If the MCPU Board checks the error signal #30B from the motor drive unit (inverter), it
cuts off the power supplied to the motor by the Magnetic Contactor ‘MC’.

5.5 COL. 5A
This column shows the relay ‘29’ and the relay ‘X40’, ‘X41’ contacts in TCB Board, circuit
of the signals related to the Operation Mode Switches (MAUTO / MCS, AD / INIT, etc), the
relay ‘ABN’ of elevator abnormal condition, and relay ‘FIRE’ and Fire alarm signal.

1-24
 5.6 COL. 5B
This column shows the home landing floor, abnormal alarm signal for elevator fault
monitoring, ship's rolling / pitching signal, relay ‘CO2’ and CO2 alarm signal, the car
arrived lamp signals, and the relay ‘LM’ for lock magnet (retiring cam) and the relay ‘P’
of motor run signal.

5.7 COL. 6
This column shows the circuit of inspection Up/Down switch on car, door Open/Close
button, overload switch, car door safety edge switch, Landing Control Device (LCD)
switches on cage top and the lock magnet (retiring cam) operating for the hinged landing
door.

5.8 COL. 7A
This column shows the circuit of cage fan (FAN), lighting (LT) output relays, overload
buzzer, car arrived chime mounted on cage top, the DC 5V power supply (SMPS) for CTB
Board on car top, and elevator running lamp and hour meter.

5.9 COL. 7B
This column shows the circuit of emergency car lighting from fed by on-board power
source of DC 24V, relay ‘ALARM’ and alarm buzzer operating, telephone for elevator.

5.10 COL. 8
This column shows the door controller (inverter) related circuit which includes circuits of
door opening and closing.

5.11 COL. 9C and COL. 9H

This column shows the circuits for car call and landing calls.

5.12 COL. 10
1) This column shows the circuits for indicator outputs.
Dot type car position indicator and moving directional arrow, and operational lamps of
‘OVERLOAD’, ‘ROLL/PITCH’, ‘OUT OF SERVICE’ shall be displayed.
2) Car part and landing part are shown separately.
- Car part: Connection circuit between CTB Board.
- Landing part: Connection circuit between SIO Board.

6. MANUAL OPERATION FOR INSPECTION

6.1. Check Points before Turning Main Electric Power ON
1) Checking the Connection of the Motor Drive Unit (Inverter)

1-25
 Check whether the power inputs R,S,T of the control panel and the outputs U,V,W of
the motor are connected correctly.
At this time, the phase of R,S,T have no relation with the rotating direction of motor.
2) Checking the Voltage of the Incoming Power
․ Frequency: 60Hz (Allowed Frequency Fluctuation: ±5%)
․ Voltage: 440V (Allowed Voltage Fluctuation: ±10%)
3) Checking of the Control Panel
① Check the followings of the control panel according to the specification.
- Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.
- Check the capacity of the main switch (NFB1).
- Check the quantity of I/O Module in SIO Board, considering the service floor
number.
- Check the specification of the resistors in the control panel braking resistor box.
- Check the specification of the Magnetic Contactor (MC).
- Check the voltage specification of the transformer module.
② Check the marking on the PROM.
- PROM Burn-in Date
- PROM Version No.

6.2. CHECK POINTS FOR MANUAL OPERATION

When all connection is finished according to the installation procedure, the trial operation
shall be carried out as the explained below.

1) Checking the Cable Connection

Check the connection of all cables in the control panel and the connection labels also.
Then check the connection of the cables in the Car Junction Box and other
miscellaneous devices.
2) Checking the Setting of Switches on TCB Board in control panel
① Switches in control panel shall be set as following.
- Main Circuit Breaker (NFB1 and SW1): Off
- MAUTO / MCS Switch in Control Panel: MCS
- 220V Circuit Protector in Transformer Module: Off
② Switches at car top and remote box shall be set as following status.
- AUTO / INSPECTION Switch : AUTO
- Emergency Stop Switch at car top : On
③ Checking if below Power Circuits are Shorted
a) AC 110V Circuit
Check the resistance between A110(T3-19) and B110(T3-20).
b) AC 220V Circuit
Check the resistance between A220(T3-17,TM40) and B220(T3-18,TM41).

1-26
 c) AC 200V Circuit
Check the resistance between C200(TM52), R200(T3-11) and B220(TM41),
T200(T3-15).
d) DC 24V Circuit
Check the resistance between P24(T3-1,T3-2,TM12) and N24(T3-5,T3-6,TM13).
e) DC 110V Circuit
Check the resistance between P110(T3-9,T3-10) and N110(T3-7,T3-8).
f) AC 220V incoming car lighting power circuit
Check the resistance between 22XA(TM38) and 22XB(TM39).

CAUTION
When any power circuit is checked out as "shorted", verify the reason and rectify it before
proceeding to next step.

④ Check whether the fuses in the Transformer Module in the control panel are the
rated ones and they are not blown out.

3) Checking Points after Turning On Main Power

① Check whether voltage and frequency of incoming power from on-board
comply with the 3 phase 440V, 60Hz.
② Turn-on the Main Circuit Breaker (NFB1) and turn On the all Circuit Protectors
in the control panel. Then check the output voltages of the power circuits are
as follows.
a) AC 110V Power Circuits ------------ AC 110V ± 10%
Check the voltage between A110(T3-19) and B110(T3-20).
b) AC 220V Power Circuits ------------ AC 220V ± 10%
Check the voltage between A220(T3-17,TM40) and B220(T3-18,TM41).
c) AC 200V Power Circuits ------------ AC 200V ± 10%
Check the voltage between C200(TM52),R200(T3-11) and B220(TM41),T200(T3-
15).
d) DC 24V Power Circuits ------------ DC 24V ± 10%
Check the voltage between P24(T3-1,T3-2,TM12) and N24(T3-5,T3-6,TM13).
e) DC 110V Power Circuits ------------ DC 110V ± 10%
Check the voltage between P110(T3-9,T3-10) and N110(T3-7,T3-8).
③ Turn-on the Lighting Circuit Breaker (SW8) for AC 220V and check the voltage
between 22XA(TM38) and 22XB(TM39) is AC 220V ±10%.
④ After checking the voltage of each power circuit, check the elevator safety lines
as follows.
a) Checking of the Relay 29

1-27
 For the safety of elevator system, do not jumper any governor switches in the
Relay 29 circuit line and governor switches should be wired at least after installing
of the governors.
If the Relay 29 is Off state, use the jumper cable 2 and jumper cable 3 referring to
the Elementary Wiring Diagram to make the Relay 29 On state.
b) Checking of the Relay X41
If the Relay X41 is Off state, use the jumper cable 2 referring to the Elementary
Wiring Diagram. At this time, the landing door at all floors shall be closed for the
safety.
c) Check whether the LEDs of ULS, DLS, UPS signals in SIO Board are On status.
⑤ When the Main CPU (MCPU) Board is at normal status, the LEDs SYS1, SYS2,
SYS3 in MCPU Board shall be flickering. If these LEDs keep Off or On status
continuously, check the power supply DC 5V if it is normal. If the power supply is
normal, press the Reset Button at the upper part of MCPU Board and check
whether the LEDs display is normal. Following displays show the operating status of
the MCPU Board.

(Normal Operation) (Safety Line Circuit Error: F11)

⑥ When turn On the main power, the Magnetic Contactor (MC) shall be energized.
If not, check the inverter line 30B.

4) Checking Points during Manual Operation

When above check points are all satisfied, proceed the hand operation as follows.
① Check the position of the car and move the car up or down slightly with the
MCSUP(Inspection-Up) or MCSDN(Inspection-Down) Switch on TCB board.
And check whether the brake opens normally and the car operates in the same
direction with the MCSUP / MCSDN switch.
The display status of MCPU Board shall be as follows.

Display Status When Operating the Car Up direction in machine room : S.L.↑
② If the car is operated at Creep Speed or noise is heard from the traction motor,
check the encoder connection. If the motor rotates in opposite direction, change the
data 83 of the inverter from 0 to 1 or change any of two wiring among the inverter
output power line of phase U,V,W.

1-28
 ③ After checking the operating condition of the car from the machine room, clean and
adjust the machine Brake so that it works smoothly.
Then check the car operating condition from the cage top as follows.
a) Change the AUTO / INSPECTION Switch on Car Junction Box from AUTO to INSP.
b) When checking the car running at the cage top, use the UP or DN switches on the
Remote Box. When operating the car from the cage top, it is displayed as follows.
Display When Operating the car to Up direction in Car Roof : S.L↑
c) Check the car running is smooth by operating the car up and down with the UP and
DN Switches on the Remote Box.

5) Checking the Machine Brake

After manual operation is over, adjust the machine brake operating voltage as follows.
① Check the BKR1 Resistor and the BRT time relay (On-delay of 1 sec.) in the Control
Panel so that the voltage of the brake indicates as below when the brake operates.
Refer to the COL.4 of Elementary Wiring Diagram.

Machine Model TM400 Terminals

Pick-Up Voltage DC 180V ±5% CT18-1 or CT18-4 or CT19-1 and TM09
Holding Voltage DC 90V ±5% TM08 and TM09

For mechanical check points, refer to the 6.2 Maintenance and Inspection of Machine
Brake and the 6.3 Adjustment of Machine Brake on Section A.

6) Checking the interference in hoistway (trunk)

After adjusting the brake, operate the car up and down on the car roof with switches on
the remote box and check whether any object in hoistway(trunk) is interfering with the
car.

7. HIGH SPEED TEST RUN & ADJUSTMENT

When manual operation is finished, proceed the following preparatory works for the high
speed test run.

7.1 PREPARATION FOR HIGH SPEED TEST RUN

1) 50% Balance Load Setting
For the 50% Balanced Load Setting, refer to the following formula. Car Weight ＋
Capacity × 50% = Counterweight Frame Weight ＋ Counterweight Load the car with
weights equivalent to 50% of the rated capacity.
Move the car up and down and measure the ampere of the traction motor.
When car is located at the same level of the counterweight in hoistway, add or reduce
the weight of counterweight until amperes of measured currents become same.
1-29
2) Distance Setting of Final Limit Switches
The distance setting of the top and bottom Final Limit Switches shall be done properly
according to the rated elevator speed.
And check the SIO Board receives the incoming signals.

Fig. 1.11 Distance Setting of Final Limit Switches

* Distance setting for bottom Final Limit Switches is same as above.

3) Install the Landing Control Device (LCD) at the cage top and set the landing vane for
all floors.

Fig. 1.12 Cable Wiring for Landing Control Device (LCD) Sensors on Cage

1-30
 4) If there are any elevator safety circuits connected by the jumper cables, remove them
and make sure that all the elevator safety circuits per wiring diagram.
5) Other miscellaneous works
① Adjust the car door, landing door and adjust opening and closing of the door roller
release.
② Adjust the guide shoe.
③ Adjust the wire rope tension.
④ Check the common battery telephone operation between car and other space.
⑤ Check the lubrication of the rails and lubricate the moving parts, if necessary.
⑥ Set the overload switch under car

7.2 OPERATION FOR INITIALIZATION

This operation makes the Main CPU (MCPU) memorize the distance of each stop and
the total stops with operating the car from bottom to top floor for setting the deceleration
position of each landing stop.

1) Checking of Switch Setting

① The Switches in Control Panel (TCB Board) shall be set as following.
- MAUTO / MCS Switch : MCS
- E-Stop Switch : On
- AD Switch : AD (Auto Door)

Fig. 1.12 Position of Control Switches on TCB Board

② The Switches at Car Roof shall be set as following.

- Emergency Stop Switch on Remote Control Box and Car Junction Box: On
- AUTO / INSPECTION Switch: AUTO

1-31
2) Checking of the Signals
① Move the elevator to the bottom floor level by inspection operation.
At this time, LEDs (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th LED on M4 IN type Green LED Module) for
ULA, UL, DL and DLA of SIO Board shall be ON.

Fig. 1.13 IN type Green LED Module

② Check the LEDs of SIO Board referring to the following table.

If the data and the car signals do not coincide with each other, check the reason
and remove them.
(O: On, X: Off, C: Don't Care)

Module M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
IN / OUT IN-P IN-P IN-P IN-N OUT OUT OUT OUT
LED Green Green Green Yellow Red Red Red Red
1 X40 O XAUTO X XFIRE X XULAOBRKAX UPLAMP X TL1/LA O LI C
2 X29 O XMCS O XFIRE1X XILU OBRKBX DNLAMP X TL2/LB X LJ C
3 XULS O XMUP X XFIRE2X XILD O FR2 X DST X TL3/LC X LK C
Signal 4 XPLUL O XMDN X XPARK X XDLAO MCA O LED1 C TL4/LD X LL C
Name 5 XPLUHO XSKIPE X XEQS X LED2 C TL5/LE X LM C
6 XDLS OXSKIPOX XEOP X LED3 C LF C LN C
7 XPLDL X XAD X XBK X LG C LP C
8 XPLDH X XFMSWX XMCI O LH C LQ C

3) Initialization
① Keep pressing the “INIT” push button at the middle of the left side on MCPU Board
and stop pressing when the segments at the lower part display as below.

(‘F1’ and ‘cd’ flickers continuously)

1-32
Fig. 1.14 Position of “INIT BUTTON” and “FUNCTION SWITCH” on MCPU Board

② When pushing down the AD Switch to “INIT” on TCB Board, the car shall start to
move for initializing for five seconds later. The car speed shall be same as the
inspection operation and the displayed floor number shall change when the car runs
to the next floor.
③ When the car arrives at the top floor and operation for initializing is completed, turn
the MAUTO / MCS Switch in Control Panel to “MAUTO”. If an “Error” happens
during the initializing operation, remove the cause of the error by referring to the
Troubleshooting
Manual or the Control System Overview and carry out the initializing operation again.
At this time, confirm that the segments at the MCPU Board display as below.
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6
U24 U25 U26 U27 U28 U29

[ STATE ] [ DIR ] [LEVEL] [ FLOOR ]

Auto State Car Position Display

Moving Direction Exact Landing Level

(LED for Level → Upper Bar : ULA, Middle Bar : DZ, Lower Bar : DLA)

1-33
 4) Setting of Encoder FUNCTION Dip Switch on MCPU Board
Set the FUNCTION Dip Switch (3 Pin) on the left center of MCPU Board according to
the Selection of Speed and Function of a applied model as follows.

Table 5 FUNCTION SWITCH Setting Table (on MCPU Board)

Switch
SW1 SW2 SW3
State
On 45 m/min REP. Mode MEM. Mode

Off 30 m/min LOP. Mode RET. Mode

Note) For 60m/min speed, the setting of Dip Switch (FUNCTION SWITCH) is not required.

① Regenerate Pattern (REP) Mode :

This mode is used for resetting the deceleration distance and the braking time by
calculating the pulse / distance rate after initializing operation.
* When attempting the initializing operation again, the pulse / distance rate can be
different from the values previously measured, so the data previously input can be
changed slightly.
② Load Back Pattern (LOP) Mode :
This mode is used for maintaining the data of the deceleration distance and the
braking time previously set by calculating the pulse / distance rate after the initializing
operation.
* It's comfortable to use the LOP Mode as it enables to measure the floor heights
without changing the parameters previously set.
③ Floor Memory (MEM) Mode :
This mode enables the car operate normally from the present floor when the system
is recovered from the error status or power failure.
④ Based Floor Return (RET) Mode :
When this mode is selected, the car returns to the lowest floor when the system is
recovered from the error status or power failure. This mode can be useful when Back-
up Battery is not used at the position control part.
※ Example) In case of setting the DIP switch for 45m/min speed, LOP Mode and
MEM Mode are as follows. (Example of Normal use for 45m/min speed)

Fig. 1.15 FUNCTION SWITCH on MCPU Board

1-34
5) High Speed Test Run and Adjustment
5-1) Short Run and Long Run Test with Momentary Jump
a) Short Run Test
① When the car is at the top floor with “AUTO” status, turn-on the AD (Auto Door)
switch on TCB Board. Then jumper the terminal N24 with the terminal CS of the
SIO Board corresponding to the next below floor landing call down momentarily for
registering a call.
② Then the landing call from the next below floor is input and the car shall move
down to the next below floor. At this time, check the deceleration is made
smoothly and if necessary, adjust the inverter data or change the deceleration
distance data of the MCPU Board, so that the car operates in creep speed for
1～2 seconds. If the deceleration distance data is changed, the distance of the
Final Limit Switch should be also changed. (Refer to Division B the Control
System Overview for changing the deceleration distance data of the MCPU Board)
③ Until the deceleration and landing become smooth and satisfactory, repeat the
short run test and adjust it as explained above.
b) Long Run Test
① After the short run test, register a hall call at certain floor. While the car is running
and decelerating, check the car operation status and adjust the riding quality and
the landing leveling errors.

5-2) Short Run Test and Long Run Test with Key Pad on MCPU Board
a) Short Run Test
① Turn-on the AD (Auto Door) Switch on TCB Board
Input/output of the hall calls and the car door open/close command shall not be
registered.
② Set the data of the address 0200H as ‘1’ with the key pad on MCPU Board.

CAUTION
Data setting with key pad is possible, only when the car is stopped.
③ When the data is set, repeat operating the car to stop and run each landing floor
and check the deceleration distance is proper. If necessary, change the data
referring to the Table 5.3 Key Pad Operation Method of the Deceleration Distance
Data Adjusting Mode and the Table 5.4 Standard Deceleration Distance Table.
④ When the “RESET BUTTON” on MCPU Board is pushed, this operation mode is
stopped.
b) Long Run Test
①Turn-on the AD (Auto Door) switch on TCB board.
Input/output of the hall calls and the door open/close command shall not be
registered.
1-35
 ② Set the data of the address 0201H as ‘01’ with the key pad on MCPU board.

CAUTION
Data setting with key pad is possible, only when the car is stopped.
③ When the data is set, repeat operating the car to stop and run each landing floor
and check the deceleration distance is proper. If necessary, change the data
referring to the Table 5.3 Key Pad Operation Method of the Deceleration Distance
Data Adjusting Mode and the Table 5.4 Standard Deceleration Distance Table.
④ When the “RESET" button on MCPU Board is pushed, this operation mode is
over.

5-3) Car Position Indicator Test

This test is useful for the electrician checking the car position indicator outputs and
the car door operation status.
a) Under the automatic operation mode, when the car stands by at a floor with the car
doors closed, set the data of the address 0202H as ‘01’ with the key pad on MCPU
Board. The car calls and the down landing call at top floor only shall be responded,
but other up/down landing calls shall not be responded.
b) Push the down hall button at the top floor and the car shall arrive at the top floor
and opens the car door normally. Until the door close button is pushed, the car door
is opened and the landing indicator signals shall be output as follows.
- The floor number shall vary from the 1st floor to the top floor.
- Up and down direction lamp shall vary in sequence.
- Operation mode lamp shall vary in sequence.
The outputs of the car position indicator shall be same as above. When the door
close button is pushed, above indicator output signals shall be return to NORMAL.
c) When the “RESET" button on MCPU Board is pushed, this operation mode is over.

5-4) Other Check Points

a) Turn-on the door switch, check the car door open/close status and adjust it so that
the car door operates normally.
b) By riding in car, check whether the car is operating normally by the car call.
c) Check that hall position indicators and hall buttons of all floors operate normally.
Then check the indicator in car also operates normally.
d) Adjust and set the landing vane in hoistway (trunk) so that the landing error is
within the limit ±5mm.
e) Check the overall operation status of the standard features.
f) Check the optional features are operating exactly.
g) Clean the car floor, car inside, machine room, door part and pit.

1-36
8. HOME LANDING FLOOR CHANGING METHOD
1) Place the MAUTO / MCS switch on TCB Board to the MCS position.

Fig. 1.16 MAUTO / MCS Switch on TCB Board

MODE SW.
ON

2) Set the first(1) and second(2) switches of 1 2 3 4

the MODE SW in MCPU Board to ON DWEL

(upper position) as shown Fig. 1.17. F / N /
TRCS
(It is data for the Write Mode)
Fig. 1.17 ON position of 1, 2 Switches
on MODE Switch

Fig. 1.18 Display Part on MCPU Board

1-37
 3) Set the data of "04b7" address to SFT UP DN ENT
new home landing floor by using
the SFT, UP, DN keys on MCPU Key Pad
Board. (Push Button)

Fig. 1.19 Keys (Button Switch) on MCPU Board

․ SFT : Shift key, when you pushed this key, the curser (flickering digit) would
shift from the left to right.
․ UP : Up key, when you pushed this key, the numeric would increased one by one.
․ DN : Down key, when you pushed this key, the numeric would decreased one by one.
Note) ① The LED1, LED2, LED3 and LED4 are show the address. (04b7)
The LED5 and LED6 indicate the home landing floor data. (3rd floor)
② The numeric is hexadecimal values.
So it increase 0, 1, 2, 3,․․․8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F, 0, 1,․․․.
(Below data displays the home landing floor is the 3rd floor from bottom floor)
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6
U24 U25 U26 U27 U28 U29

[ STATE ] [ DIR ] [LEVEL] [ FLOOR ]

ADDRESS PART DATA PART

Fig. 1.20 Home Landing Floor Display on MCPU Board

4) Press the ENT key on MCPU Board.

5) Press the RESET button(key) on MCPU Board.

1-38
 Fig. 1.21 RESET Button (key) on MCPU Board

6) Set all the switches of the MODE SW. to OFF (lower position) on MCPU Board.
MODE SW.
ON

1 2 3 4

DWEL
F / N /
T RCS
Fig. 1.22 OFF position of all Dip Switches on MODE Switch

7) Place the MAUTO / MCS switch to the MAUTO position on TCB Board.

1-39
B. FAULT-FINDING Page

1. INTRODUCTION ----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-1

2. TROUBLE OF ELECTRICAL POWER VOLTAGE ---------------------- 2-1

3. TROUBLE OF MOTOR DRIVE UNIT (INVERTER) --------------------- 2-1

4. TROUBLES WHEN CAR STOPS -------------------------------------------- 2-2

5. TROUBLES DURING CAR RUNNING ------------------------------------- 2-4

6. MISCELLANEOUS TROUBLES --------------------------------------------- 2-5

7. ERROR CODES ON MCPU BOARD ---------------------------------------- 2-12

ii
1. INTRODUCTION
This manual describes the Trouble-shooting method of Hyundai Marine Elevator system.
In this manual, elevator troubles are explained in two cases i.e. “Condition of Operation
possible” and “Condition of Operation impossible”.
“Condition of Operation possible” means the possible state of running, but normal service for
passenger is not made by several causes of troubles.
“Condition of Operation impossible” means the impossible state of starting and running of car
by certain causes of troubles.
As troubles are describes by trouble modes and causes of troubles and trouble-shooting
methods are explained, this manual shall be helpful for prompt and accurate troubleshooting
of the elevator troubles that could happen at on board (ship).

2. TROUBLE OF ELECTRICAL POWER VOLTAGE

When normal power is supplied for Control Panel and main switch (NFB1) is On, check the
voltage of input or output for each part of Control Panel.
2.1 Main Power
Confirm if the primary and secondary side of main switch (NFB1) and voltage of Power
Terminals R․S․T corresponds to on-board power supply system.
2.2 Transformer Module
Confirm if the secondary voltage of Transformer Module is accurate.
․ T3-1,T3-2,TM12 / T3-5,T3-6,TM13 : DC 26V ± 10%
․ T3-9,T3-10 / T3-7,T3-8 : DC112V ± 10%
․ T3-11 ,TM52 / T3-15,TM41 : AC200V ± 10%
․ T3-17,TM40 / T3-18,TM41 : AC220V ± 10%
․ T3-19 / T3-20 : AC110V ± 10%
2.3 Voltage Fluctuation
In case the Voltage Fluctuation of each part exceeds 10％, check the voltage and adjust the
tap of each transformer.

3. TROUBLES OF MOTOR DRIVE UNIT (INVERTER)

3.1 Checking of Inverter Power
1) Check the power supply to the power input terminal R․S․T of inverter is normal.
2) Check the operation status of the main switch (NFB1), if the power is not supplied.
3) Check the wiring of power input terminal R S T and to the motor output terminal U․V․W
is correct.
4) Refer to “Inverter Adjustment Manual” for the internal data.

2-1
 ① Make sure the power is Off when changing the terminal wiring of inverter.
② As the internal condenser is not discharge immediately after power is turn off, don't
touch it until □CHARGE□ lamp is Off for avoiding electric shock.
3.2 Checking of Inverter Error
If a trouble occurs by external or internal cause when normal power is supplied to inverter,
Inverter turns off the ‘LD12’ LED on MCPU Board through "trouble" signal from the 30B, and
elevator shall stop after outputting Error Code.
1) Check Signal ‘30B’ for Inverter Internal Circuit Operation Checking.
If the ‘LD12’ LED on MCPU Board is in Off state, it means the Trouble from Inverter is
happened. So, check Inverter Error Code and take proper steps.
2) By using Key Pad (HHT-2000), check the present condition and Error Code of Inverter.
3.3 Checking of Inverter Error Code
When the Motor Drive Unit (Inverter) has a fault as function failure or an extraordinary
phenomenon is occurred, refer to the “HIVD-700GS Inverter Troubleshooting in Manual”.
If the trouble is not included on the above, the inverter may be damaged.
In this case, please replace inverter unit or PC Board in inverter with new one.
3.4 Momentary Power Failure
Car stops in case of power failure, but when normal power is supplied again it moves to the
nearest landing level after 3～4 seconds and elevator shall operate normally.
3.5 Inverter External Wiring Check
Turn power off, and check the connecting status and connections as wiring diagram.
Terminal blocks are located at lower part of the Inverter unit.
1) Referring to the COL.2 in Wiring Diagram and inverter adjustment manual, check the
external wiring connected to each terminals.
2) Check the fastening of each terminal.

4. TROUBLES WHEN CAR STOPS

If the Car does not run when there is no problem in Control Panel and Motor Drive
Unit(Inverter), check the followings.
4.1 Elevator Safety Line Circuit
Check if the elevator Safety Line circuit is the closed circuit status.
- Relay ‘29’ is On
1) If power is supplied to coil of the Relay 29 is normal, check the operating voltage
(DC 110V) of Relay 29 and status of relay socket and wiring.

2-2
 2) If the Relay 29 is not energized, check the safety circuit lines (COL.3) and their wiring
conditions.
- Safety Contact ;
․ TRUNK TOP MH S/W : Trunk escape hatch switch
․ CAR GOV. S/W : Car governor switch
․ CWT. GOV. S/W : Counterweight governor switch
․ CAR GOV. TEN. S/W : Car governor tension switch
․ PIT S/W : Pit access switch
․ EXIT SW. ON CAR : Car escape hatch switch
․ SLACK ROPE S/W : Main rope slack sensing switch
․ SAFETY S/W : Car safety gear operating switch
․ UP FLS : Up directional final limit switch
․ DOWN FLS : Down directional final limit switch
․ EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH : In car & On car emergency stop switch
4.2 Landing Door Switches
1) Check if the Landing Door Interlock Switches and the Landing Door Safety Switches, and
Car Door (Gate) Switch are closed and cable connection.
- When the every landing doors is firmly closed
: Relay "X41" is shall be energized.
- When the car door is firmly closed
: Relay "X40" is shall be energized.
2) If power supplied to Relay "X40" and "X41" are normal, check the operating voltage
(DC 110V) of the Relay X40, X41 and status of relay socket and wiring.
4.3 Checking of Machine Brake Operation
In checking the above items, if the input signals “UP, DN, LU, MU, HU, RST, CM” for inverter
operation are normal and the inverter condition and control terminal wiring is correct, the
inverter supplies the voltage to the motor.
You can see the Inverter Operation by current indication of motor and “RUN” lamp.
Check the followings if the car does not move while the inverter works.
1) Check the machine brake is open when the Relays ‘BRA’ and ‘BRB’ are turned On.
2) When the brake is open, but the car can not move, check the followings and take proper
steps.
① Mechanical troubles of Traction Machine (Gear Damage, Rope Slip, etc.)
② Troubles of Motor (Power phase fault, Burning out, etc.)
③ Safety Device operation
④ Overload

2-3
 3) When the car does not move as the brake is not open, check the followings.
Check if the Relays ‘BKA’ and ‘BKB’ could become On.
If the appropriate relays do not work, check the wiring and electric power supply.
When the appropriate relays are in normal operation and machine brake is not open, check
the electric power supplied to machine brake and check if the setting of brake spring is
right.
(See the Brake Spring Setting)

5. TROUBLES DURING CAR RUNNING

5.1 Suspension between Floors
In case the car stops outside of the door zone during running, check the followings.
1) POT signal (traction machine TM500 or TM600 or TM900 type only)
Make sure the BKOP is always On while the car is running as it is the signal of the
controller that confirms the car is running.
If the BKOP becomes off while the car is running, the Controller judges it as error and
makes the car stop. In that case, check the followings.
① Check the state of the BK OPEN Switch status attached to Brake coil upper side. In
most cases, the connection status or mis-operation of switch is the cause of troubles.
There may be certain on-board, where no BK OPEN Switch is applied.
② Check the Relays ‘BKA’ and ‘BKB’ which confirms inverter is operating.
As the Relays are On when the inverter is operating, check the wiring status and the
voltage supplied to “T3-11” and “T3-15” terminal is same as the voltage of “P24”.
2) Door Switches
When Gate Switch and Interlock Switches are opened during running the car stops.
Relay "X40" and "X41" which shows Open/Close state of Landing Door and Car Door
should always maintain On state during running.
① Check if Relay "X40" and "X41" keeps On state during running.
② When the door is not fully closed due to the adjustment condition of Car Door and
Landing Door, if the Relay "X41" is turned On and car starts, landing door switch(es)
is(are) not closed perfectly.
․Hinged swing landing door : Interlock switch and Safety switch
․Auto sliding door : Clutch of car side and Hanger Roller can be collided.
3) Momentary Power Failure
See Momentary Power Failure of 3.4
4) Inverter trouble
Take proper steps with referring to Inverter Error Code indication of 3.3.

2-4
 5.2 Floor Landing Leveling Inferiority.
1) Check the installation position of ULA, ILU, ILD, DLA switches on cage top and the
LCD vane brackets at each landing floor level in hoistway (trunk).
When landing error occurs at specific floor, check the position and state of LCD switches
on car top and LCD vane brackets in hoistway (trunk).
2) Check the installation of ULA, ILU, ILD, DLA switches on cage top and their
operational status.
․Power input : Red LED shall be lit.
․Sensor operation : Green LED shall be lit.

6. MISCELLANEOUS TROUBLES
6.1 Trouble Related With Inverter
6.1.1 Trouble Mode
The braking resistor at upper part of the Control Panel (P, DB terminal) looks hot or is
overheated without operation of the car when the inverter is power On.
1) Cause of Trouble
When the car runs Up with no load or Down with full load, the energy consumed with
heat at the Braking Resistor of large capacity at from the motor should not be delivered
to main electric power line and should be upper part of control panel.
For this purpose, the Braking power element (IPM) in the inverter should be On and Off.
The cause of trouble here is that the Braking power element (IPM) in the inverter is
always On, when the power is applied to the inverter which causes the Braking Resistor
to be overheated.
2) Troubleshooting Method
Replace the inverter itself because the Braking power element (IPM) in the inverter is
damaged internally or the inverter PC Board is damaged for any reason.

6.1.2 Trouble Mode

The surrounding of Braking power element (IPM) in inverter is burnt with dark stain.
1) Cause of Trouble
When the car runs in returning operation (No load Up or Full load Down) (at high or low
speed) in the condition of the Braking Resistor at upper part of control panel related
wiring cable or terminal (P, DB) is short, the Braking power element (IPM) of large
capacity is burnt-out with big noise, and the inside of inverter is darkly stained.

2) Troubleshooting Method
Using the tester at the terminal (P, DB) for braking resistor, check out which part is
short to Control Panel Cabinet and remove the cause, then replace the inverter.

2-5
 If the inverter is simply replaced without removing the cause, and the car is put into the
returning operation, the inverter shall be damaged again as above explained.

Example : The braking resistor assembled in two-steps is fallen down as it's pushed by
certain object while the control panel is hoisted and its connection part is contacted with
the resistor cover.

6.1.3 Trouble Mode

The resistor, transistor, etc of terminal PGP or PGM, the connecting part of rotary encoder
power supply from inverter is burnt out or burnt black of PC Board pattern.
1) Cause of Trouble
It is the system that 15V DC(＋) power from inverter is applied to the rotary encoder
and the square wave pulse is obtained, of which the terminal PGP is +15V and PGM is
0V.
Therefore, if the inverter is operated with these lines mis-wired, the terminals PGP and
PGM of the inverter pc board shall be burnt out with a snap sound within 4～5
secondsor pc board of the rotary encoder attached to motor shall be burnt out.
2) Troubleshooting Method
After completing field wiring, attempt test-run after checking the encoder power
terminals PGP(+15V DC) and PGM(GND) shall be properly wired before engaging the
power.

6.1.4 Trouble Mode

High speed is not reached in long run of 2-floors or more.
1) Cause of Trouble

Inverter Long Short Creep Inspection

Initializing
Terminal Run Run Speed Speed
Terminal LU (X1) ◎ ◎ ◎
Terminal MU (X2) ◎ ◎
Terminal HU (X3) ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

In case of long run, this error is caused by the condition of creep speed (Terminals LU
and MU are only On) or inspection speed (Terminals HU is only On) because the power
is not normally applied to terminals LU, MU and HU even though it should be done in
correct circuit configuration as above table for the inverter terminal input conditions by
speeds.
As shown at above table for the inverter terminal input conditions by speeds, for the
Long Run, LU, MU and HU terminals should be connected and the power should be
normally applied.
2-6
 Trouble happens when the condition of creep speed (terminals LU and MU are only
On) or inspection speed (Terminals HU is only On) shall be made.
2) Troubleshooting Method
In running the car, remove the causes by checking each terminal to meet the above
input condition by speeds.

6.1.5 Trouble Mode

There happen troubles that the system becomes shut down or the registered call is
cancelled with unknown reason while the car is running normally.
1) Cause of Trouble
Among many reasons that may cause this trouble, the noise caused by the inverter
operation should be made zero by proper way.
For this purpose, separate the various ground terminals of the inverter as shown and
check if they are connected to the ground terminals at the lower part of control panel.
2) Troubleshooting Method
Arrange the ground cables as above, and operate the car after checking if the ground
terminal at the lower part of control panel is properly cabled to the building grounding.

6.1.6 Trouble Mode

As the braking resistor at the upper part of Control Panel is burnt or the resistor coil is
disconnected, the elevator is not in normal operation.
1) Cause of Trouble
When the elevator runs in regenerative operation mode (No load Up or Full load Down),
the more frequently it operates, the more heated is the braking resistor.
If the operation is continuously increased before the heat is cooled off, the resistor
remains heated at high temperature. In this case, if the coil quality, coil wound interval
or finishing paint is not proper, the aforesaid trouble may be caused.
Also, if the coil of braking resistor is damaged by other object, the load shall be
concentrated to such part which may cause burning as such part is more heated than
other parts. So it's necessary to check the appearance of the resistor.
2) Troubleshooting Method
The braking resistor is classified as follows depending on the capacity of the applied
inverter.
Be sure to check the capacity and wiring status of each resistor, and to check if the wire
is close to the heating part or contacts with the resistor cover.

(Inverter 11kw : 32 Ohm, 2.4kw) (Inverter 15kw : 24 Ohm, 3.6kw)

Fig. 2.1 Braking Resistor on Control Panel

2-7
6.2 Troubles Related With Noise Shield
6.2.1 Trouble Mode
Trouble happens as the elevator is often stopped out of order or the indicator is flickering
error signals.
1) Cause of Trouble
There may be various troubles caused by noise and the solutions shall have no
principles. The best way is to attempt several methods and to find out the right solution.
There was an example that solved the noise problem by covering the power cable with
noise shield tube and grounded it, which was the most effective method of all attempted.
2) Troubleshooting Method
The types of power cable and the part to be covered with shield tube are as below ;
a) Power terminal in control panel (lower part) - Main Switch (NFB : middle part)
b) Main Switch (middle part), secondary terminal - Inverter, primary terminal
c) Inverter, secondary terminal - Power terminal output (U, V, W)
d) Inverter braking resistor terminal (P, DB) - Cable to braking resistor (CP upper part)
e) Power terminal output in control panel (U, V, W) - Cabling to motor
f) Cable from electrical switch board at on-board side for power supply
- Control Panel power terminal (R,S,T)
Above a)～d) shall be done and grounded at the factory before shipping, and, e) and f)
shall be done and grounded at the installation site with the enclosed shield tube when
bringing in and connecting the power cable.

Caution: The shield tube should be grounded for either end only not to make leaked current a
closed loop circuit. In addition, the peripheral circuit of the inverter and the encoder
cable should be grounded separately.

2-8
6.3 Troubles Related With HIDC-400IM Door Operator
6.3.1 Trouble Mode
When opening the closed door with Landing button or Door Open button, the door opens at
jogging speed.
1) Cause of Trouble
The close limit has been contacted and separated again by backlash of the belt.
2) Troubleshooting Method
a) Adjust the door close limit (DCL) sensor bracket so that the sensor could fully
sense the limit position.
b) Adjust threshold to control the backlash to the maximum.

6.3.2 Trouble Mode

Door reopens at jogging speed by door protection time.
1) Cause of Trouble
The door close limit (DCL) is not activated.
2) Troubleshooting Method
Adjust the door close limit (DCL) sensor bracket to sense the limit position.

6.3.3 Trouble Mode

Door is closed at jogging speed by door waiting time or door close signal.
1) Cause of Trouble
The door open limit (DOL) has been contacted and separated again by the backlash of
belt.
2) Troubleshooting Method
a) Adjust the door open limit (DOL) bracket so that the sensor could fully sense the limit
position.
b) Adjust the threshold to control the backlash to the maximum.

6.3.4 Trouble Mode

Door is closed at jogging speed by door protection time.
1) Cause of Trouble
It happens as the door open limit (DOL) is not activated.
2) Troubleshooting Method
Adjust the door open limit (DOL) bracket to sense the limit position.

6.3.5 Trouble Mode

Door is not operating without showing any signal of error.
1) Cause of Trouble
Poor connection of cable connector.
2) Troubleshooting Method

2-9
 Check the connecting status of cable connector.

6.3.6 Trouble Mode

Door fails to open.
1) Cause of Trouble
Defective open signal line.
2) Troubleshooting Method
If the door open LED was burnt-out or short, jump it.

6.3.7 Trouble Mode

Door fails to close.
1) Cause of Trouble
Defective the door close signal line
2) Troubleshooting Method.
If the door close LED was burnt-out or short, jump it.

2-10
7. ERROR CODES ON MCPU BOARD

Safety Circuit Error Reference Drawing

Error Code: F11 Address : 043CH
(#29 Relay Off) : COL.3

<Trouble>

When the elevator stops suddenly, the LED Display indicates F11 error.

<Reference Drawings>

COL 1, COL 4 and COL 5.

<Reasons and Solutions>

If the #29 Relay in TCB Board is not energized, this elevator circuit shall not be operated
with inspection speed(slow speed).
And the LED Display on MCPU Board shall indicate Error Code F11.
It shows the trouble in elevator safety circuit.

1. The DC 110V Power Supply Circuit is opened.

- Check the fuse F3, F4 and F5 in COL 1.

- Check the Circuit Protector CP2 is ON position.
- Check the connecting of T4-7, T4-8, T4-9 and T4-10 connectors.

2. Some of the elevator safety component is not activated such as Governor switch, Trunk top
exit switch, Up(or Down) limit switch, Car(or CWT. tension sheave switch, Pit switch
etc. .... .

- Check the safety circuit from P110(CT8-2) to ESIN(T1-18) one by one with Digital Volt
Meter comparing with COL 3.

3. Fuse PIC02 is burn out.

- Check the PICO2 fuse in the CTB Board.

Confirm the #29 Relay is energizing after clearing the trouble reason.
And check the data of address "0101H" in MCPU Board is set with 01H.

If the data is still 00H, M1 module in SIO Board is not working properly. SIO Board or M1
Module is necessary to be replaced.

2-11
 Magnetic Contactor
Reference Drawing
Error Code: F11 Error Address : 043BH
: COL.4
(MC Contactor Off)

<Trouble>

The #29 Relay is energized, but the LED Display indicates F11 error.
And elevator cannot operate.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 4

<Reason and Solution>

1. If the Magnetic Contactor MC is not energized, MCPU Board shall stop to operate the
elevator.

- Check the Magnetic Contactor(MC) is ON. If not, check followings.

- If the data of address 392H is 00H, reset the system with pushing the reset button in
MCPU Board.
If data is still 00H, necessary to replace the MCPU Board with new one.

2. If the Magnetic Contactor(MC) is energized, but the data of address 117H is 00H, check
the followings.

- The voltage between N24 and MCI(CT1-9) shall be DC 24V.

If not, check the circuit MCI in reference drawing COL 4.
And, confirm the data of address 117H is 01H.

If the data is still 00H and M3 module in SIO Board is not working properly, SIO Board or
M3 module is necessary to be replaced.

2-12
 Error Code: F11 DC 24V Power Error Address : 043EH Reference Drawing:

<Trouble>
If DC 24V power supply is dropped, elevator system shall detect it and stop to operate the
elevator.
And the LED display indicates F11 error.

<Reference Drawing>

<Reason and Solution>

1. MCPU Board shall detect the voltage of DC 24V circuit.

So when the voltage is dropped, the elevator shall be stopped and the LED P24(red color)
in MCPU Board is OFF.

- Check the voltage of DC 24V in MCPU Board (between CM3-1 and CM3-3).

- If the voltage is correct, reset the system with pushing the Reset Button in MCPU Board.

If the system does not return to normal though cleared the cause of voltage drop and reset
the system, it is necessary to replace the MCPU Board.

Error Code: F21 ANTI-STALL ERROR Address : 0410H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

Elevator cannot operate with the rated speed and car position indicator display the floor
letter with flickering.

<Reference Drawing>

<Reason and Solution>

1. If elevator operate over 3 minutes continuously, system shall stop operating and flickering
the indicator to protect wearing of wire rope and main sheave of traction machine.

2. The LED Display in MCPU Board shall indicate F21, and the data of address 410H is 00H.

3. If the setting of balance weight of counterweight is not correct, the wire rope can slip and
car cannot reach the registered landing level during 3 minutes continuously.

4. If the output of inverter is not correct, the car cannot move and keep zero(0) speed 3
minutes continuously.

5. If the guide rail is not correctly installed, the car shall not move by the guide rail.

2-13
 Error Code: F22 Floor Error Address : 0417H Reference Drawing:

<Trouble>

1. After finishing the initializing operation, elevator system cannot change to automatic mode
and the LED Display indicates F22 error.
2. On the way to operate, elevator stop at landing level and the LED display indicates F22
error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 3

<Reason and Solution>

1. When F22 error is displayed after finishing the initializing operation, the of service floor
information between encoder control part and MCPU Board is not equal.

- Check the sensors of LCD(Landing Control Device) on car and the cutting vane in
hoistway(trunk).

- Check the total service floor information in PROMs at MCPU Board.

- Check the up and down final limit switches in hoistway(trunk).

Error Code: F32 Encoder CPU Error Address : 0432H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

Elevator cannot operate, and the LED Display indicates F32 error.

<Reference Drawing>

<Reason and Solution>

1. The SYS3 LED in MCPU Board shall flicker.

If the LED is not flickering, replace the MCPU Board with new one.

2-14
 Error Code: F42 Initialization Error Address : 0419H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

On the way to the initializing operation, the LED Display indicates F42 error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 2

<Reason and Solution>

1. Pulse signal from the rotary encoder have some noise, so that MCPU Board cannot
receive landing floor information correctly.

- Check wave form of the encoder pulse signal with oscilloscope.

- Check the circuit of CM and CME line is opened.

2. Landing Control Device(LCD) signals should be inputted correctly.

When elevator moves to up direction, if the LCD signal is inputted by order of ULA, UL, DL
and DLA signal, the operational sequence is normal.
And, elevator moves to down direction, if the LCD signal is inputted by order of DLA, DL,
UL and ULA signal, the sequence is normal.

- Check the LCD input signals as the above.

- Check the M4 module in SIO Board.

If the LED in M4 module is operated correctly, replace the SIO Board with new one.

- If input signals are not correct according to moving direction of elevator, change the
position of LCD sensors each other with the above order.

2-15
 Error Code: F52 Deceleration Error Address : 041AH Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

Elevator decelerates with abnormal speed pattern and stops with F52 error.
Elevator shall restart with safety drive operation mode(low speed) for leveling to the
nearest landing level, then the F52 error is disappeared.
After then, elevator shall return to normal operation.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 6, COL 11

<Reason and Solution>

1. When the floor information from encoder control part after initializing operation and the
floor data in PROMs at MCPU Board during elevator run with auto mode is different more
than 300mm, the F52 error shall be displayed.

- Check the shield line of rotary encoder or encoder pulse signal.

2. Landing Control Device(LCD) signals shall be input correctly.

When elevator moves to up direction, the LCD signal shall be input the order of ULA, UL,
DL and DLA signal. And elevator move to down direction, the LCD signal shall be input
the order of DLA, DL, UL and ULA.

- Check the LCD input signal as the above.

- Check the M4 module in SIO Board.

If the LED in M4 module is operates correctly, replace the SIO Board with new one.

- If input signals are not correct according to moving direction of elevator, change the
position of LCD sensors each other with the above order.

3. If wire rope slip on the main sheave of traction machine is too much, this error can be
displayed.

4. When the vane for door opening zone is moved or incorrectly mounted, this error shall be
displayed.

2-16
 UL
Error Code: F62 Address : 041BH Reference Drawing :
and DL Input Error

<Trouble>

When elevator is initializing operation, elevator stop before finishing of initializing operation.
And the LED display indicates the F62 error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 6

<Reason and Solution>

1. When elevator start to move up direction for initializing operation, if the DL signal is input
before the UL signal inputting, change the UL sensor position and the DL sensor position
each other.

Error Code: F13 Back-up RAM error(1) Address : 03F5H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

When the LED display indicates F42 error, elevator shall return to bottom terminal level for
resetting the error.
If F42 error is still indicated, the data of Back-up RAM in MCPU Board is not stable
condition.

<Reference Drawing>

<Reason and Solution>

1. When the data of Back-up RAM is not correct, this error shall be displayed.

- Rescue the person(s) in car with inspection operation, and discuss with Hyundai Elevator
Co., Ltd.

2. If the data of address 03F5H is 01H, it is impossible to reset this system at on-board.

2-17
 Error Code: F23 Back-up RAM Error(2) Address : 0413H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

When turn-on main power, the LED display indicates "NO" and "cd" continuously or F23
error.
And elevator can operate with inspection operation, but elevator cannot return to normal
mode.

<Reference Drawing>

<Reason and Solution>

1. When the battery in MCPU Board is fully discharged, the Back-up RAM cannot working.

- Check the battery, and it shall be higher than DC 3.4V.

- After changing the battery, input the data of Back-up RAM correctly.
The data of Back-up RAM shall be recorded in HELCO only.
To confirm the data, ship number numbered by yard shall be informed.

2. When the RAM data of MCPU Board and CTB Board(on car) is not equal, this error shall
be displayed.

- To make normal operation, match the PROMs in MCPU Board and the PROMs in CTB
Board.

2-18
 CPU ERROR FOR
Error Code: F33 SERIAL Address : 0436H Reference Drawing :
COMMUNICATION

<Trouble>

The LED Display indicates F33 error, inspection operation(slow speed) is available only.

<Reference Drawing>

<Reason and Solution>

1. When the signal communication between MCPU Board and CTB Board is abnormal, this
error shall be displayed.

- If the LED(SYS2) in MCPU Board is not flickering, replace the CTB Board on car or the
MCPU Board with new one.

- If you cannot solve the trouble, discuss with Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd.

DUAL PORT RAM

Error Code: F43 Address : 0438H Reference Drawing :
Error

<Trouble>

The LED Display indicates F43 error, inspection operation(slow speed) is available only.

<Reference Drawing>

<Reason and Solution>

1. When the signal communication between MCPU Board and CTB Board is abnormal, this
error shall be displayed.

- Replace the MCPU Board or CTB Board on car with correct PROMs.

- If you cannot solve the trouble, discuss with Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd.

2-19
 Error Code: F53 FLOOR ERROR Address : 0417H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

The LED display indicates F53 error, inspection operation(slow speed) is available only.

<Reference Drawing>

<Reason and Solution>

1. When the data of total service floor between MCPU Board and CTB Board are different,
this error shall be displayed.

- Replace the MCPU Board or CTB Board with correct PROMs.

- If you cannot solve the trouble, discuss with Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd.

Error Code: F63 CTB CPU Error Address : 043AH Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

The LED Display indicates F63 error, inspection operation(slow speed) is available only.

<Reference Drawing>

<Reason and Solution>

1. When the signal communication between MCPU Board and CTB Board on car is
abnormal, this error shall be displayed.

2. If the connector between CM7 in MCPU Board and CT17 in CTB Board is not connected,
this error shall be displayed.

- Check the connection between connector CM7 and CT17.

- Replace the MCPU Board or CTB Board with correct PROMs.

- If you cannot solve the trouble, discuss with Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd

2-20
 Error Code: F73 CHECK SUM ERROR Address : 0439H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

When elevator is operated with auto mode or inspection mode, the LED display indicates
F73 error.
And elevator cannot move until F73 error is disappeared.

<Reference Drawing>

<Reason and Solution>

1. When the signal communication between MCPU Board and CTB Board on car is
abnormal, F73 error shall be displayed.

- Check the ground line of CTB Board in car junction box.

Error Code: F14 #40 Error Address : 0100H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

When elevator is stopped suddenly and return to normal operation.

At this time, the LED Display indicates F14 error and disappears.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 3

<Reason and Solution>

1. When elevator is stopped because of landing door interlock circuit or gate (car door) circuit
is opened, F14 error shall be displayed.
But door circuit is closed, F14 error shall be disappeared automatically and elevator
system shall be returned to normal operation.

- Check the adjustment of each landing interlock switches and landing door safety
switches or gate(car door) switch and check the switch contacts.

2-21
 Error Code: F24 DOL_DCL_Error Address : 0449H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

Elevator cannot move with auto mode.

The LED Display indicates F24 error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 8

<Reason and Solution>

1. When the DOL and DCL signal is not input to MCPU Board from car door operator, F24
error shall be displayed.

- Check the DOL and DCL signals in car door operator.

- Check the above signals in M2 module of the CTB Board on the way to operate the car
door.
If door panel is positioned at middle part of car door track, the DOL and the DCL signal
shall be turned-on.
- If M2 module of the CTB Board is normal, replace the CTB Board with new one.

Error Code: F34 DCL ERROR Address : 042AH Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

The elevator cannot start, and the LED display indicates F34 error.
But inspection operation(slow speed) is available.

<Reference Drawing>

<Reason and Solution>

1. When elevator cannot start because of the Door Close Limit(DCL) signal is still inputted,
F34 error shall be displayed.

- Check the DCL signal in car door operator.

When the car door is fully closed, the DCL signal shall be OFF.
- Check the M2 module of CTB Board.
- Replace the CTB Board with new one.

2-22
 Error Code: F44 DOL Error Address : 0423H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

The elevator operates automatically without the registered call, and repeat3 times, and
returns to the pre-determined main floor.
Then the LED Display indicates F54 error, and elevator is not operated with car door
opening.
But inspection operation(slow speed) is available.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 8

<Reason and Solution>

1. When the car door cannot open fully, and the DOL signal is continuously inputted, elevator
shall force to close and open the car door again by itself 3 times.
If car door still cannot reach to fully open position, car call for next service floor shall be
registered and elevator shall move to next floor. And elevator shall be opened the car door
at next floor, and closed as same method.
Elevator shall repeat this operation one more floor.
If car door still have trouble for DOL error, elevator shall move down to pre-determined
main floor and the LED Display shall indicate F44 error.
- Check the car door operator.
- Check the M2 module in CTB Board.
- Replace the CTB Board with new one.

Error Code: F54 Close_Fault 1 Error Address : 0426H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

When elevator try to start for some direction, suddenly stop starting and open the door and
close. Then elevator tries to start again and stop.
At this time, the LED display indicates F54 error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 3, COL 8

<Reason and Solution>

1. If the #40 relay is de-energized on the way to starting, elevator shall be stopped to start
and car door shall be opened and closed until the #40 relay is re-energized.
- Check the landing door interlock switches, the landing door safety switches and gate(car
door) switch.

2-23
 Error Code: F15 X30B Error Address : 0404H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

Elevator cannot operate and magnetic contactor MC is not energized.

Then the LED display indicates F15 error.

<Reference Drawing>

<Reason and Solution>

1. When inverter has trouble and the 30B signal is not inputted, elevator shall be shutdown.
F15 error shall be displayed in this case.

- Check the circuit between CM4 in MCPU Board and terminal 30B in inverter.

- Replace the inverter with new one.

Error Code: F25 Inverter Output Error Address : 0760H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

When elevator run or slip without running signal(X1,X2,X3), magnetic contactor MC is drop
out and LED display indicates F25 error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 2

<Reason and Solution>

1. When the elevator moves without any running signal, the MC contactor is de-energized
and elevator control system shall be also shutdown for safety.

- Check the wear of lining of traction machine brake.

- Check the traction machine brake operation.

- Check the circuit between connector CM4 in Inverter and Inverter unit.

- Check the circuit between connector CM5 in Inverter and Inverter unit.

2-24
 CLOSE_FAULT 2
Error Code: F64 Address : 0427H Reference Drawing :
ERROR

<Trouble>

When elevator try to start for some direction, suddenly stop starting and open the car door
and close. Then elevator try to start again and stop.
At this time, the LED display indicates F64 error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 3, COL 8

<Reason and Solution>

1. If DCL signal is inputted on the way to starting, elevator shall be stopped to start and car
door shall be opened and closed until DOL signal is dropped out.

- Check the car door close limit signal.

- Check the M2 module in CTB Board.

Error Code: F16 Brake Error (1) Address : 0412H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

Elevator start and stop within 2 seconds, and the LED display indicates F16 error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 4

<Reason and Solution>

1. If traction machine brake open signal is not inputted to MCPU Board 2 seconds after
starting, elevator shall be stopped and start one more time.
But traction machine brake open signal is not inputted, elevator shall be stopped and F16
error shall be displayed.

- Check the connector CT17 in TCB Board.

2-25
 Error Code: F26 Brake Error (2) Address : 0425H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

Elevator start and stop within 2 seconds, and the LED display indicates F16 error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 4

<Reason and Solution>

1. If traction machine brake open signal is not inputted to MCPU Board 2 seconds after
starting, elevator shall be stopped and F26 error shall be displayed.

- Check the connector CT17 in TCB Board.

Error Code: F17 ULS and DLS Error Address : 0447H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

Elevator stop suddenly and the LED display indicates F17 error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 3

<Reason and Solution>

1. If ULS or DLS signal is not inputted to MCPU Board on the way to operating, elevator shall
be stopped suddenly and F17 error shall be displayed.

- Check the contacts of ULS and DLS switches in hoistway(trunk).

- Check the connector of CT1, CT2 of TCB Board.

2-26
 Error Code: F27 PLU and PLD Error Address : 0448H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

Elevator stop suddenly and the LED display indicates F17 error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 3

<Reason and Solution>

1. If PLUL or PLDL signal is not inputted to MCPU Board on the way to , elevator shall be
stopped suddenly and F27 error shall be displayed.

- Check the contacts of PLUL and PLDL switches in hoistway(trunk).

- Check the connector of CT1, CT2 of TCB Board.

Landing Control
Error Code: F37 Address : 0445H Reference Drawing :
Device(LCD) Error

<Trouble>

Elevator decelerates very long time and stops before landing floor level, the LED display
indicates F37 error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 6

<Reason and Solution>

1. When elevator decelerates longer than 15 seconds, F37 error shall be displayed.

- Check the data for deceleration in Inverter.

- Check the data for deceleration data of MCPU Board with dip switches.

- Check the speed(RPM) of traction motor using the key pad for inverter.

- Check the operational status between the Landing Control Device(LCD) sensors on car
and beam cutting vanes in hoistway(trunk).

2-27
 Error Code: F47 Re-level Error Address : 03E1H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

Elevator cannot stop in door zone, and the LED display indicates F47 error.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 6

<Reason and Solution>

1. When elevator stops and car door is opened at some landing floor, and two ULA and DLA
sensors are not energized, the elevator moves to up or down direction to reach the landing
level.
In this time, operating time of elevator is over than 5 seconds continuously, elevator shall
be stopped and the LED display shall be displayed F47 error.

- Check the signals of ULA and DLA sensors on car.

Error Code: F57 Deceleration Error Address : 0421H Reference Drawing :

<Trouble>

When elevator stops at top or bottom terminal floor and the LED display indicates F57 error.
But F57 error is disappeared after car door closing.

<Reference Drawing>

COL 3, COL 11

<Reason and Solution>

1. When elevator decelerates by final limit switch in hoistway(trunk), F57 error be displayed.
If it decelerates by encoder signal, F57 error shall not displayed.

- Check the distance of final limit switches of the PLUL and PLDL in hoistway(trunk).

- Check the encoder data.

2-28
C. MAINTENANCE Page

1. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION TIME ----------------- 3-1

2. TABLE FOR LUBRICATING OIL & GREASE ---------------------------- 3-3

3. ESCAPE METHOD IN AN EMERGENCY ---------------------------------- 3-4

4. RESCUE METHOD & CAUTIONS IN AN EMERGENCY -------------- 3-5

5. MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENTS IN CAR -------- 3-6

6. MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION OF

EQUIPMENTS AT UPPER PART OF CAR -------------------------------- 3-7

7. MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION

INSIDE HOISTWAY -------------------------------------------------------------- 3-10

8. MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION

AT MACHINE ROOM ----------------------------------------------------------- 3-12

9. MAINTENANCE STATION ON CAR ---------------------------------------- 3-15

10. SAFETY GEAR ------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-16

11. EXCHANGE METHOD OF WIRE ROPE --------------------------------- 3-21

1. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION TIME

Periodical Maintenance
and Inspection Time
Division Item
12
1 Month 3 Month 6 Month
Month
Operating Panel and Interphone ○
Equipments Car Door ○
in car Emergency Escape Exit ○
Fluorescent and Emergency Lamp ○
Maintenance Station on car ○
LCD Landing Sensor for Levelling ○
Emergency Exit Switch ○
Safety Gear for Car & Counterweight ○
Wire Rope ○
Car Guide Shoe ○
Oiler ○
Car Door Machine and Gate Switch ○
Guide Rail for car & counterweight ○
Equipments
Travelling Cable Clamp ○
at upper
Door Interlocking Switch at each floor ○
part of car
Up & Down Limit and Final Limit
○
Switches and Cam
Counterweight ○
Vane for LCD Landing Sensor ○
Slack Rope Switch ○
Overload Switch ○
Lock Magnet (Retiring Cam) ○
Hand Lamp and Receptacle ○
Cage Fan ○

3-1
 Periodical Maintenance
& Inspection Time
Division Item
12
1 Month 3 Month 6 Month
Month
Pit Switch ○
Governor Tension Device and Switch
○
Equipments for Car and Counterweight
in trunk Counterweight and Spring Buffers ○
Branch Junction Boxes ○
Hatch Junction Box (if applicable) ○
Traction Machine ○
Machine Brake ○
Motor ○
Governor for Car and Counterweight ○
Wire Rope ○
Interlocking Mechanism on the
Equipments ○
Governors and Switches
in machine
Control Panel ○
room
Governor Rope ○
Main Switch (in control panel) ○
Interphone (or Auto Telephone) ○
Emergency Exit and Switch in Pulley
○
Room
Pulleys in Pulley Room ○
The maintenance and inspection operations must be carried out in
accordance with the detailed description of the manual.

3-2
GENERAL LAYOUT OF MARINE ELEVATOR EQUIPMENTS

3-3
2. TABLE FOR LUBRICATING OIL & GREASE

Name of Installation Q'ty Name of oil company

Lubricant
machine place & Time CALTEX BP SHELL ESSO MOBIL
6 liters,
3 months
later after
the first MEROP GP SPARTA MOBIL
Gear Machine OMALA
Gear oil installation. A -XP N GEAR
case room OIL 230
After that 320 320 EP 320 632
exchange
it every
12 months.
ALVANI
300 g MULTIF LS- A MOBILU
Machine BEACON
Grease Bearing every AX EP GREAS X
room EP 2
1 month EP 2 2 E EP 2
EP2
Above
Guide car &
rail counter-
weight
Cage
Car &
door
car
Safety
Machin frame 2 liters HP
device WAY TONNA FEBIS VACTRA
e every 20
Governor LUBE OIL T68 K68 OIL 2
oil 1 month C
& Machine
Governor room &
tension pit
sheave
Around
entrance Entrance
door

3-4
3. ESCAPE METHOD IN AN EMERGENCY
Do not panic when locked in car. Elevator is not air-tight structure. If the elevator stops
suddenly during the operation because of some reason, the passenger inside the car can
escape by himself. But if possible, wait for help in the car. If there is no way but to escape by
oneself, Please follow the next procedure.
(1) Press “ALARM” button on the car operating panel (OPB). Pick up the common battery
telephone and tell the others that you locked up in car.
(2) If there is no one to tell, press “EMERGENCY STOP” switch. Break the key-box glass
and take the escape key.
(3) Climb up to the car escape hatch. By using key, open the escape hatch and climb up to
the car top. Do not close the car escape hatch.
(4) Escape ladder is provided in trunk. Climb up to the trunk escape hatch and escape.
(5) Pressing the “EMERGENCY STOP” or opening of car escape hatch prevents unexpected
operation of elevator.

4. RESCUE METHOD AND CAUTIONS IN AN EMERGENCY

(1) It is safer to rescue locked person from outside than let him escape himself.
(2) To rescue, not less than 2 persons are needed.
(3) First turn-off the main switch installed in machine room.
(4) Confirm the location of car. It is possible by checking main ropes (there are floor marking
lines on the main ropes) or seeing the car after opening the emergency exit.
(5) If the car is on the floor level ±200mm, it is possible to open the door by hand at the
hall. Open the landing door (or sliding door) by using door release key.
(6) In case the car is out of the range describe above (floor level ±200mm), rescue operation
is needed.
Follow the rescue procedure as below with FULL CARE.
a) Make the locked person easy. By using common battery telephone located in the
machine room, one can talk to person in the car.
b) Release the brake by pulling up the brake handle mounted on the brake unit.
By releasing brake, the motor shaft shall be turned to left or right direction because of
the unbalance of car and counterweight. And insert the motor turning handle on
shaft at motor end side tightly.
c) Turn the turning handle to the “easier to turn” direction (one of the direction is more
easy to turn because there is an unbalance of car and counterweight).
d) Turn the turning handle until the car reaches floor level. After the car reaches the floor
level, release the brake handle to stop the car.
e) Rescue the locked person as described in (5).

3-5
 Fig. 3.1 Traction Machine & Turning Handle

Following plate for rescue method procedures shall be mounted in elevator machine room.

Fig. 3.2 Name Plate for Rescue Method in an Emergency

3-6
5. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT IN CAR

Name of unit Item Description Remark

1. While he car moves up or downwards, push

the emergency stop button and confirm that the
elevator stops abruptly.
2. Push the emergency alarm button and confirm that
the audible and visible alarm signal is operated
normally.
1. Operating
3. In the elevators provided with an
panel & Operating
emergency interphone, confirm that the interphone
interphone test
is operated normally.
in car
4. Run the elevator from bottom to top and check the
direction lamps and car position lamps
are illuminated properly
5. To inspect inside the car operating panel, take off
the face plate after loosing the screws. Check the
connections of components and terminals. Tighten
or rewire if necessary.
1. Get on the car and close the hinged landing door.
Operating Do not close the car door and push up(△) or
test of down(▽) button.
2. Car door
gate In this case the elevator shall not move.
switch 2. Cleaning the car door sealing.
3. Put some oil to car door pin (connecting parts).
Safety
3. Emergency switch Refer to the clause “MAINTENANCE AND
exit operating INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT IN CAR”
test
4. Illuminating
Flashing 1. Carry out the illuminating test by turning on and off
fluorescent
test of the “LIGHT” switch on the operating panel.
&
ceiling 2. Check whether the bulb and sockets are good.
emergency
lamp Fix or exchange, if needed.
lamp

3-7
6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF UNITS AT UPPER PART OF CAR
*** NOTE ***
Before entering the elevator trunk, change the operation mode from “MAUTO” to “MCS” on
TCB Board in Control Panel. Then, Hall Indicating Panel would indicate “OUT OF SERVICE”.
And, any call for the deck would not be registered.
At least two(2) persons are required when working on the car top.
1. Check where the elevator is.
2. Open the hatch door of one floor higher then elevator is.
(If the elevator is at 2nd floor, open the 3rd floor hatch door)
3. Keep the hatch door open until the other person switches "AUTO/INSP" switch on car top
to "INSP" position.
4. Close the hatch door after re-check of "AUTO/INSP" switch position.
5. Light the hand lamp provided on the car.
THERE ARE A LOT OF PROJECTED MATERIALS ALONG THE HOIST WAY.
SO BE CAREFUL DURING THE MAINTENANCE OPERATION.
Name of unit Item Detail Remark
1. Carry out the ascending and descending
operation by pressing Up(green) or Down(red)
button.
1. Maintenance
Operating 2. Turn the change-over switch on the station from
Station on
test On to Off and check the switches on the
car
station.
Check the condition of contacts, connection
and fitting bolts of panel.
2. Emergency Refer to item “MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
Escape Exit Inspection OF EQUIPMENT IN CAR” for emergency escape
Switch exit switch.
1. Check the fitting condition, loosening of blots etc.
Fasten them, if needed.
2. Refer to Table for lubricating oils for the details
3. Safety Gear Inspection
of lubrication to the related parts and oils.
3. Refer to “SAFETY GEAR” for the details of
adjusting method and mechanism.
Check whether the tension condition of wire rope is
fixed or not.
Operate the car manually as described above and
Inspection stop it at the position where the counterweight and
4. Wire Rope & car adjoining.
Adjustment Pull the one of several wire ropes with hand after
fastening with another rope vertically. Then check
whether the horizontal force is applied uniformly to
each rope or not.

3-8
 Name of unit Item Detail Remark
Refer to the attached drawing and check the
following points.
1. Dimensions in the drawing.
- (A) : 20mm
- (B) : 0～0.5mm
․Vibration
The above is the basic dimensions.
of car
Slight adjustment can be made by adjusting
Inspection ․Injurious
5. Car Guide nuts.
& influence
Shoe 2. If (D) is damaged remarkably due to wear, it
Adjustment over
shall be required to exchange material for new
safety
one. Material is polyethylene.
gear
The operation for guide shoe at underside of
car shall be carried out in the operation inside
the pit in Item MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT IN TRUNK.
Its method is same as above.
1. Check the quantity of oil.
2. If dripping the oil on guide rail is not good,
the most possible cause is the damage of
6. Oiler Inspection
cotton rope(thread). In this case, wash it with
benzene, gasoline etc. or exchange it for new
one.
Inspection Refer to "Car door" of item “MAINTENANCE
7. Gate Switch & AND INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT IN
Adjustment CAR“ for details.
1. Check whether the rail is secured strongly to
8. Guide Rail Inspection the bracket with clips and bolts or not.
2. Difference in joint of rails.
1. Check whether the cable is damaged or not. If
necessary, repair it with tape.
9. Traveling
Inspection 2. Fixing status of cable(s) on car top and cable
Cable
trough (duct).
3. Fixing status of cable clamps in cable trough.
10. Interlock Refer to item “ADJUSTING METHOD FOR
Inspection
Switch INTERLOCKING SWITCH”.
&
at each
Adjustment
Landing Door
11. Up / Down Refer to item “MAINTENANCE AND
Inspection
Limit Switch INSPECTION IN TRUNK”.
&
& Final Limit
Adjustment
Switch
12. Counter Loosening of bolts at respective parts.
Inspection
-weight The oiler is as shown in the previous item.
3-9
 E
T
A
L
P
E
O
H
S )
E D
D (
I F
U O
G L
I
A

Fig. 3.3 Car Guide Shoe & Oiler

T
E
D
E
M
A

3-10
R
E F
O R
H A
S C
R E
L E D
I
I
A L U
I G
) R O
D m E
( m
m 5 ] D
I
m .
0 G U
2
~ B G
±
0 0 [
2 =
= ]
] B
A [
[
2
6
7. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION IN TRUNK
Operate the car and open the car and landing doors at the lowest floor. One worker shall
short-circuit the door switches for doorway at landing while another worker remained in the
car. Then, ascend the car about 1.5m. To short-circuiting the door switches, push the
interlock switch and door safety switch with hands. And, the worker remained inside the car
close the car door and push floor button (2 floors shall do). When the car goes up
approximately 1.5m, the worker who has short-circuited it at landing release door switch.
Then, the car shall stop.

Name of unit Item Detail Remark

1. Inside pit Cleaning 1. Remove water and dust from the inside of pit.
1. Check the fitting condition. Fasten them, if
necessary.
2. Check whether the up/down limit switches and
final limit switch installed to the car guide rail is
actuated correctly by the limit switch cam installed to
the car.
(It is not required when there is any error between car
floor level and landing floor one) If necessary, open
the front cover of switch box and check the contact
2. Up / down
Inspection condition inside. In this case, switch roller arm is not
limit switch
& required to be removed.
& Final limit
Adjustment
switch
* If there is an error in the level at the lowest floor
and uppermost floor, measure the error distance
and re-adjust the position of limit switch(es) up
and down.

The level error is caused sometimes by wear

of Brake shoe. Refer to Item “MECHANISM OF
BRAKE AND ADJUSTMENT METHOD” in this
manual.

3-11
 Name of unit Item Detail Remark

1. Check the fitting condition. Fasten them,

if necessary.
* The tension equipment tensions the governor
wire rope towards the underside of the elevating
way.
3. Governor Inspection
Sometimes the whole tension equipment is to
tension &
be slides to the lower side gradually due to
sheave unit Adjustment
extension of wire rope. Make periodical inspection
so that the bracket and tension equipment body
are disconnected from the car guide rail. If there is
any possibility of disconnection, it is required to
adjust and move the bracket extending from car
guide rail toward underside.
4. Car guide Refer to item “MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF
Inspection
shoe EQUIPMENT ON CAR” for the details.
1. The gap between the lowest end of counterweight
and spring buffer shall be within 200～250mm.
2. When it is less than 200mm (due to extension of wire
5. Clearance of rope), refit the spring of the shackle again.
Inspection
counterweight When it is less than 200mm, and if the adjusting nut
&
and spring of the shackle rod at wire rope socket part that is
Adjustment
buffer hanging the counterweight is tightened, adjustment is
needed.
Refer to Item “EXCHANGING METHOD OF WIRE
ROPE” in separate item.

3-12
8. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION AT MACHINE ROOM

Name of unit Item Details Remark

Loosening
1. Traction machine body and traction machine fitting
of fixing
bolts.
bolts
Oil leakage 1. Exchange the oil seal “O” ring and packings
1. Check the quantity of traction machine gear oil.
Oil quantity
2. Refer to “TABLE FOR LUBRICATING OIL &
&
GREASE” for exchanging of oils. It shall be done
Lubrication
periodically.
1. Wearing condition of main sheave
1. Traction
* Check the wearing condition of grooves of main
machine
sheave. The wearing condition varies according to the
Main tension of wire ropes which is changed according to
sheave variation in load applied to each wire rope.
2. For adjustment on tension condition of wire rope, refer
to Item “MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION OF
EQUIPMENT ON CAR”.
(Note) Carry the operations after making preparations in Items 1)～9)
out of the separate item 12 “EXCHANGE METHOD FOR WIRE
ROPES□.
2. Machine Inspection Refer to Item “MECHANISM OF BRAKE & ADJUSTING
Brake Adjustment METHOD” for details.
1. Connection condition inside terminal box.
3. Motor Inspection 2. Refer to “TABLE FOR LUBRICATION OIL” for oil
supply to the bearing parts.
4. Governor
Inspection Refer to the above mentioned wire rope
rope
5. Control Inspection &
Refer to separate item
panel Adjustment

3-13
Name of unit Item Details Remark

1. When rusting is recognized in wire rope ;

* Rob the rusted part with grease with high viscosity until
the rust wiped off. But do not apply too much grease to
the wire rope. If the grease applied too much, a slipping
shall happen in the wire rope and traction machine main
sheave and resulting level error.

2. When the wire of wire rope is damaged ;

* Count the number of broken wires appeared
between one rope lay. If the counted number should
exceed the following number, rope must be exchanged.
(The definition of rope lay is the distance that the strand
winds around the axis of rope in on turn completely)
Inspection
․When broken wires are distributed uniformly
Decision on
6. Wire rope between strands, in case the number of broken wires
exchanging
of rope lay exceeds 24～30 at the worst part of rope.
time
․If the distribution of broken wires is not
uniform between stands but broken wires are
concentrated in one or two stands, in cage the number
of broken wires of rope lay exceeds the value of
8～12.
․When the number of broken wires bear one strand
is 4～5, in case the number of all broken wires
exceeds 8～12.
․When the actual diameter is lower than the
following dimensions ;
- Diameter at normal case : 12mm
- Diameter when it becomes slender : 11.2mm
․Refer to separates item “Exchange Method of
Rope” for exchanging of ropes.
7. Interlocking 1. Oiling
Inspection
mechanism * Interlocking part shaft on car.
&
on car for Refer to the separate Item “SAFETY GEAR” for details.
Adjustment
device

3-14
* LUBRICATING AND GREASING OF TRACTION MACHINE
1) The worm gear is to be oiled with oil according to the scheme, chapter 2 TABLE FOR
LUBRICATING OIL & GREASE. The amount of oil in the gear box can be controlled by
means of the oil level indicator on the gear box.
After 3,000 hours working time the gear box should be emptied, cleaned, and refilled with
new oil.
2) Ball bearings must be greased with good acid free grease, where oil nipples are found. The
outer bearing is to be greased after 2,000 hours working time.
Before greasing, the bearing cap has to be removed.
(Caution) To avoid accidents during inspection and repairs be sure to switch-off the
electric supply at the main switch.

9. MAINTENANCE STATION ON CAR

Carry out the operation at the car top used for maintenance and inspection of the elevator. (It
is very important for inspection inside the elevating passage (rails, wire ropes, vanes,
brackets, weight and other devices))
The maintenance station consists of 2 push buttons and 3 change-over switches.

Switch Type Name Plate Function Description

Change-over Elevator safety
EMERG. STOP (Emergency stop switch)
Switch circuit On-Off
Automatic / Manual
Change-over MAINT. (Automatic and manual change-
operation circuit
Switch SWITCH over switch)
change-over
Up running with
Push Button UP Manual-up button
manual speed
Down running with
Push Button DOWN Manual-down button
manual speed
Door controller
Toggle Switch DOOR Door switch
powerOn-Off

When it is changed over to “MAINT.” and operation is carried out on the car, the position of
EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH must be Off and DOOR SWITCH must be Off.
When it placed at position “MAINT.”, it does not respond to the call from each floor and no
automatic operation is carried out. With the AUTO/MANUAL change-over switch on the
maintenance station on the car placed at position “MAINT.”, operation is carried out by
means of UP/DOWN push buttons.
As they (UP / DOWN buttons) are self return type, when the push button is released, the
elevator shall be stopped. And no operation is carried out if both floor door and car door at
each floor are not closed.
3-15
10. SAFETY GEAR
10.1 The elevator car must be suspended by more than 3 wire ropes which is
required to have a safety factor of over 12 according to the safety codes,
resulting in eliminating the possibility of broken off the main ropes.
For some reason or other, if the elevator car should overspeed, exceeding the
rated speed, the governor switch shall be operated, resulting in shutting off the
electric safety circuit to the elevator motor and operating the electromagnetic
brake and then, stopping car. At the same time, the safety gear shall be operated,
resulting in getting a grip on the guide rail and stopping the car safety.

* Gradual safety gear for car

This device is used for elevators of which rated speeds are more than 60 m/min.
The governor switch is operated when the car speed is faster than 130% of the rated
speed. The gradual safety gear is operated when it is faster than 140% of the rated speed.
This device is used for elevators at high speeds. The stop distance is different according
to operating speed but deceleration is set to 1G or less.

* Description for mechanism (Refer to reference Fig. 3.4 )

By rotating centrifugal force of the governor sheave ①, the weight ③ is kicked up and the
switch ⑤ is operated at 130% of the rated speed. When the centrifugal force is increased
and reaching 140% of rated speed or so, it shall engage with the ratchet ④, resulting in
pressing the wire rope against sheave by shoe ②, and stopping the operation of the rope
and operation the governor rope holding device of the car. The gib pushed between the
rails ⑧. The springs ⑨ at outside of the gib ⑥ are compressed by the car weight,
resulting in obtaining a maximum force of stopping and sliding.

10.2 Adjusting method (At least 3 workers shall be required)

1) Stop the car at the uppermost floor.
2) Climb on the car from the emergency exit from the inside of the car and push the
change-over switch on the maintenance station on the car.
3) Remove the pin ⑩ and make an actuating lever ⑪ free.
4) With one worker remain on the car, turn the governor sheave① with hand.
Revolution must be in the direction that the actuation lever ⑪ descends in the elevating
passage.
5) Apply a revolution counter to the governor sheave. Confirm that the governor switch is
operated when car speed is faster than 130% of the rated speed, and that the gradual
safety GEAR is operated when it is faster than 140% of the rated speed. Adjustment
must be made on the spring tension condition.

3-16
6) In this case, care must be taken in such a way that the joint plate ⑫ does not strike
against the governor tension pulley installed at the bottom part of the elevating way.
7) Reset the governor switch ⑤ as it was.
8) Connect the actuating lever ⑪ as it was.
9) Install the governor of which speed has been adjusted fully.
Incidentally, at the time of inspection after completion, inspection is made.
Accordingly, it is not required to adjust at normal maintenance and inspection time.
10) Push the change-over switch in the maintenance station on the car at position MAN
from AUTO. Then, push the down button until the car reaches to the lowest floor.
11) Check the loosening of bolts at respective parts on the car.
12) Lift the actuating lever ⑪ and check whether or not the lever is interlocked
smoothly. In this case, if there is any loss in connection of transfer rod ⑫, no catching
operation will be carried out at both sides simultaneously, resulting in causing a one
sided operation. Accordingly, check it in such a way that there is no gap between
actuating lever ⑪ and transfer rod nut.
13) Open the landing door at the lowest floor from the inside of car. One worker must
short-circuit the door switch of landing door. In this case, close the car door.
14) By two workers in addition to one who operate the maintenance operation on the car
and operate the elevator approximately 2.5m up by means of the Up-push button on
the maintenance station on car.
15) Carry out the descending operation by means of the push button on the maintenance
station on car at the condition that the actuating lever ⑪ is raised up with hand.(The
landing door switch for entrance door must be kept short-circuited)
16) Simultaneously with biting of the gib ⑥ and stopping of car release the push button
and turn off the change-over switch on the maintenance station
17) Go into the inside of pit and check the condition of the gib ⑥. If one sided application
condition should be caused, adjust it in such a manner as mentioned in item 13).
18) Short-circuit the landing door switch for entrance again and carry out the ascending
operation of the car. The governor catch clamp shall be disconnected and returned.
19) Check the damage of the rail by the gib in the inside of pit. If scratches are found,
equally both at right and left sided of the rail, it means that the car is caught normally.
After inspection, correct the damage of the rail by means of a file.
20) Short-circuit the landing door switch for entrance door at landing and descend the car
once again. Then, stop the car approx. 1m above the entrance floor level at landing.
Then, check the condition of the gib. In this case, push the change-over switch on the
maintenance station on the car.
21) If one-sided application effect should be recognized, make adjustment in cooperation
with the worker located on the car at that condition.
22) Supply oil to the respective parts (revolving parts of shaft).

3-17
23) Close the entrance door after adjustment, turn off the change-over switch on the
maintenance station on the to “MAINT.” from “AUTO”.
24) Carry out the normal operation and confirm that there is nothing abnormal in
operational condition

3-18
Fig. 3.4 Car Safety , Governor & Governor Tension Sheave

3-19
10.3 INSTANTANEOUS SAFETY GEAR FOR COUNTERWEIGHT
At overspeed the speed governor ① shall, through the rope ② and the arm ③ on the safety
catch device make the rocking lever system ④ move. By this the rocker arms ④ in both
sides of the safety catch device shall move in upward direction, which, through a tension rod
⑤, forces the steel roll ⑥ in mesh between the wedge house ⑦ and the guide ⑧. The brake
force generated from the squeezing of the steel roll between the wedge housed and the
guide makes the lift car stop. The rope ② is kept tight by means of a tension weight ⑨,
mounted in the trunk bottom, and provided with a switch which is actuated and switches off
the current to the lift if the rope breaks or slackens.
The spring ⑩ keep the safety catch device resting during normal running. There must be no
gab between the compression spring ⑪ and the arm ③ which is secured by the rope clamps
⑫.

Fig. 3.5 Counterweight Safety Gear

3-20
11. EXCHANGE METHOD OF WIRE ROPE
1) Operate the car and stop it at the uppermost floor.
2) Turn off the main electric switch in machine room.
3) Open the landing door at the uppermost and lowest floor by emergency key.
4) Open the brake for hoisting. (Another worker must grip the motor turning handle inserted
on the traction motor shaft for prevention of revolution)
5) Turn the motor turning handle and descend the car 2m from the uppermost floor.
6) Provide a wood block at the lower part of the counterweight at inside of pit in the lowest
floor. (Refer to Fig. 3.7)
7) Turn the motor turning handles and operates the car in the ascending direction and
ascends the car until the wood block inside the pit comes in touch with the counterweight.
(When the wood block comes in touch with the counterweight, a slipping phenomenon
shall develop at traction sheave and wire rope, resulting in heavy revolution of the motor
turning handle)
8) Employing a chain block, lift the car frame from the upper part of the hoistway.
9) Secure it so that the governor machine pulley can not be revolved (If the chain block
should be disconnected or other unexpected accidents should be caused, it shall stop
the car by means of the Safety Gear immediately).
10) Remove the wire rope.
11) The new wire rope length to be 200mm shorter, then removed wire rope.
(Extension of wire is considered)
12) The end of wire rope in the thimble rod (socket) is bound at three binding points of it, for
it has not return of twist of wire rope.
13) The first binding point is called the cutting point, the second and last binding points are
called the fixed points of return of twist. The second binding point has approximately
110mm length from the first, and the last binding point has approximately 50mm length
from the second.
Notes)
․ Then binding wire is called the stopping wire of wire rope and made of iron wire.
․ The binding wire must be bound firm itself.
․ The end of binding wire are inserted between spaces of strands of wire rope.
․ The binding wire must be used the iron wire in any case.
14) Cut the wire rope after winding of the binding wire.
15) Pass the wire rope through the thimble rod (socket).
16) Remove first binding rope and widen the strand of the wire rope and remove the hemp
core nearest to second binding.
17) Wipe it off with gasoline or benzine for the purpose of removal of oil from the widened
strand of wire.
18) Bend to center each widened strand of wire rope approximately 50mm length at second
binding point and then, bundled them.

3-21
19) When wire rope is pulled out from the inside of socket, second binding wire shall appear
at outside of hole at end of socket last binding wire comes 50mm below it.
The second and last binding wire prevent loosening and swelling of strands.
20) After inserting the end of wire in the thimble rod (socket), babbitt metal (middle class or
under of the white metal) is melted by means of a gas burner and poured into it. In this
case, widen the strands of wire rope inside the thimble rod (socket) are widened like
chrysanthemum flower (Refer to reference drawing 6 and 7).
21) The wire rope consist of ;
․ Diameter : 12mm
․ Structure : 8 strand with 19 wire, center is hemp wire
․ Shearing stress : more than 5,900kg/mm
․ Material : steel
․ Remarks : Hemp wire includes oil
22) Provide wire rope both at car and counterweight sides and make the tensioning
condition fixed.
23) Remove the chain block hanging from the car and reset the governor machine.
24) Release the brake of traction machine and turn the electric motor with turning handle,
and then, descend the car approximately 200mm or 300mm.
Then, remove the wood block at underside of the counterweight.
25) Close the entrance door at the lowest floor.
26) Ascent the car and stop the traction machine a manner as 24) at the uppermost floor
level.
27) Carry out the reciprocating operation between uppermost and lowest floors
automatically two or three times. Then, adjust the tensioning condition of the wire rope
in reference with Item “MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT ON CAR”

3-22
Dimension for Binding Rope End (Unit : mm)
Rope Diameter 12 14 16 18 20
A 15
B 15 20
C 15
S 100 115 125 140 155
T 50

Fig. 3.6 Rope Binding

3-23
Fig. 3.7 Wood Block Installation at Lower Part of Counterweight in Pit

3-24
D. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT (INVERTER) Page

1. INTRODUCTION OF HIVD-700GS INVERTER--------------------------- 4-1

2. HIVD-700GS INVERTER CHECK-UP --------------------------------------- 4-2

3. DESCRIPTION OF TERMINAL FUNCTIONS ----------------------------- 4-6

4. HHT (Hand Held Terminal) OPERATION FOR INVERTER ---------- 4-8

5. MENU OF HHT (In case of Inverter Capacity 11kW) ------------------ 4-13

6. FAULT OF HIVD-700GS INVERTER ---------------------------------------- 4-17

APPENDIX : SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM OF INVERTER -------------- 4-24

iv
1. INTRODUCTION OF HIVD-700GS INVERTER

The Layout of Motor Drive Unit (Inverter) is as following figure 4.1.

Figure 4.1 Layout of Motor Drive Unit (Inverter)

The main circuit includes the converter as a rectifier of AC power, the reactor to decrease
ripples of DC power, the condenser of big capacity and device to absorb the regenerating
current on braking resistor, and IPM DSP (Digital Signal Processing) inverter changing from
DC voltage to AC voltage of variable voltage(VV) and variable Frequency(VF).
And the control circuit consists of the vector operation part using the micro-processor and
sine wave PWM (Pulse Width Modulation).

VVVF (Variable Voltage Variable Frequency) elevator system adopted the inverter unit with
the micro-processor based PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control system for its
simultaneous control of the voltage and frequency.

With VVVF elevator system, the power consumption especially during the acceleration is
greatly reduced compared to the primary voltage control elevator system of the conventional
AC elevators.
As the VVVF elevator system supplies the most optimum voltage and frequency to the motor
continuously, the efficiency of the motor in speed and torque has been highly improved.

4-1
On Board Power Supply : 3 Phase-440V-60Hz

(Input Power Waveform)

Elevator
Control Panel
INVERTER

(Output Power Waveform)

Traction Motor
(3 Phase-360V-51Hz)

Figure 4.2 Configuration of Output Power Waveform by Inverter

2. HIVD-700GS INVERTER CHECK-UP

Before checking the inverter, turn off NFB1 for main power feeding and confirm that the
discharge lamp in the inverter is Off.

2.1 Check-Up of Wiring at Motor Drive Unit

1) Verify that the input power (3 phase 440V, 60Hz) is same as incoming power to Inverter
(Terminal Name R, S, T).
2) Be careful for wiring of input line R.S.T and output line U.V.W not to be changed and
check the wiring and connection.

4-2
Figure 4.3 Wiring of Inverter Input / Output Cable

4-3
 2.2 Wiring for Rotary Encoder
1) For wiring of rotary encoder lines, confirm the signal of each line and do wiring.

ENCODER

TO MCPU BOARD
MOTOR
PGM PGP PB PA
(CM2-4) (CM2-1) (CM2-3) (CM2-2)

CONTROL PANEL MOTOR TERMINAL BOX

INVERTER TERMINAL BLOCKS
TERMINAL
PA PA (TM02) A+
PB PB (TM03) B+
PGP PGP (TM01) PGP
PGM PGM (TM04) PGM
SHIELD GND
SHIELDED ENCODER
TB2 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
LINE LEAD CABLE

SHIELDED
LINE

BUS-BAR FOR GROUNDING

GROUNDING
AT ON-BOARD BULKHEAD

Figure 4.4 Wiring between Encoder & Control Panel

Cautions : Be careful that changing the wiring of encoder cable lines (+15VDC―PGP,
GND―PGM), can cause the encoder unit to be damaged.

4-4
 SHIELDED WIRE SHIELDED WIRE

(O) (X)
The shielded wire from one end of the shield cable should be earthed (grounded).
2) If the phase lines for encoder signal (PA, PB) are inter-changed, speed feedback
and rotation of motor shall not enable.
Reconfirm the wiring of encoder cable lines before electrical power On.
3) Shielded cable should be connected to the bus-bar for field ground in control
panel.

2.3 Wiring for Thermistor in Motor

1) NTC (Negative Thermo Coupler) Thermistors are provided in the motor winding
for vector controlling by inverter.
2) If the thermistor line (THC, TH1) is not connected, starting shock of traction
motor may be happened.
Confirm the wiring of thermistor line before electrical power On.

Figure 4.5 Wiring between Thermistor and Inverter

4-5
3. DESCRIPTION OF TERMINAL FUNCTIONS
3.1 Input Terminals for HIVD-700GS Inverter

Item Label Function Description

Common for
CM Common terminal for contacts input
contact input
UP Forward operation Terminal of FWD - CM
(FWD) and stop command → ON : Forward, OFF : Stop
DN Backward operation Terminal of REV - CM
(REV) and stop command → ON : Reverse, OFF : Stop
Terminal of RST - CM
Control RST Alarm reset ․ON : Reset of the activated error after
input removing of fault condition
signal LU(X1) Selective input 1
Multi-purpose control input selection
(Contact) LD(X2) Selective input 2
: Multi-speed Selection
HU(X3) Selective input 3
(Speed 1, Speed 2 and Speed 4)
Selective input 4
HD(X4) and
(not used)
Torque Bias Switch
Selective input 5
MD(X5) (TQ＿BIAS＿1, TQ＿BIAS＿2)
(not used) (Marine elevator shall apply Multi-speed
Selective input 6 Selection by using LU, LD, HU)
AT(X6)
(not used)
Motor TH1
Terminals for motor
thermistor Terminals for motor NTC thermistor
THC thermistor
input
PGM Common for encoder Terminal for common of PGP, PA, and PB
PGP Power for encoder Terminal for Encoder power (+15V DC)
Encoder A-phase signal of
PA
input encoder Terminals for Encoder A-phase and
B-phase signal of B-phase signal
PB
encoder

4-6
3.2 Output Terminals for HIVD-700GS Inverter

Item Label Function Description

Common of
CME Common terminal for Y1, Y2, and Y3
transistor output
Open-collector output 1
Y1
(Speed existing) Multi-purpose control input selection
Open-collector output 2No zero speed (ZERO_SPEED) Allowable load
Y2
(Speed agreement) Speed agreement (SPEED_AGREE) : 27V DC,
Control Open-collector output 3Motor Run (RUN) max. 50mA
Y3
output (Inverter operation) Pre-detection of overload (INV_OL)
(Contact) Pre-detection of motor over heat
RYA Relay output of
(MOTOR_OH)
inverter error detecting
RYC Contact
30A Output of the activated state of capacity
30B Alarm output inverter faults : 220V AC,
(All faults) ․Terminal 30A ― 30C ON : Normal 500mA
30C
․Terminal 30B ― 30C OFF : Fault

4-7
4. HHT (Hand Held Terminal) OPERATION FOR INVERTER
4.1 HHT (HHT-2000) Function

B1
B5
B8
CONNECTOR

HHT-2000 LCD DISPLAY

UP

ESC ENT KEYS FOR DATA CHANGING

DN

HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,LTD.

Figure 4.6 HHT Key Pad

LCD DISPLAY
2 x 16 (Total : 32 Characters) - Press to enter sub directory
- Press to save Data changed
by UP and DOWN keys.

ESC UP DOWN ENTER

- Press to increase Item No.

- Press to enter sub directory
- Press to go out without saving
Data changed by UP and DOWN
keys.
- Press to decrease Data.
- Press to decrease Item No.
- Press to increase Data.

Note) When Inverter Power is Off, connect HHT to Inverter Main PC Board.

4-8
4.2 HHT Menu
POWER ON
ESC
RESET

ESC
RESET

ESC ESC
RESET RESET

01 MONITOR 01 BASIC SPEED_FBK

ENTER ENTER
SPEED_COM

ESC
RESET

02 I/O FRESX123456Y123L
ENTER

ESC
RESET

03 ERROR ERROR1
ERROR2
ENTER

ESC ESC
RESET RESET

02 PROGRAM 01 CONTROL 01_MAX_RPM

ENTER ENTER
02_EL_SPEED

ESC
RESET

02 INTERFACE 01_X1_SELECT
ENTER
02_X2_SELECT

ESC
RESET

03 MOTOR 01_MOTOR_SELECT
ENTER
02_PG_PULSE
P
A ESC
S RESET
S
04 FACTORY W 01_AI1_OFFSET
O 02_AI1_GAIN
R ENTER
D

HHT Menu of HIVD-700GS shown in Figure 4.7 is a tree structure based.

- Root directory has monitored and program modes.
- Monitor mode has basic, I/O, and error modes.
- Program mode has control, interface, motor and factory modes.
Each mode in monitor and program has it's own menu according to the character.

4.3 Initial LCD Display

When control power is on and any fault doesn't happen, LCD display speed feedback as
Figure 4.8. Initial LCD Display is as follows.

SPEED F BK
0 . 0 RPM
Figure 4.8 LCD Initial Display

4-9
4.4 Mode Selection
Cursor in LCD display indicates a present mode.

01 MO N I T O R
02 P R OGR A M
When you enter a sub menu, press
CURSOR ENTER
the ENTER key as shown in
01 BAS I C Figure 4.9.
02 I /O
Figure 4.9 Moving to a Selected Sub Menu

01 BAS I C
02 I / 0
When you come out to a previously
CURSOR ESC
selected menu, press the ESC key
01 MO N I T O R as shown in Fig. 4.10.
02 P R OGR A M
Figure 4.10 Moving to a Previously Selected Menu
When you choose a menu in a same directory level, press the Up or Down key.

4.5 Data Setting in Program Mode

02 EL SPEED
30 MP M
ENTER
Figure 4.11 Data Setting in
Program Menu
02 EL SPEED After selecting a program mode
30 MP M menu with the Up and Down
keys, press the ENTER key to
enter a data setting mode.
02 EL SPEED Change Data as you need, and
60 MP M press ENTER key to save.
If you do not want to save, press
ENTER SAVING DATA
the ESC key.
02 EL SPEED
60 MP M

4-10
4.6 Data Initialization

99 CNT & I NT F DA T A
OF F
ENTER

Figure 4.12 Initialize CONT

99 CNT & I NT F DA T A -ROL and INTERFACE
OF F Data
When data initialization for
CONTROL & INTERFACE
modes is need, select
99 CNT & I NT F DA T A
PROGRAM / CONTROL /
ON CNT & INTF_DATA and
ENTER set On.
Then all of the data in
DA T A I N I T I NG CONTROL & INTERFACE
are re-installed as the
======== 20%
default data.

99 CNT & I NT F DA T A
OF F

4.8 Changed Data Alarm

When the data of PROGRAM mode is changed from standard mode, LCD display “ * “ in the
first line and 3 column.

Display changed data

0 8 * A CC
0 . 72 M/ S E C 2

Figure 4.13 Changed Data Display

4-11
5. MEMU OF HHT (In case of Inverter capacity : 11kw)
5.1 Control Function
Motor : 5.5kW (SHIDAE) Rated Speed : 30m/min Gear Ratio : 1/88
Main Sheave : Φ570 Max. RPM : 1474

Item Function Name Data Range Initial Value Unit

01_MAX_RPM 0～2400 1474 RPM
02_EL_SPEED 30～300 30 m/min
03_LONG_RUN_RPM 0～2400 1474 RPM
04_SHORT_RUN_RPM 0～2400 1474 RPM
05_INSPECT_PRM 0～2400 884 RPM
06_CREEP_RPM 0～2400 123 RPM
07_RELEVEL_PRM 0～2400 0 RPM
08_ACC 0.05～20.00 0.68 m/sec2
09_DEC1 0.05～20.00 0.68 m/sec2
10_DEC2 0.05～20.00 0.10 m/sec2
11_EMCY_DEC 0.05～20.00 0.75 m/sec2
12_S_ACC_START 0.0～50.0 32 %
13_S_ACC_ARRIVE 0.0～50.0 31 %
01 Control
14_S_DEC_START 0.0～50.0 31 %
15_S_DEC_ARRIVE 0.0～50.0 33 %
16_ASR_P_GAIN 0.0～100.0 5.0 -
17_ASR_I_GAIN 0.0～100.0 10.0 -
18_FEED_FWD_GAIN 0.0～20000.0 3000 -
19_FLT_SPD_FEED 0.0～5000.0 1000 Hz
20_FLT_ASR_OUT 0.0～5000.0 1000 Hz
21_TQ_BIAS_SELEC 1: NO_USE 1 -
22_TQ_BIAS_LV_1F -100.0～100.0 0.1 %
23_TQ_BIAS_LV_2F -100.0～100.0 0.1 %
24_TQ_BIAS_LV_1R -100.0～100.0 1.000 %
25_TQ_BIAS_LV_2R -100.0～100.0 0.000 %
99_INIT_DATA ON / OFF OFF -

4-12
5.2 Interface Function

Item Function Name Data Range Initial Value Unit

01_X1_SELECT SPEED_1 SPEED_1 -
02_X2_SELECT SPEED_2 SPEED_2 -
03_X3_SELECT SPEED_4
SPEED_4 -
(Multi-speed input)
04_X4_SELECT TQ_SET TQ_BIAS_1 -
(DI Torque set)
05_X5_SELECT TQ_BIAS_2 -
TQ_BIAS_1
TQ_BIAS_2
06_X6_SELECT (Torque Bias input) SPEED_LIMIT -
SPEED_LIMIT
NO_USE
07_SPEED_LIMIT 0～2400 1500 RPM
08_Y1_SELECT ZERO_SPEED ZERO_SPEED -
09_Y2_SELECT (Open at zero speed) SPEED_AGREE -
10_Y3_SELECT SPEED_AGREE RUN -
(Close at speed agree)
02_Interface
RUN
(Close when INV. runs)
INV_OL
(Close when INV. is
over-heated)
11_YM_SELECT INV_OL -
MOTOR_OH
(Close when motor is
over-heated)
TQ_ANS
(Close when torque is
responded)
12_ZERO_SPD_LEVEL 1～100 0.1 %
13_SPD_AGREE_WIDTH1.0～20.0 12.0 %
14_TQ_ANS_LEVEL 0～100 50 %
NO_USE
15_Al1_SELECT NO_USE -
ANALOG_TQ_BIAS

4-13
 Item Function Name Data Range Initial Value Unit
SPEED_FBK SPEED_FBK RPM
16_A01_SELECT
(Speed feedback)
TORQUE Amp
17_A02_SELECT SPEED_REF
18_A03_SELECT (Speed reference) CURRENT Amp
TORQUE
(Torque feedback)
CURRENT (RMS)
VOLTAGE (RMS)
LINK_VDC
19_A04_SELECT VOLTAGE V
DC LINK VOLTAGE
(DC link voltage)
POWER(Out power)
MOTOR_TEMP
02_Interface (Motor temperature :℃)
20_AO_1_MIN -2500～2500 2000 -
21_AO_1_MAX -2500～2500 -2000 -
22_AO_2_MIN -2500～2500 - -
23_AO_2_MAX -2500～2500 - -
24_AO_3_MIN -2500～2500 - -
25_AO_3_MAX -2500～2500 - -
26_AO_4_MIN -2500～2500 0 -
27_AO_4_MAX -2500～2500 500 -
28_DI_SELECT ON / OFF OFF -
29_RAMP_SELECT ON / OFF ON -
30_MOTOR OHP LV -100.0～300.0 120.0 -
31_MOTOR OH LV -100.0～300.0 150.0 -

4-14
5.3 Motor and Factory Function

Item Function Name Data Range Unit

01_MOTOR_SELECT OTHER KW
02_THERM_SELECT ON -
03_AUTO-TUNE OFF
04_MOTOR_CAPACIT 5.5 KW
05_RATING_V 360 Vrms
06_RATING_A 12.95 Amp
07_MOTOR_POLES 4 Poles
08_PG_PULSE 1024 PPR
09_Wrpm_BASE 1460 -
03 Motor 10_Wrpm_MAX 1606 -
11_FLUXdre_RATE 0.877 -
12_IQSE_RATE 15.22 A
13_IDSE_RATE 10.18 A
14_INERTIA 0.24 ㎏㎡
15_MOTOR_Lm 86.144 mH
16_MOTOR_Ls 91.848 mH
17_MOTOR_Lr 92.950 mH
18_MOTOR_Rs 0.699 Ω
19_MOTOR_Rr 0.483 Ω
01_Torque Limit 250 %
04 Factory 24_Kp_cc 12.0 -
25_Ki_cc 1113.6 -

※ All motor data are set automatically by selecting motor in

PROGRAM / 03_MOTOR / 01_MOTOR_SELECT.

※ When you try to change the value of the ‘Control’ and ‘Interface’, you must
change that of the ‘01_MOTOR_SELECT’ in advance and then the others are to
be changed.

4-15
6. FAULT OF HIVD-700GS INVERTER
6.1 Fault List

Error Keypad Display Contents

OVER_CURR_H Inverter output current is over current limited
OVER CURRENT
OVER_CURR_S level.
Feedback speed is over limited speed level.
OVER SPEED OVER_SPEED
Check PROGRAM / FACTORY / OS_LEVEL.
DC link voltage is over the over-voltage level.
OVER VOLTAGE OVER_VOLT
Over-voltage level : 780V DC
MOTOR OVER HEAT MTR_OV_HEAT Temperature of motor is over 150℃.
MOTOR THERMISTOR
MTR_TH_BRK Thermistor connection for motor is opened.
BREAK
DC Link Voltage in inverter is lower than
UNDER VOLTAGE UNDER_VOLT voltage of UNDER VOLTAGE LEVEL.
UNDER VOLTAGE LEVEL : 400V DC.
Inverter is overloaded.
INVERTER OVER LOAD INV_OV_LOAD
(10 seconds at torque 250%)
Input of encoder A-phase or B-phase does
ENCODER BREAK PG_BREAK
not come in.
Output of inverter is shorted with
ground(earth).
EARTH FAULT EARTH_FAULT
Usually OC FAULT shall be occurred
together.
A/D CONVERTER
ADC_ERROR A/D Converter in inverter is out of order.
FAULT
EEPROM FAULT EEPROM_ERR EEPROM in inverter is out of order.
FUSE BREAK FUSE_BREAK Main fuse in inverter is opened.
MEMORY FAULT MEMORY_ERR RAM in inverter is out of order.

4-16
6.2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart for HIVD-700GS Inverter

6.2.1 Motor Over Current (Hardware) Fault

OVER Current

Is U,V,W line short? YES Repair U,V,W line

NO

Is the Encoder Connect Encoder line

NO
connection OK? correctly

YES

Is
Set Motor parameter
Motor parameter NO
correctly
correct?

YES

INV. maintenance
is needed

6.2.2 Motor Over Speed Fault

OVER Speed

Is the data of FACTORY/

OS_LEVEL less than 120% YES
of LONG RUN RPM?

NO

Eleminate the cause of Input 120% value of Long Run

Over Speed RPM at FACTORY/OS_LEVEL

4-17
6.2.3 Inverter Over Voltage Fault

OVER Voltage

Is the
Repair Braking
connection of Braking NO
Resister connection
Resister correct?

YES

INV. maintenance
is needed

6.2.4 Motor Over Heat Fault

MOTOR
OV Heat

Is the
connection of TH1 and Connect TH1 and THC
NO
THC to Motor correctly
correct?

YES

Is setting of Motor Set Motor parameter

NO
parameter correct? correctly

YES

Is the Motor
NO Change Motor
capacity OK?

YES

INV. maintenance
is needed

4-18
6.2.5 Motor Thermistor Break Fault

MOTOR
TH Break

Is THC and TH1 Connect THC and TH1

NO
connected correctly? correctly.

YES

INV. maintenance
is needed.

6.2.6 Under Voltage Fault

UNDER
Voltage

Is the connection of Connect CN2

NO
CN2 in Main Board OK? correctly

YES

Is the
Input Voltage of R,S,T NO Check the Input power
correct?

YES

INV. maintenance
is needed

4-19
6.2.7 Inverter Over Load Fault

INVERTER
OL Load

Is the elevator Eleminate the cause

YES
car over loaded? of overload

NO

Is the INV. rated Change the INV. to

NO
capacity OK? sufficient capacity

YES

Is the Encoder Check the Encoder

NO
connection OK? connection

YES

INV. maintenance
is needed

6.2.8 Encoder Fault

PG Break

Is the Encoder Connect the Encoder

NO
connection OK? line correctly

YES

Is
Check the Encoder
the Enocoder Pulse NO
and the connection
OK?

YES

Change the INV.

Main Board.

4-20
6.2.9 Inverter External Fault

EXTERNAL
Fault

When Control Panel does not

have a EXT output, jump EXT
Is CM and EXT and CM.
NO
of INV. short? When Control Panel has a EXT
output signal, check the EXT
and CM lines.

YES

Is CN5 in INV.
Main Board connected NO Connect CN5 correctly
correctly?

YES

INV. maintenance
is needed

6.2.10 Earth Fault

- Refer the EARTH FAULT point and repair.

6.2.11 Inverter Fuse Break Fault

FUSE Break

Is the connection
NO Connect CN2 firmly
of CN2 OK?

YES

Is Main Fuse of INV. maintenance

NO
INV. opened? is needed

YES

Change INV.
Main Fuse

4-21
6.2.12 Version Error

VERSION Error

Is
ROM in Main Board NO Change ROM
changed?

YES

Initiate EEP-ROM in
PROGRAM /FACTORY/
INIT_EEPROM

4-22
APPENDIX. SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM OF HIVD-700GS INVERTER
R
DBR
A110
FUSE
FAN
7
6 DCR
B110

+ U
C R IGBT
- V
R MOTOR
W

T
+
C R
-
HCT

PG
N PPG
M
P ENCODER
P
A
B
HCT

P_BUS

VWPC

VWP1
VVP1
VUP

PUP
1P
UC

WF
VC

VN
N
F

VV

O
F
O

WP

BR

W
VO

VC

N
1

O
U

U
N
N
V

V
P

F
PF_BUS
1 3 CN27 N_BUS
CN24 FG

+15
CN23 GN
D
GW

SMPS GB
G

15
G
U

V
15

15

15

+15
GN
D CN4 CN5 CN6 CN3 CN1
CN25 CN26 CN21 CN22 +15
GN
D
+15
GATE BOARD
GN
N
P
PW1
PW2
GN

D
F
D
PGM
- 15
+15

+15

+24
GN

CM
D
+5

PW2
PW1
GN
D
P
F
N
P

P HCT
I1 HCT
CN4 CN10 CN15 CN2 CN14 HCT COM
N HCT
HCT COM
P HCT
I2 HCT
HCT COM
N HCT
MAIN BOARD CN3
P HCT
I3 HCT
HCT COM
N HCT
HCT COM

TB2 TB1
PPG
PG

A
P
B
MP

4-23
E. CAR DOOR CONTROLLER Page

(HIDC-400IM Door Inverter) `

1. INTRODUCTION OF DOOR CONTROLLER ----------------------------- 5-1

2. PECIFICATION OF HIDC-400IM DOOR CONTROLLER -------------- 5-2

3. WIRING DIAGRAM OF HIDC-400IM DOOR CONTROLLER -------- 5-3

4. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR HIDC-400IM DOOR CONTROLLER -- 5-4

5. TROUBLESHOOTING
FOR CONTINUALLY DOOR OPEN / CLOSING ------------------------ 5-11

6. DOOR ENCODER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE -------------------- 5-14

v
1. INTRODUCTION OF HIDC-400IM DOOR CONTROLLER
HIDC-400IM model Door Controller is a control equipment for elevator door controlling with
induction motor. This controller is realized to motor control of high-performance vector control
by perfect digital control with DSP (Digital Signal Processing) and stable speed control with
feedback of the rotor's position from Encoder.
You can monitor the door control function including Error and data setting values for
operational function with HHT-2000 key pad.

1.1 Layout of Door Operator for Side Opening Car Door

Figure 5.1 Layout of Door Operator for Side Opening Car Door

5-1
 1.2 Layout of HIDC-400IM Door Controller

(Outside) (Inside)

2. SPECIFICATION OF HIDC-400IM DOOR CONTROLLER

Item Description
1 phase AC 220V±10% , 50 or 60Hz ±5%
Input Power
(Input Voltage lines should not be connected to Frame Ground)
Applicable Motor 3 Phases AC 220V, 400Watt, 4Pole, 1.9Amp
Applicable Encoder 2,500 Pulse Per Revolution (PPR), Line Drive Circuit, 5V DC
Control Type Vector Control with Sensor (Encoder) Feedback
Control Signal Open/Close signal (OP, CL, NUD), Open/Close Limit signal (OPL,
Input CLL), Control signal (Reset : RST), Encoder signal (A, /A, B, /B)
Relay Output 3 kinds (OPL, CLL, 30B), 1b contact
Under Voltage, Over Voltage, Over Current, Overload,
Protective Function
Encoder Error, etc.

5-2
3. WIRING DIAGRAM OF HIDC-400IM DOOR CONTROLLER

5-3
4. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR HIDC-400IM DOOR CONTROLLER
1) Please stop the car at some landing level.
2) Turn-off the elevator's main electric power.
3) Re-check whether the all terminal blocks in the Door Controller (Inverter), Cables and Door
Open and Close Limit Switch connector are normal condition or not.
4) Check whether the door encoder cable is correctly connected.
5) Fully open and close the car door by manual (using V-belt or yellow wheel) on car top.
6) Turn-on the elevator's main electric power.
7) Check the status of Relay ‘29’ and Contactor ‘MC’ in control panel are On.
(Relay ‘29’ and Contactor ‘MC’ are Elevator Safety Relays)
8) Please manually open and close the car door by pushing the door open and close button
on the Key-Pad for door controller (inverter).
If the door is operated opposite direction, change the two(2) lines for Door Motor (U,V,W)
in the door controller (inverter) after turn-off the main electric power.
9) Please Calibrate (or Initial operation).
Calibration is an operation to measure the total moved length of car door. It shall be done
at installation stage or when the 33_System_Ratio or 36_Motor_Select of 02_CONTROL
data is changed. To operate the door motor with optimum opening and closing patterns,
this calibration shall be required.

a) Please check the followings ;

① Make sure the wire connection of the door inverter and motor.
If the opening-direction of motor shaft is counter-clockwise (view from the motor pulley
side), connect the motor power line as R↔U, S↔V and T↔W, if it is clockwise, do the
connection as R↔U, S↔W and T↔V.
② Check the measured speed value of door inverter.
When the door is opening, if the value of Monitor → Basic → FBK rpm is positive(＋),
you should connect jumper CON 2 of door inverter control board as follows ;
Jumper Pin No.1-2 : In case of forward rotation with normal connection, Speed
Feedback of key-pad shall be displayed with (＋)value.
Jumper Pin No.2-3 : In case of forward rotation with jumper pin No.1-2, Speed
Feedback is displayed (－) value, change pin connection to
the jumper pin No.2-3.
After changing connection, check the Speed Feedback is displayed to (＋) value. Basic
connection of CON 2 is No.1-2.

b) Check Point before Calibration ;

① Check the connections of door Open and Close limit switches.
OPL LED turns-on when the car door is fully opened and when door is fully closed, CLL
LED turns-on.

5-4
 ② It is impossible to do the door calibration in case the door is fully opened.
So, do the calibration when the door is fully closed.

c) Do the door calibration as shown below. Keep the order for procedure.
① Set the data of “02_PROGRAM → 01_CONTROL → 38_Keypad_Run” to 1.
② Set the data of “02_PROGRAM → 01_CONTROL → 36_Motor_Select” to 0 or 1
according to the door motor capacity. (200Watt/6Pole = 0, 400Watt/4Pole = 1)
③ Set the data of “02_PROGRAM → 01_CONTROL → 35_Door_Type” to 0 or 1
according to the door opening type. (Center open door = 0, Side open door = 1)
④ Input the door width to the address of “02_PROGRAM → 01_CONTROL → 34_JJ”.
⑤ Input 1 to the address of “02_PROGRAM → 01_CONTROL → 33_System_Ratio”.
⑥ Set the data of “02_PROGRAM → 01_CONTROL → 32_Calibration” to 1 then door
calibration would started.

☆ Calibration sequence ;
Open with jog speed → CLS Off → Open with jog speed for 1sec → Close with jog
speed → CLS On → Open with jog speed → OLS On → Close to automatic pattern →
The state of automatic driving.
(CLS : Close Limit Switch, OLS : Open Limit Switch)

⑦ After the calibration, the data of 02_PROGRAM → 01_CONTROL → 32_Calibration is

changed to “2” automatically and 02_PROGRAM → 01_CONTROL → 38_Keypad_Run
is changed to “0” and measured total length of door is recorded in 02_PROGRAM
→ 01_CONTROL → 31_Total_Length.
Check the data.
⑧ If measured length is shorter than 1/3 of JJ (door width) or more than 2 times of it, it is
considered as an calibration error.
And the data of 02_PROGRAM → 01_CONTROL → 32_Calibration and
02_PROGRAM → 01_CONTROL → 31_Total_Length are to be “0”.

d) If the calibration is not completed, the door inverter can not hold the door panel when the
door is fully opened or closed.

5-5
 For guidance of HHT-2000 keypad operation, refer to followings.
The HHT-2000 keypad is same as keypad for the main motor drive unit of HIVD-700GS.

B1
B5
B8
CONNECTOR

HHT-2000 LCD DISPLAY

UP

ESC ENT KEYS FOR DATA CHANGING

DN

HYUNDAI ELEVATOR CO.,LTD.

LCD DISPLAY - Decrease ITEM Number.

2 Line x 16 Charters
(Total 32 Characters) - Increase Data Value at EDIT mode.

UP
- Move to Lower menu from Upper
ESC ENT menu.
- Save Data at EDIT mode.
DN

- Move to Upper menu from Lower menu. - Increase ITEM Number.

- Cancel the editing data at EDIT mode. - Decrease Data Value at EDIT mode.

․ If you want to change the LCD display to normal display, push the ESC and the ENT
key simultaneously.
․ If you want to move the data with digit moving, push the UP and the DN key
simultaneously.
10) Please change the operational mode from INSPECTION to AUTO at car junction box.
11) Finally, check the Auto operational condition of elevator.
12) Error Code of HIVD-400IM Door Controller (Inverter).
In the event of a failure, the door inverter output shall be stopped and an Error Code
shall display on theHHT-2000 key-pad.

5-6
 Display on
Error Description
key-pad
IPM Error IPM power element error signal input from door inverter
HW IPM
(Hardware) Power Board. (Happening at once)
IPM power element error signal input of door inverter
IPM Error Power
SW IPM
(Software) Board is continuously happened than setting time.
(Setting time : 300μsec)
In case the door inverter output current is higher than
Over Current SW OC
setting level. (Level : 400%, Happening at once)
Under Voltage In case DC Link voltage is continued to level less than
SW UV
Error setting time. (Level: 65%, Setting time: 500μsec)
Over Voltage In case DC Link voltage is continued to level more than
SW OV
Error setting time. (Level: 130%, Setting time: 500μsec)
In case IPM power elements temperature of Power Board
Inverter
Over Heat is continued more than setting value with over setting time.
Overheat
(Setting time : 60sec)
Overload Over Load In case load current is continued with overload level 1 more
Alert 1 LV1 than setting time1. (Level1 : 200%, Time1 : 5sec)
Over Speed In case the speed of motor is continued with overload level
Over Speed
Alert more than setting time. (Level1 : 110%, Time1 : 10msec)
Firstly, the one of the happened error is saved, it can be saved for account of ten(10), the
latest happened error is located in 01, former happened error is piled up to order(02,
03,...). But if it is more than ten(10), it should be erased.
If 02_PROGRAM→02_INTERFACE→10_ERROR_Clear is revised “ON”, error is erased
and automatically, returned to “OFF”.

13) I/O signal is displayed on theHHT-2000 as follows.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⓐ ⓑ ⓒ ⓓ ⓔ ⓕ

①-Door Open command, Input, when command is input, OP LED is On.

②-Door Close command, Input, when command is input, CL LED is On.
③-Open Limit Signal, Input, at "Open Limit Signal", then OPL LED is On.
④-Close Limit Signal, Input, at "Close Limit Signal", then CLL LED is On
⑤-Nudging command, Input, when command is input, NUD LED is On.
⑥-Fault Reset command, Input, at "Fault Reset Signal", then RST LED is On.
⑦-Open Deceleration command, Input, when command is input, OPD LED is On.
⑧-Close Deceleration command, Input, when command is input, CLD LED is On.
5-7
⑨-30B (Inverter Error), Relay output, if inverter is error, 30B Relay (U18) is Off.
a) - Watch Dog (WD) state, Output, WD LED (green) is On.
b) - Inverter Run state, Output, when inverter is driving, RUN LED (green) is On.
c) - OC (Over Current) state, Output, if OC is happened, OC LED (yellow) is On.
d) - IPM element fault state, Output, if IPM (power element) fault is happened, IPM LED
(yellow) is On.
e) - OV (Over Voltage) state, Output, if OV is happened, OV LED (yellow) is On.
f) - 30B (Inverter Error) state, LED output, if inverter is error, 30B LED (yellow) is On.

5-8
 ≪Control Board for HIDC-400IM Door Controller≫

Operating State LEDs Table

30B Door Inverter Error (Yellow) OC Over Current (Yellow)
IPM IPM elements Error (Yellow) RUN Inverter Running (Green)
WD Watch Dog (Green) POWER Inverter Control Power (Red)
OV Over Voltage (Yellow) - -

5-9
* Refer to the following HIDC-400IM Door Controller Connection for reference.

OLS is ON
04

03 05 06
01

08
02 07
DOOR OPEN

OLS is ON
Door High

Opening OP

CL
High

OPL
High

CLL
(Speed Pattern and Operational Signal, when Door is Opening)

DOOR CLOSE
17
11 15

13 14 16

CLS is ON

12
Door
Closing OP
CLS is ON
High

CL
High

OPL
High

CLL

(Speed Pattern and Operational Signal, when Door is Closing)

5-10
5. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR CONTINUALLY DOOR OPEN/CLOSING
1) Contents of Trouble
: Door moves open and close continually with a Slow Speed.

2) Check Point
① Door Open Limit Switch (DOL) and Door Close Limit Switch (DCL)
② Car Door Operator
③ Door Inverter Input Lines
④ Door Encoder
⑤ Door Inverter Key-Pad
⑥ Door Inverter

3) Countermeasure
① Turn-on the AUTO/MANUAL switches to MANUAL position in control panel and the car
to a middle floor.
② Open the middle＋1 floor landing door with the door Key and get onto the car and open
the door Inverter Box Cover.
③ Check the Door Open Limit (DOL) Switch and/or Door Close Limit (DCL) Switch.
If needed, adjust them to operate correctly.
④ Check the mechanically mounting condition of the Car Door Operator.
⑤ Check the Wiring of the door Open and/or door Close Signal.
⑥ Check the door Encoder product state.
If the encoder is not good, change the door Encoder with a new one.
⑦ If the problem is still exist, change the Door Inverter with a new one.

Checking for “DOL” Switch on Car

5-11
 Door Open & Close Limit Switch Box

When the car door is fully opened, “DOL” Limit Switch should be activated by actuating cam,
and when the car door is fully closed, “DCL” Limit Switch should be activated by actuating cam.

Door Limit Switch Connection

5-12
 GS
AW
TI
ET
C
H
RC
EA
T
I
R
I
N
G
M

S
A
F
E
T
Y
B
A
R
S
A
F
E
T
Y
S
W
I
T
C
H
A
R
M
COF
AOTG
RRYE
DAE
S
ED

M
I
C
R
O
S
W
I
T
C
H

Car Door Operator for Auto Sliding Side Open

Car Door Safety Edge Device

5-13
6. DOOR ENCODER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1) If the door encoder is not normally operated, replace the Door Encoder.

2) Door Encoder Replacement Procedure is as belows.

① Please stop the elevator at some floor level.
② Turn-off the elevator's main electric power.
③ After opening the cover plate of door motor, remove the Door Encoder.
④ Replace the door encoder by new one.
(Please be careful the position of door encoder cable connector)
⑤ Turn-on the elevator's main electric power.
⑥ Please carry out the door calibration.
⑦ Check the status of car door operation.

* Refer to the following Door Encoder and Door Motor Layout.

Door Encoder and Door Motor

5-14
F. TRACTION MACHINE Page

1. BRAKE MECHANISM & ADJUSTING METHOD --------------------- 6-1

2. ELEVATOR TRACTION MACHINE --------------------------------------- 6-3

3. INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTION FOR MOTOR ----------------------------------------------- 6-5

vi
1. BRAKE MECHANISM & ADJUSTING METHOD
Brake mechanism is the most important part of the elevator unit for the reasons of correct
stopping of the elevators, flexibility and safety of man (persons). Special attention must be
paid to maintenance and inspection of the brakes.

1.1 Brake mechanism

When the elevator unit is used, the push button for operating panel inside car or push
button for landing must be pushed.
Simultaneously with it, the main relay for ascending and descending and shall be operated.
(U-contact in the case of ascending and D-contact in the case of descending ; Both are
inside control Panel)
As soon as electrical power is supplied to the traction motor, power shall be supplied to
brake coil through contact of the main relay and brake core shall be pulled in. With shaft as
fulcrum, brake shoe is opened due to the operation of lever and the brake is released. With
the above mentioned, the elevator is operated and when the car arrives at the designated
floor, power supply to the electric motor and brake coil shall be shut off and brake shoe shall
be pushed with force of spring.

1.2 Maintenance and inspection of Machine Brake

Turn off the main power stitch on the main switch box inside the machine room.
Even if the elevator unit has been adjusted completely, if bolts are loosened, an error in
level might be caused due to loosening of bolts etc. Therefore, it must be checked
periodically.
(Mainly, lock nuts, double nuts are used for assuring safety. Therefore, there is a very
small possibility of it.)
If the brake drum is scratched, it will be attributable to such as loosening of persons and
abrasion or wear of brake lining, In the case of former, be sure to tighten the screw
immediately. The friction of lining is damaged due to loosening of the person, resulting in
incorrect possibility of stopping of the car (level error). Therefore, special attention must be
paid to this point.

6-1
1.3 Adjustment of Machine Brake
For adjustment of the brake, please use the following procedure.
(1) Let the motor get warm by letting it run with high speed for approximately 15 minutes, so
that the temperature of the rotor housing reaches approximately 100℃, as the hereby
caused expansion of the motor diameter is appropriate.
(2) After this the brake is to be adjusted by the help of the nuts ①, to give, by the magnet
without voltage.
This is equivalent to a distance of 0.15～0.2mm between the brake lining and the rotor of
motor.
(3) Hereby an optimum adjustment of the brake is carried out, but please fastens the
adjustment nuts with the lock nuts, so that a deviation of the brake is impossible. The brake
is by maintenance work to be readjusted after each utilization of the brake linings.

Figure 6.1 Brake Coil & Adjusting Nuts

Adjustment must, therefore, be made in such a way that as soon as power supply to the
motor is shut off, it can be stopped immediately.
It will exert big influence over the riding condition inside car.
When the car loadage is 0～200kgs, adjustment must be made in such a way that sudden
stopping is required. It is for minimizing the level error at 100% of the rated loadage. The
variation in error of the level shall be attributed to the above mentioned adjustment resulting
in full adjustment.

6-2
1.4 Overhaul of Machine Brake
(1) Stop the car at the uppermost floor.
(2) Turn off the main power switch on the main switch box inside the machine room.
(3) Use an emergency key and open the entrance door at the lowest floor and enter the
inside of the pit.
(4) Be sure to use a wood lock and support the lower end of the counterweight so that the car
is not moved.
(5) Measure and record the compression volume of spring so that it can be returned to its
original position after overhauling.
(6) Disconnect the respective pins and wash it well. Then, supply oil to it.
(7) If necessary, exchange brake lining.
(8) Remove the wood block inside pit after completion of overhauling operation.

2. ELEVATOR TRACTION MACHINE

2.1 Traction Machine
The elevator Traction Machine consists of a worm gear, a elevator motor and
electromagnetic brake. The worm is made of top-grade steel and drives a worm wheel
having a rim of special bronze. The worm and the wheel have both milled ground-to-match
teethand run in an oil bath.
The electro-mechanical brake has two independently operated brake shoes, each being
held against the brake drum by torque springs and opened by a magnet armature. The
motor is especially designed for elevator use.
The motor is equipped with a flywheel, which partly compensates for varying loads and also
serves as hand-wheel in case of power failure or if manual elevator is required. The motor
for ＋45℃ ambient temperature shall be provided. The elevator machine room should
preferably be placed immediately above the elevator trunk and should be completely
enclosed, suitably ventilated, and designed to give fire protection in compliance with the
requirements of SOLAS 1974. However, it is possible to situate the elevator machine room
almost everywhere beside the elevator trunk or below.

The temperature in the elevator machine room must be kept between －5℃ and
＋45°centigrades.
□ Motor input power : 3 phase 360V, 51Hz (VVVF)
□ Rated RPM : 1460
□ Protection : IP-44
□ Insulation : F class
□ Rating : One(1) hour
□ Thermistor : NTC (Negative Thermo-Coupler)

6-3
 T
O
P
V
I
E
W
S
I
D
E
V
I
E
W

Figure 6.2 Layout of Traction Machine

2.2 Electric Motor

The electric motor operating the traction machine is directly jointed on the endless screw by
a coupling joint. The motor is suitable for a service having an intermittence of 40% and 180
starts per hour.The windings suitably impregnated against humidity and varnished for
working in tropical climates.
The shaft is fitted on ball bearing. The type of motor employed has been expressly
designed and buiIt for control of elevators.
These are the main characteristics ;
․ The particular noiseless at starting and during the normal working.

6-4
 ․ The high coupling of start necessary to win the friction resistance at starting and for the
mass acceleration of the car, useful load and counterweight.
․ The low starting currents to limit the tensions chutes at the beginning of the motion.
The motor is dynamically and statically balanced in a very accurate way to avoid any
vibration of mechanical origin.
The electromagnetic vibrations are reduced to a minimum by means of same arrangements,
such as ;
․ The suitable choice of the number of rotor and stator slots.
․ The slow induction rate for slow speed with full loading.
․ The special stator and rotor winding for elevator.
․ The particular accurate construction.
When an enclosure of IP44 is required we are supplying a elevator traction machine of the
above design. This machine is buiIt together of specially designed elevator components
ensuring the desired quality.

3. INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION FOR MOTOR

3.1 Mechanical Check
Check rotation of traction machine.

3.2 Installation
Check that inlet and outlet air can circulate unrestricted.
Ambient temperature max. ＋45℃.

3.3 Fitting of Couplings

Clean shaft from rust-resisting paint. Don't use abrasive cloth!
Don't use a hammer for fitting. Use pusher.

3.4 Winding Connection

Take care of data, given on name plate.
Check supply cable and connecting tension.

(1) Terminals
Windings of one speed motors have 3 terminals, these motors can be connected
delta(△). Electrical connection of motor with lined up terminals ;
Pay attention to the connection diagram which you find in the cover of the terminal box.

(2) Winding protection against vector drive control and thermal overloading.
This shall be obtained by NTC (Negative Thermo Coupler) Thermistors in motor
winding.

6-5
 Two(2) thermistors shall be embedded in motor winding and one of them is for spare
(THC / TH1 / TH2).
NTC thermistor ends shall be connected on the motor terminals in steel cubicle.
Resistor value per thermistor is 28 ㏀ at 0℃.

IMPORTANT : Do not test thermistor with test lamp or acoustical continuity tester.

Figure 6.3 Thermistors in Motor

6-6
G. OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING Page

1. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR CONTROL SYSTEM ------------------ 7-1

2. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR LANDING DOOR INTERLOCK ----- 7-4

3. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR
COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETY GEAR -------------------------------------- 7-9

4. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR GOVERNOR SWITCH ----------------- 7-13

vii
1. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR CONTROL SYSTEM

1) First, please check whether the following circuit protectors in control panel are "On" or
not. It is normal if all below switches are "On".

- CP1 : AC440V, Control Transformer Input Power

- CP2 : AC19V, Input Power for DC26V
- CP3 : AC83V, Input Power for DC112V
- CP4 : AC220V, Door Inverter, Brake Operation and Control Power
- CP5 : AC110V, Input Power for Inverter Control and SMPS Power
- CP6 : DC26V, PC Board Control, Indicator and Button Power
- CP7 : DC112V, Safety Line Circuit Power
- CP8 : AC220V, Car Lighting Power
- CP11 : DC24V, Input Power from on-board

2) Please check that the status of the Relay "29" and the Contactor "MC" in control panel.

① If the status of the Relay "29" is Off, please check the Elevator Safety Line which is
described in Wiring Diagram COL.03.

② If the status of the Contactor "MC" is Off, please check the Elevator Safety Line and the
30B signal for Inverter inner system checking which is described in Wiring Diagram
COL.02 and COL.04.

Wiring Diagram COL.03 for Elevator Safety Line Circuit

Wiring Diagram COL.04 for Magnetic Contactor Line Circuit

7-1
 3) After pushing the any call button in car, please check that the Relays "X40" and "X41" on
TCB Board in control panel are On or Off.

① If the status of the Relay "X41" is Off, please check that all landing doors are fully closed.

② If the status of the Relay "X40" for car door(Gate) switch is Off, please check the Door
Controller(Inverter) on car is normal or not, and the Relay "X40".

②-1) You can check the condition of Door Controller(Inverter) as below.

After connect the key-pad for door inverter, please check that the status of display is
"AUTO" on the key-pad.
If there is not anything display or error display on the key-pad, please turn-off the
elevator main power for 30 seconds, then error is automatically restored.

②-2) When the car door is closed, please check that the contact status of Car Door(Gate)
Switch is normal and the Relay "X40" on TCB Board.

③ If the LED display on MCPU Board in control panel indicate F14 or F24 or F34 or F44 or
F54 or F64 Errors, please check that the Interlock Switches and the Safety Switches of all
landing doors are normal condition.

③-1) Please check that the Spring for Retiring Cam is broken which is mounted at the left
or right side of car entrance.

* Please refer to the following Wiring Diagram COL.03.

Wiring Diagram COL.03 for Landing Door and Car Door Switch Line Circuit

7-2
Wiring Diagram COL.03 for Travel Limit Switch Line Circuit

Wiring Diagram COL.04 for Brake Operation Circuit

7-3
2. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR LANDING DOOR INTERLOCK

1) Stop the elevator at any landing level and check the condition of relay in control panel.

① Check the Relay "X29" on TCB Board whether this relay is On or Off.
If the Relay "X29" is Off, please carry out as below.
Please turn-off the elevator's main power(NFB1).
Please check the terminal blocks(from TM47(CG) line to TC10(EXIT) line) by using multi-
tester, referring to the Elevator Safety Lines in the Wiring Diagram COL.03.
You can find which terminal block(point) is opened and connect it.

② Check the Relay "X40" and "X41", whether those relays are On or Off.
If the Relays "X40" and "X41" are Off, the problem is the poor connection between the
Landing Door Interlock Switch and Car Door(Gate) Switch, and Pin of the landing door
blade or landing door was not closed in perfect.

2) In order to solve the problem, we recommend as follows.

① In advance of checking the specific floor(which is to be checked), move the car to the
above floor level.
When the car is stopped at other floor, check that the locking pin on the landing door
interlock device is operated within the hole on the landing door blade smoothly by turning
the emergency door key. (Refer to the following figure A)

At this time, it should be kept going in and out without blocking or obstacle.
(Refer to the following figure B)

In this case, liner of 1～3mm thickness is required for the adjustment of gap between the
interlock device and the trunk wall. (Refer to the following figure C)

Please insert the liner for smooth operation of locking pin in the landing door blade hole.

7-4
 LANDING DOOR
INTERLOCK DEVICE
KEY HOLE FOR DOOR OPENING

HOLE FOR
PIN LOCKING

STEEL LANDING DOOR

WALL INTERLOCK DEVICE

LOCKING PIN

DOOR FRAME HINGED DOOR

LINER & DOOR BLADE

(Figure C)

DOOR FRAME HINGED DOOR

& DOOR BLADE
(Figure A) (Figure B)

Landing Door Interlock Device

② The above ① is not available, please check and adjust as follows.(In this case, two
persons are required at car top)
First, please turn-off the "CP4" in control panel.
This switch is related for the power supply for the car door operating.
And then, please stop the car each exact landing level which is to be checked.
Thereafter, please open the car door by manual and then one person operate the manual
up or down push button on the car junction box.
At this time, another person make sure the distance between the Retiring Cam (Lock
Magnet) and Roller of Interlock Switch Device. Recommended distance between the
Retiring Cam(Lock Magnet) and Roller of Interlock Switch Device is 5～10mm.
In case that this distance does not fall in this limit, please adjust.
And please also make sure that the Roller is installed on the center of the Retiring Cam.

* Please refer to the following Interlock Switch Device and Safety Switch for landing door.

7-5
 Door Switches for Hinged Swing Landing Door

Landing Door Safety Switch Landing Door Interlock Switch

Figure 7.2 Door Switches for Hinged Swing Landing Door

7-6
* Refer to the following Interlock Switch Device and Safety Switch for landing door.

Landing Door Interlock Switches and Landing Door Safety Switches

Figure 7.3 Location of Hinged Swing Landing Door Switches

7-7
Figure 7.4 Location of Retiring Cam (Lock Magnet)

Figure 7. 5 Retiring Cam (Lock Magnet)

7-8
3. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETY GEAR

① Please turn-off the elevator's main electric power.

② Fix the car by using the chain block.
③ As above ②, fix the counterweight.
④ Lift up the counterweight by using the chain block.
⑤ If the counterweight is lifted up by 200mm, catching of counterweight safety gear be
automatically released.
⑥ Check the governor switch's status of the car and counterweight to the top of trunk
(hoistway).
Note) Normal Status : Switch Knob is horizontal direction.
⑦ Turn-on the elevator's electric power.
⑧ Check the below relays which is located in control panel.
- Relay "29" : Relay for Elevator Safety Line checking (On status is normal)
- Relay "MCA" : Relay for Inverter Inner System Checking (On status is normal)
If above relays are Off, check the Elevator Safety Lines (from TM47 line to TC10) in Wiring
Diagram COL.03 and the Error Code on Key Pad for Inverter.
⑨ When the Relay "29", Relay "MCA" and Magnetic Contactor "MC" are all On status, move
the elevator to the highest or the lowest landing level by Manual operation (Hand operation
mode) in elevator machine room.
⑩ Check the operational status of elevator by using the MCSUP(Inspection Up) or
MCSDN(Inspection Down) Switch with the MAUTO / MCS Switch on TCB Board in control
panel or using the UP(Inspection Up) or DN(Inspection Down) Button with AUTO /
INSPECTION at Car Junction Box and Remote Box on car top.
⑩-1) When the Main CPU (MCPU) Board is at normal status, the green LEDs of the SYS1,
SYS2, SYS3 in MCPU Board shall be flickering.
If those LEDs keep OFF or ON status continuously, check the power supply DC 5V if
it is normal. If the power supply is normal, press the “RESET BUTTON” at upper part
of MCPU Board and check whether the LEDs display is normal.

7-9
 Figure 7.6 Position of “RESET BUTTON” on MCPU Board

Following display shows the operating status of the MCPU Board.

(Normal Operation) (Safety Line Circuit Error : F11)

⑩-2) Checking Points during Manual Operation

7-10
 When above check points are satisfied, proceed the hand operation as follows.

⑩-2-1) Check the position of the elevator and move the elevator Up or Down slightly
with the MCSUP(Inspection Up) or MCSDN(Inspection Down) Switch with the
MAUTO /MCS Switch on TCB Board in control panel.
And check whether the traction machine brake opens normally and the elevator
operates in the same direction with the MCSUP / MCSDN Switch.

Figure 7.7 Toggle Switch on TCB Board

The display status of MCPU Board shall be as follows.

When Operating the Car Up direction in control panel : S.L.↑

⑩-2-2) If the elevator is operated at Creep Speed or the noise is heard from the
traction motor, check the encoder connection.
If the motor rotates in opposite direction, change any of two wiring among the
inverter output power line of phase U,V,W.

⑩-2-3) After checking the operating condition of the elevator from the machine room,
clean and adjust the machine Brake so that it works smoothly.
Then check the elevator operating condition from the car roof as follows.

7-11
 a) Change the AUTO / INSPECTION Switch on Car Junction Box from AUTO
to INSPECTION.
b) When checking the elevator running at the car roof, use the UP or DN
switches on the Remote Box.

When operating the car from the car roof, it is displayed as follows.
When Operating the Car to Up direction in Car roof : S.L↑
c) Check the car running is smooth by operating the car up and down with
the UP and DOWN Button on the Remote Box.

⑪ Finally, check the elevator's operation condition.

* Refer to the Wiring Diagram COL.03 for Elevator Safety Line Circuit.

7-12
4. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR GOVERNOR SWITCH

1) Check whether the Governor Switch is tripped or not.

① Check the belows relays in control panel.
If governor switch is tripped, the Relay "X29" shall be Off.

And after changing the mode switch to MCS(Inspection) from MAUTO, please jumper
from the TC10(EXIT) terminal to TT01(CG), TT02(CGX), TT03(WG), TT04(TES),
TT05(TESX) terminals ........ each by one point with the E-STOP Switch on TCB Board
is On.

CAUTION
Please take out the jumper line after checking the above terminals for safety switches.

* Refer to the Wiring Diagram COL.03 for Elevator Safety Line Circuit.

② Then, please Up and Down the car by manual.

If you turn sheave of traction machine with holding wire rope, car governor or
counterweight governor must be catched.

③ And also, you can find which governor is tripped or not at the top of elevator trunk.

2) Releasing method for the tripped governor switch of the counterweight and the car.

① Turn-off the elevator's main electric power.

② Fix the car by using the chain block. (It is very important for safe working)

③ As the above ②, fix the counterweight.

④ If you lift up the counterweight by 200mm, the tripped governor switch is

automatically released.

⑤ Also, if you lift up the car by 200mm, the tripped governor switch is automatically released.

⑥ Turn-on the elevator's electric power.

⑦ Check the operational condition of elevator by Manual mode (MCS) and Auto mode
(MAUTO).

7-13
* Refer to the following Governor and Governor Tension Sheave Drawing, and the Wiring
Diagram COL.03 for Elevator Safety Line Circuit.

C
W
T
.
S
A
F
E
T
Y

Figure 7.8 Governor and Governor Tension Sheave

7-14
APPENDIX #1

WORKING PROCEDURE
FOR MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION ON CAR TOP

In order to recognize the safe working procedure when the person works on the car top in Elevator
Trunk, the following procedure is to be educated to the concerned person.

Before entering the elevator trunk,

; Change the operation mode from “MAUTO” to “MCS” on TCB Board in Control Panel. [Figure 1]
Then, Hall Indicating Panel would indicate “OUT OF SERVICE”. And, any call for the deck would
not be registered.

MAUTO/MCS
SWITCH
ON TCB
BOARD

[Figure 1]

Two(2) persons are required when working on car top, and follow the below.
1. Check where the elevator car is positioned.
2. Open the landing door of one floor higher then elevator is.
(If the elevator is at 2nd floor, open the 3rd floor hatch door)
3. Keep the landing door open until the person on car top pushes emergency stop switch on car
junction box and changes "AUTO/INSP" switch on car junction box to "INSP" position.
4. Turn the hand lamp on which is provided on the car top.
5. Close the landing door after re-check of "AUTO/INSP" switch position.
6. Release emergency stop switch
7. Carry out the necessary maintenance/inspection work on car top using by remote box.
8. After completing maintenance/inspection, follow the above in reverse order.

# Abbreviation
- MAUTO: Machine-room AUTOmatic Mode
- MCS: MaChine-room Slow operation mode
- INSP: INSPection Mode